Panasonic HC-V10EG manual

View a manual of the Panasonic HC-V10EG below. All manuals on ManualsCat.com can be viewed completely free of charge. By using the 'Select a language' button, you can choose the language of the manual you want to view.

  • Brand: Panasonic
  • Product: Camcorder
  • Model/name: HC-V10EG
  • Filetype: PDF
  • Available languages: Turkish, German, Dutch, English, Italian, Norwegian, Greek

Table of Contents

Page: 0
Operating Instructions
Digital Video Camera
Model No. HC-V10
Before use, please read these instructions completely.
until
VQT4C56
Operating Instructions
Digital Video Camera
Model No. HC-V10
Before use, please read these instructions completely.
until
VQT4C56
Operating Instructions
Digital Video Camera
Model No. HC-V10
Before use, please read these instructions completely.
until
VQT4C56
Upute za uporabu
Digitalna videokamera
Model br. HC-V10
Prije uporabe u cijelosti pročitajte ove upute.
Web-mjesto: http://www.panasonic.hr
VQT4C56
Page: 5
- 6 -
1 LCD monitor
≥ It can open up to 90o.
≥ It can rotate up to 180o A towards the lens
or 90o B towards the opposite direction.
2 Intelligent auto/Manual button
[iA/MANUAL] (l 22, 44)
3 Optical image stabilizer button
[ O.I.S.] (l 34)
4 Power button [ ] (l 15)
5 Delete button [ ] (l 53)
6 Audio-video output terminal [A/V]
(l 57, 62)
≥ Use the AV cable (only the supplied
cable).
7 USB terminal [ ] (l 10, 71)
8 Access lamp [ACCESS] (l 14)
9 SD card slot (l 14)
10 SD card cover [SD CARD] (l 14)
Preparation
Names and Functions of Main Parts
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8
10
9
Due to limitations in LCD production
technology, there may be some tiny bright
or dark spots on the LCD monitor screen.
However, this is not a malfunction and
does not affect the recorded picture.
 
- 6 -
1 LCD monitor
≥ It can open up to 90o.
≥ It can rotate up to 180o A towards the lens
or 90o B towards the opposite direction.
2 Intelligent auto/Manual button
[iA/MANUAL] (l 22, 44)
3 Optical image stabilizer button
[ O.I.S.] (l 34)
4 Power button [ ] (l 15)
5 Delete button [ ] (l 53)
6 Audio-video output terminal [A/V]
(l 57, 62)
≥ Use the AV cable (only the supplied
cable).
7 USB terminal [ ] (l 10, 71)
8 Access lamp [ACCESS] (l 14)
9 SD card slot (l 14)
10 SD card cover [SD CARD] (l 14)
Preparation
Names and Functions of Main Parts
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8
10
9
Due to limitations in LCD production
technology, there may be some tiny bright
or dark spots on the LCD monitor screen.
However, this is not a malfunction and
does not affect the recorded picture.
 
- 6 -
1 LCD monitor
≥ It can open up to 90o.
≥ It can rotate up to 180o A towards the lens
or 90o B towards the opposite direction.
2 Intelligent auto/Manual button
[iA/MANUAL] (l 22, 44)
3 Optical image stabilizer button
[ O.I.S.] (l 34)
4 Power button [ ] (l 15)
5 Delete button [ ] (l 53)
6 Audio-video output terminal [A/V]
(l 57, 62)
≥ Use the AV cable (only the supplied
cable).
7 USB terminal [ ] (l 10, 71)
8 Access lamp [ACCESS] (l 14)
9 SD card slot (l 14)
10 SD card cover [SD CARD] (l 14)
Preparation
Names and Functions of Main Parts
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8
10
9
Due to limitations in LCD production
technology, there may be some tiny bright
or dark spots on the LCD monitor screen.
However, this is not a malfunction and
does not affect the recorded picture.
 
- 6 -
1 LCD monitor
≥ It can open up to 90o.
≥ It can rotate up to 180o A towards the lens
or 90o B towards the opposite direction.
2 Intelligent auto/Manual button
[iA/MANUAL] (l 22, 44)
3 Optical image stabilizer button
[ O.I.S.] (l 34)
4 Power button [ ] (l 15)
5 Delete button [ ] (l 53)
6 Audio-video output terminal [A/V]
(l 57, 62)
≥ Use the AV cable (only the supplied
cable).
7 USB terminal [ ] (l 10, 71)
8 Access lamp [ACCESS] (l 14)
9 SD card slot (l 14)
10 SD card cover [SD CARD] (l 14)
Preparation
Names and Functions of Main Parts
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8
10
9
Due to limitations in LCD production
technology, there may be some tiny bright
or dark spots on the LCD monitor screen.
However, this is not a malfunction and
does not affect the recorded picture.
 
- 6 -
1 LCD monitor
≥ It can open up to 90o.
≥ It can rotate up to 180o A towards the lens
or 90o B towards the opposite direction.
2 Intelligent auto/Manual button
[iA/MANUAL] (l 22, 44)
3 Optical image stabilizer button
[ O.I.S.] (l 34)
4 Power button [ ] (l 15)
5 Delete button [ ] (l 53)
6 Audio-video output terminal [A/V]
(l 57, 62)
≥ Use the AV cable (only the supplied
cable).
7 USB terminal [ ] (l 10, 71)
8 Access lamp [ACCESS] (l 14)
9 SD card slot (l 14)
10 SD card cover [SD CARD] (l 14)
Preparation
Names and Functions of Main Parts
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8
10
9
Due to limitations in LCD production
technology, there may be some tiny bright
or dark spots on the LCD monitor screen.
However, this is not a malfunction and
does not affect the recorded picture.
 
- 6 -
1 LCD monitor
●
●Može se otvoriti do 90°.
●
●Može se zakrenuti do 180° u
smjeru objektiva, ili 90° u suprotnom
smjeru.
2 Gumb inteligentnog automatskog/
ručnog načina rada [iA/MANUAL]
(→ 22, 44)
3 Gumb optičkog stabilizatora slike
[ O.I.S.] (→ 34)
4 Gumb za uključivanje/isključivanje
[ ] (→ 15)
5 Gumb za brisanje [ ] (→ 53)
6 Audio-video priključak [A/V]
(→ 57, 62)
●
●Koristite AV kabel (samo isporučeni
kabel)
7 USB priključak [ ] (→ 10,71)
8 Pokazatelj pristupa [ACCESS]
(→ 14)
9 Utor za SD karticu (→ 14)
10 Poklopac SD kartice [SD CARD]
(→ 14)
Zbog ograničenja u tehnologiji
proizvodnje LCD-a, na LCD monitoru
mogu nastati manje svijetle ili tamne
točke. Međutim, ne radi se o pogrešci i
to ne utječe na snimljenu sliku.
Nazivi i funkcije osnovnih dijelova
Priprema
- 6 -
1 LCD monitor
≥ It can open up to 90o.
≥ It can rotate up to 180o A towards the len
or 90o B towards the opposite direction.
2 Intelligent auto/Manual button
[iA/MANUAL] (l 22, 44)
3 Optical image stabilizer button
[ O.I.S.] (l 34)
4 Power button [ ] (l 15)
5 Delete button [ ] (l 53)
6 Audio-video output terminal [A/V]
(l 57, 62)
≥ Use the AV cable (only the supplied
cable).
7 USB terminal [ ] (l 10, 71)
8 Access lamp [ACCESS] (l 14)
9 SD card slot (l 14)
10 SD card cover [SD CARD] (l 14)
Preparation
Names and Functions of Main Parts
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8
10
9
Due to limitations in LCD production
technology, there may be some tiny brigh
or dark spots on the LCD monitor screen
However, this is not a malfunction and
does not affect the recorded picture.
 
- 6 -
1 LCD monitor
≥ It can open up to 90o.
≥ It can rotate up to 180o A towards the lens
or 90o B towards the opposite direction.
2 Intelligent auto/Manual button
[iA/MANUAL] (l 22, 44)
3 Optical image stabilizer button
[ O.I.S.] (l 34)
4 Power button [ ] (l 15)
5 Delete button [ ] (l 53)
6 Audio-video output terminal [A/V]
(l 57, 62)
≥ Use the AV cable (only the supplied
cable).
7 USB terminal [ ] (l 10, 71)
8 Access lamp [ACCESS] (l 14)
9 SD card slot (l 14)
10 SD card cover [SD CARD] (l 14)
Preparation
Names and Functions of Main Parts
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8
10
9
Due to limitations in LCD production
technology, there may be some tiny bright
or dark spots on the LCD monitor screen.
However, this is not a malfunction and
does not affect the recorded picture.
 
- 6 -
1 LCD monitor
≥ It can open up to 90o.
≥ It can rotate up to 180o A towards the lens
or 90o B towards the opposite direction.
2 Intelligent auto/Manual button
[iA/MANUAL] (l 22, 44)
3 Optical image stabilizer button
[ O.I.S.] (l 34)
4 Power button [ ] (l 15)
5 Delete button [ ] (l 53)
6 Audio-video output terminal [A/V]
(l 57, 62)
≥ Use the AV cable (only the supplied
cable).
7 USB terminal [ ] (l 10, 71)
8 Access lamp [ACCESS] (l 14)
9 SD card slot (l 14)
10 SD card cover [SD CARD] (l 14)
Preparation
Names and Functions of Main Parts
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8
10
9
Due to limitations in LCD production
technology, there may be some tiny bright
or dark spots on the LCD monitor screen.
However, this is not a malfunction and
does not affect the recorded picture.
 
- 6 -
1 LCD monitor
≥ It can open up to 90o.
≥ It can rotate up to 180o A towards the lens
or 90o B towards the opposite direction.
2 Intelligent auto/Manual button
[iA/MANUAL] (l 22, 44)
3 Optical image stabilizer button
[ O.I.S.] (l 34)
4 Power button [ ] (l 15)
5 Delete button [ ] (l 53)
6 Audio-video output terminal [A/V]
(l 57, 62)
≥ Use the AV cable (only the supplied
cable).
7 USB terminal [ ] (l 10, 71)
8 Access lamp [ACCESS] (l 14)
9 SD card slot (l 14)
10 SD card cover [SD CARD] (l 14)
Preparation
Names and Functions of Main Parts
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8
10
9
Due to limitations in LCD production
technology, there may be some tiny bright
or dark spots on the LCD monitor screen.
However, this is not a malfunction and
does not affect the recorded picture.
 
- 6 -
1 LCD monitor
≥ It can open up to 90o.
≥ It can rotate up to 180o A towards the lens
or 90o B towards the opposite direction.
2 Intelligent auto/Manual button
[iA/MANUAL] (l 22, 44)
3 Optical image stabilizer button
[ O.I.S.] (l 34)
4 Power button [ ] (l 15)
5 Delete button [ ] (l 53)
6 Audio-video output terminal [A/V]
(l 57, 62)
≥ Use the AV cable (only the supplied
cable).
7 USB terminal [ ] (l 10, 71)
8 Access lamp [ACCESS] (l 14)
9 SD card slot (l 14)
10 SD card cover [SD CARD] (l 14)
Preparation
Names and Functions of Main Parts
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8
10
9
Due to limitations in LCD production
technology, there may be some tiny bright
or dark spots on the LCD monitor screen.
However, this is not a malfunction and
does not affect the recorded picture.
 
Page: 6
- 7 -
11 Lens cover
12 Lens
13 Lens cover opening/closing switch
When not using the unit, close the lens
cover to protect the lens.
≥ Slide the opening/closing switch to
open/close the cover.
14 Internal stereo microphones
15 Menu button [MENU] (l 27)
16 Status indicator (l 15)
17 Mode switch (l 16)
18 Recording start/stop button (l 19)
19 Cursor button (l 24, 27, 35)
≥ Use the cursor button to select the
recording functions and playback
operations, and to operate the menu
screen.
≥ In these operating instructions, the cursor
button is denoted as shown below or as
3/4/2/1.
Example: For pressing the (down) button
20 Enter button [ENTER] (l 24, 27, 35)
21 Battery holder (l 9)
12
13
14
11
17
15 18
21
20
19
16
or Press 4
- 7 -
11 Lens cover
12 Lens
13 Lens cover opening/closing switch
When not using the unit, close the lens
cover to protect the lens.
≥ Slide the opening/closing switch to
open/close the cover.
14 Internal stereo microphones
15 Menu button [MENU] (l 27)
16 Status indicator (l 15)
17 Mode switch (l 16)
18 Recording start/stop button (l 19)
19 Cursor button (l 24, 27, 35)
≥ Use the cursor button to select the
recording functions and playback
operations, and to operate the menu
screen.
≥ In these operating instructions, the cursor
button is denoted as shown below or as
3/4/2/1.
Example: For pressing the (down) button
20 Enter button [ENTER] (l 24, 27, 35)
21 Battery holder (l 9)
12
13
14
11
17
15 18
21
20
19
16
or Press 4
- 7 -
11 Lens cover
12 Lens
13 Lens cover opening/closing switch
When not using the unit, close the lens
cover to protect the lens.
≥ Slide the opening/closing switch to
open/close the cover.
14 Internal stereo microphones
15 Menu button [MENU] (l 27)
16 Status indicator (l 15)
17 Mode switch (l 16)
18 Recording start/stop button (l 19)
19 Cursor button (l 24, 27, 35)
≥ Use the cursor button to select the
recording functions and playback
operations, and to operate the menu
screen.
≥ In these operating instructions, the cursor
button is denoted as shown below or as
3/4/2/1.
Example: For pressing the (down) button
20 Enter button [ENTER] (l 24, 27, 35)
21 Battery holder (l 9)
12
13
14
11
17
15 18
21
20
19
16
or Press 4
- 7 -
11 Lens cover
12 Lens
13 Lens cover opening/closing switch
When not using the unit, close the lens
cover to protect the lens.
≥ Slide the opening/closing switch to
open/close the cover.
14 Internal stereo microphones
15 Menu button [MENU] (l 27)
16 Status indicator (l 15)
17 Mode switch (l 16)
18 Recording start/stop button (l 19)
19 Cursor button (l 24, 27, 35)
≥ Use the cursor button to select the
recording functions and playback
operations, and to operate the menu
screen.
≥ In these operating instructions, the cursor
button is denoted as shown below or as
3/4/2/1.
Example: For pressing the (down) button
20 Enter button [ENTER] (l 24, 27, 35)
21 Battery holder (l 9)
12
13
14
11
17
15 18
21
20
19
16
or Press 4
- 7 -
11 Aktivni poklopac objektiva
12 Objektiv
13 Gumb za otvaranje/zatvaranje
poklopca objektiva
Kada se uređaj ne koristi, zatvorite
poklopac objektiva kako biste ga zaštitili.
●
●Pomaknite prekidač za otvaranje/zatvaranje
da biste otvorili/zatvorili poklopac.
14. Unutarnji stereomikrofoni
15 Gumb izbornika [MENU] (→ 27)
16 Pokazatelj statusa (→ 15)
17 Sklopka za prebacivanje načina
rada (→ 16)
18 Gumb za početak/kraj snimanja
(→ 19)
19 Kursorski gumb (→ 24, 27, 35)
●
●Kursorski gumb koristite za odabir
funkcija snimanja i reprodukciju te za
upravljanje zaslonom izbornika.
●
●U ovim uputama kursorski gumb
opisuje se prema niže prikazanoj slici ili
kao ▲/▼/◄/►.
Primjer: Kad pritisnete gumb prema dolje
ili Pritisnite ▼
20 Gumb za potvrđivanje [ENTER]
(→ 24, 27, 35)
21 Držač baterije (→ 9)
Page: 7
- 8 -
22 Battery release lever [BATTERY]
(l 9)
23 Tripod receptacle
≥ If you attach a tripod which has a 5.5 mm
screw or larger, it may damage this unit.
24 Photoshot button [ ] (l 21)
25 Zoom lever [W/T] (In Recording
Mode) (l 33)
Thumbnail display switch [ / ]/
Volume lever [sVOLr] (In Playback
Mode) (l 25)
26 Speaker
27 Grip belt
Adjust the length of the grip belt so that it fits
your hand.
1 Flip the belt.
2 Adjust the length.
3 Replace the belt.
28 HDMI mini connector (l 57, 60)
22 23
25
24
27
26
28



- 8 -
22 Battery release lever [BATTERY]
(l 9)
23 Tripod receptacle
≥ If you attach a tripod which has a 5.5 mm
screw or larger, it may damage this unit.
24 Photoshot button [ ] (l 21)
25 Zoom lever [W/T] (In Recording
Mode) (l 33)
Thumbnail display switch [ / ]/
Volume lever [sVOLr] (In Playback
Mode) (l 25)
26 Speaker
27 Grip belt
Adjust the length of the grip belt so that it fits
your hand.
1 Flip the belt.
2 Adjust the length.
3 Replace the belt.
28 HDMI mini connector (l 57, 60)
22 23
25
24
27
26
28



- 8 -
22 Battery release lever [BATTERY]
(l 9)
23 Tripod receptacle
≥ If you attach a tripod which has a 5.5 mm
screw or larger, it may damage this unit.
24 Photoshot button [ ] (l 21)
25 Zoom lever [W/T] (In Recording
Mode) (l 33)
Thumbnail display switch [ / ]/
Volume lever [sVOLr] (In Playback
Mode) (l 25)
26 Speaker
27 Grip belt
Adjust the length of the grip belt so that it fits
your hand.
1 Flip the belt.
2 Adjust the length.
3 Replace the belt.
28 HDMI mini connector (l 57, 60)
22 23
25
24
27
26
28



- 8 -
22 Battery release lever [BATTERY]
(l 9)
23 Tripod receptacle
≥ If you attach a tripod which has a 5.5 mm
screw or larger, it may damage this unit.
24 Photoshot button [ ] (l 21)
25 Zoom lever [W/T] (In Recording
Mode) (l 33)
Thumbnail display switch [ / ]/
Volume lever [sVOLr] (In Playback
Mode) (l 25)
26 Speaker
27 Grip belt
Adjust the length of the grip belt so that it fits
your hand.
1 Flip the belt.
2 Adjust the length.
3 Replace the belt.
28 HDMI mini connector (l 57, 60)
22 23
25
24
27
26
28



- 8 -
22 Battery release lever [BATTERY]
(l 9)
23 Tripod receptacle
≥ If you attach a tripod which has a 5.5 mm
screw or larger, it may damage this unit.
24 Photoshot button [ ] (l 21)
25 Zoom lever [W/T] (In Recording
Mode) (l 33)
Thumbnail display switch [ / ]/
Volume lever [sVOLr] (In Playback
Mode) (l 25)
26 Speaker
27 Grip belt
Adjust the length of the grip belt so that it fits
your hand.
1 Flip the belt.
2 Adjust the length.
3 Replace the belt.
28 HDMI mini connector (l 57, 60)
22 23
25
24
27
26
28



- 8 -
22 Ručica za otpuštanje baterije
[BATTERY] (→ 9)
23 Utor za montiranje tronošca
●
●Ne spajajte tronožac koji ima vijak
od 5,5 mm ili više jer može doći do
oštećenja uređaja.
24 Gumb za snimanje fotografija [ ]
(→ 21)
25 Ručica zuma [W/T] (u načinu
snimanja) (→ 33)
Prekidač za prebacivanje
minijatura [ ] Ručica za
podešavanje glasnoće [-VOL+] (u
načinu reprodukcije) (→ 25)
26 Zvučnik
27 Remen za držanje
Prilagodite dužinu remena za držanje
tako da pristaje vašoj ruci.
Okrenite remen.
Podesite dužinu.
Zamijenite remen.
28. HDMI minipriključak (→ 57, 60)
- 8 -
22 Battery release lever [BATTERY]
(l 9)
23 Tripod receptacle
≥ If you attach a tripod which has a 5.5 mm
screw or larger, it may damage this unit.
24 Photoshot button [ ] (l 21)
25 Zoom lever [W/T] (In Recording
Mode) (l 33)
Thumbnail display switch [ / ]/
Volume lever [sVOLr] (In Playback
Mode) (l 25)
26 Speaker
27 Grip belt
Adjust the length of the grip belt so that it fits
your hand.
1 Flip the belt.
2 Adjust the length.
3 Replace the belt.
28 HDMI mini connector (l 57, 60)
22 23
25
24
27
26
28



Page: 8
- 9 -
∫ About batteries that you can use with this unit
The battery that can be used with this unit is VW-VBL090/VW-VBK180/VW-VBK360.
Inserting/removing the battery
≥ Press the power button to turn off the unit. (l 15)
Install the battery by inserting it in the direction shown in the figure.
Preparation
Power supply
It has been found that counterfeit battery packs which look very similar to the
genuine product are made available to purchase in some markets. Some of these
battery packs are not adequately protected with internal protection to meet the
requirements of appropriate safety standards. There is a possibility that these
battery packs may lead to fire or explosion. Please be advised that we are not liable
for any accident or failure occurring as a result of use of a counterfeit battery pack.
To ensure that safe products are used we would recommend that a genuine
Panasonic battery pack is used.
Removing the battery
Be sure to hold down the power button until
the status indicator goes off. Then remove
the battery while supporting the unit to
prevent it from dropping.
Move the battery release lever in the
direction indicated by the arrow and
remove the battery when unlocked.
BATTERY
Insert the battery until it clicks and
locks.
- 9 -
∫ About batteries that you can use with this unit
The battery that can be used with this unit is VW-VBL090/VW-VBK180/VW-VBK360.
Inserting/removing the battery
≥ Press the power button to turn off the unit. (l 15)
Install the battery by inserting it in the direction shown in the figure.
Preparation
Power supply
It has been found that counterfeit battery packs which look very similar to the
genuine product are made available to purchase in some markets. Some of these
battery packs are not adequately protected with internal protection to meet the
requirements of appropriate safety standards. There is a possibility that these
battery packs may lead to fire or explosion. Please be advised that we are not liable
for any accident or failure occurring as a result of use of a counterfeit battery pack.
To ensure that safe products are used we would recommend that a genuine
Panasonic battery pack is used.
Removing the battery
Be sure to hold down the power button until
the status indicator goes off. Then remove
the battery while supporting the unit to
prevent it from dropping.
Move the battery release lever in the
direction indicated by the arrow and
remove the battery when unlocked.
BATTERY
Insert the battery until it clicks and
locks.
- 9 -
■
■ Baterije za uporabu s ovim uređajem
S ovim uređajem koristite bateriju VW-VBL090/VW-VBK180/VW-VBK360.
Umetanje/vađenje baterije
●
●Pritisnite gumb za uključivanje/isključivanje da biste isključili uređaj. (→ 15)
Umetnite bateriju u smjeru prikazanom na slici.
Vađenje baterije
Držite gumb za uključivanje/isključivanje
sve dok se pokazatelj statusa ne isključi.
Zatim izvadite bateriju pridržavajući uređaj
da ne bi pao.
Pomaknite ručicu za otpuštanje baterije
u smjeru naznačenom strelicom i
izvadite bateriju kada se odblokira.
Umetnite bateriju tako da čujete
zvuk klika, a baterija sjedne na
svoje mjesto.
Na nekim se tržištima mogu nabaviti krivotvorene baterije koje su izgledom
vrlo slične izvornima. Neke od tih baterija nemaju primjerenu unutarnju zaštitu
i ne zadovoljavaju odgovarajuće sigurnosne standarde. Postoji opasnost od
požara ili eksplozije. Tvrtka Panasonic odriče se odgovornosti u slučaju bilo
kakvih nezgoda ili kvarova nastalih uslijed uporabe krivotvorenih baterija.
Da biste bili sigurni da koristite sigurne proizvode, predlažemo korištenje
originalnih Panasonicovih baterija.
Napajanje
Priprema
Page: 9
9
(ENG) VQT4C37
Charging the battery
∫ Charging with an AC adaptor.
The unit is in the standby condition when the AC adaptor is connected. The primary circuit is
always “live” as long as the AC adaptor is connected to an electrical outlet.
Important:
≥ Be sure to use the supplied AC adaptor and USB cable. Do not use parts supplied
with other equipment.
≥ The AC adaptor and USB cable are for use with this unit only. Do not use them with
other equipment. Similarly, do not use AC adaptors and USB cables from other
equipment with this unit.
≥ The battery can also be charged using a battery charger (VW-BC10E: optional).
≥ The battery cannot be charged when the power is on. Press the power button to turn
off the power. (l 14)
≥ It is recommended to charge the battery in a temperature between 10 oC and 30 oC.
(The battery temperature should also be the same.)
A USB terminal
B To the AC outlet
≥ Insert the plugs as far as they will go.
1 Open the LCD monitor.
2 Connect the USB cable to the AC adaptor.
≥ Check that the plug portion of the AC adaptor is not loose or misaligned.
≥ Do not use any other AC adaptors except the supplied one.
≥ Do not use any other USB cables except the supplied one. (Operation is not guaranteed
with any other USB cables.)
3 Plug the AC adaptor into the AC outlet.
4 Connect the USB cable to the unit.
≥ The status indicator C will flash red with approx. 2 seconds period (off for approx. 1 second, on
for approx. 1 second), indicating that charging has begun.
It will turn off when the charging is completed.
When this unit is purchased, the battery is not charged. Charge the battery fully
before using this unit for the first time.








HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 9 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
9
(ENG) VQT4C37
Charging the battery
∫ Charging with an AC adaptor.
The unit is in the standby condition when the AC adaptor is connected. The primary circuit is
always “live” as long as the AC adaptor is connected to an electrical outlet.
Important:
≥ Be sure to use the supplied AC adaptor and USB cable. Do not use parts supplied
with other equipment.
≥ The AC adaptor and USB cable are for use with this unit only. Do not use them with
other equipment. Similarly, do not use AC adaptors and USB cables from other
equipment with this unit.
≥ The battery can also be charged using a battery charger (VW-BC10E: optional).
≥ The battery cannot be charged when the power is on. Press the power button to turn
off the power. (l 14)
≥ It is recommended to charge the battery in a temperature between 10 oC and 30 oC.
(The battery temperature should also be the same.)
A USB terminal
B To the AC outlet
≥ Insert the plugs as far as they will go.
1 Open the LCD monitor.
2 Connect the USB cable to the AC adaptor.
≥ Check that the plug portion of the AC adaptor is not loose or misaligned.
≥ Do not use any other AC adaptors except the supplied one.
≥ Do not use any other USB cables except the supplied one. (Operation is not guaranteed
with any other USB cables.)
3 Plug the AC adaptor into the AC outlet.
4 Connect the USB cable to the unit.
≥ The status indicator C will flash red with approx. 2 seconds period (off for approx. 1 second, on
for approx. 1 second), indicating that charging has begun.
It will turn off when the charging is completed.
When this unit is purchased, the battery is not charged. Charge the battery fully
before using this unit for the first time.








HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 9 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
- 10 -
Punjenje baterije
Kada kupite uređaj, baterija nije napunjena. Prije prvog korištenja uređaja
napunite bateriju do kraja.
USB priključak
U strujnu utičnicu
●
●Umetnite utikače do kraja.
1 Otvorite LCD monitor.
2 Priključite USB kabel u prilagodnik za izmjenični napon.
●
●Utikač prilagodnika za izmjenični napon mora biti čvrsto priključen i poravnat.
●
●Nemojte koristiti prilagodnike za izmjenični napon osim isporučenog prilagodnika.
●
●Nemojte koristiti druge USB kabele osim onog koji je isporučen (ne može se
zajamčiti ispravan rad s drugim USB kabelima).
3 Umetnite prilagodnik za izmjenični napon u strujnu utičnicu.
4 Priključite USB kabel u uređaj.
●
●Pokazatelj statusa treperit će crveno približno 2 sekunde (isključen približno
jednu sekundu, uključen približno 1 sekundu), što znači da je punjenje započelo.
Kad punjenje završi, pokazatelj će se isključiti.
■
■ Punjenje pomoću prilagodnika za izmjenični napon.
Kad je prilagodnik za izmjenični napon spojen, uređaj je u stanju čekanja. Primarni sklop
je „pod naponom” sve dok je prilagodnik za izmjenični napon ukopčan u strujnu utičnicu.
Važno:
●
●Koristite isporučeni prilagodnik za izmjenični napon i USB kabel. Nemojte
koristiti dijelove isporučene s drugim uređajima.
●
●Prilagodnik za izmjenični napon i USB kabel namijenjeni su za uporabu samo s
ovim uređajem. Nemojte ih koristiti s drugim uređajima. Također, s ovim uređajem
nemojte koristiti prilagodnik za izmjenični napon i USB kabele drugih uređaja.
●
●Bateriju nije moguće puniti dok je uređaj uključen. Pritisnite gumb za
uključivanje/isključivanje da biste isključili uređaj. (→ 15)
●
●Preporučujemo da bateriju punite na temperaturi između 10 °C i 30 °C
(temperatura baterije trebala bi biti jednaka).
9
(ENG) VQT4C37
Charging the battery
∫ Charging with an AC adaptor.
The unit is in the standby condition when the AC adaptor is connected. The primary circuit is
always “live” as long as the AC adaptor is connected to an electrical outlet.
Important:
≥ Be sure to use the supplied AC adaptor and USB cable. Do not use parts supplied
with other equipment.
≥ The AC adaptor and USB cable are for use with this unit only. Do not use them with
other equipment. Similarly, do not use AC adaptors and USB cables from other
equipment with this unit.
≥ The battery can also be charged using a battery charger (VW-BC10E: optional).
≥ The battery cannot be charged when the power is on. Press the power button to turn
off the power. (l 14)
≥ It is recommended to charge the battery in a temperature between 10 oC and 30 oC.
(The battery temperature should also be the same.)
A USB terminal
B To the AC outlet
≥ Insert the plugs as far as they will go.
1 Open the LCD monitor.
2 Connect the USB cable to the AC adaptor.
≥ Check that the plug portion of the AC adaptor is not loose or misaligned.
≥ Do not use any other AC adaptors except the supplied one.
≥ Do not use any other USB cables except the supplied one. (Operation is not guaranteed
with any other USB cables.)
3 Plug the AC adaptor into the AC outlet.
4 Connect the USB cable to the unit.
≥ The status indicator C will flash red with approx. 2 seconds period (off for approx. 1 second, on
for approx. 1 second), indicating that charging has begun.
It will turn off when the charging is completed.
When this unit is purchased, the battery is not charged. Charge the battery fully
before using this unit for the first time.








HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 9 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
Page: 10
10
VQT4C37 (ENG)
∫ Connecting to the AC outlet
If you turn on the unit while connecting with the AC adaptor, you can use the unit with power
supplied from the outlet.
When recording for a long time, keep the AC adaptor connected and use it together with the battery.
∫ Connecting to a PC and charging.
Charge the unit if you do not have the AC adaptor handy.
A USB cable (supplied)
≥ Insert the plugs as far as they will go.
≥ Press the power button and turn the power off. (l 14)
1 Turn the power of the PC on.
2 Connect the USB cable
≥ The status indicator B will flash red with approx. 2 seconds period (off for approx. 1 second, on for
approx. 1 second), indicating that charging has begun.
It will turn off when the charging is completed.
≥ Do not use any other USB cables except the supplied one. (Operation is not guaranteed
with any other USB cables.)
≥ Always connect directly to a PC.
≥ You cannot charge when the status indicator flashes rapidly, or when it does not light at all.
Charge using the AC adaptor. (l 9)
≥ It will take 2 or 3 times longer to charge compared to when using the AC adaptor.


HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 10 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
10
VQT4C37 (ENG)
∫ Connecting to the AC outlet
If you turn on the unit while connecting with the AC adaptor, you can use the unit with power
supplied from the outlet.
When recording for a long time, keep the AC adaptor connected and use it together with the battery.
∫ Connecting to a PC and charging.
Charge the unit if you do not have the AC adaptor handy.
A USB cable (supplied)
≥ Insert the plugs as far as they will go.
≥ Press the power button and turn the power off. (l 14)
1 Turn the power of the PC on.
2 Connect the USB cable
≥ The status indicator B will flash red with approx. 2 seconds period (off for approx. 1 second, on for
approx. 1 second), indicating that charging has begun.
It will turn off when the charging is completed.
≥ Do not use any other USB cables except the supplied one. (Operation is not guaranteed
with any other USB cables.)
≥ Always connect directly to a PC.
≥ You cannot charge when the status indicator flashes rapidly, or when it does not light at all.
Charge using the AC adaptor. (l 9)
≥ It will take 2 or 3 times longer to charge compared to when using the AC adaptor.


HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 10 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
- 11 -
■
■ Ukopčavanje u strujnu utičnicu
Ako uređaj uključite dok je povezan s prilagodnikom za izmjenični napon, možete ga
koristiti pomoću napajanja iz strujne utičnice.
Pri duljim snimanjima prilagodnik za izmjenični napon neka ostane priključen te ga
koristite zajedno s baterijom.
■
■ Povezivanje s računalom i punjenje.
Punjenje uređaja kada vam prilagodnik za izmjenični napon nije pri ruci.
USB kabel (isporučen)
●
●Umetnite utikače do kraja.
●
●Pritisnite gumb za uključivanje/isključivanje da biste isključili uređaj. (→ 15)
1 Uključite računalo.
2 Spojite USB kabel
●
●Pokazatelj statusa treperit će crveno približno 2 sekunde (isključen približno
jednu sekundu, uključen približno 1 sekundu), što znači da je punjenje započelo.
Kad punjenje završi, pokazatelj će se isključiti.
●
●Nemojte koristiti druge USB kabele osim onog koji je isporučen (ne može se
zajamčiti ispravan rad s drugim USB kabelima).
●
●Uvijek spajajte izravno na računalo.
●
●Punjenje nije moguće ako pokazatelj statusa treperi ubrzano ili ako uopće ne svijetli.
Punite baterije pomoću prilagodnika za izmjenični napon. (→ 10)
●
●Punjenje traje 2-3 puta dulje u odnosu na punjenje pomoću prilagodnika za
izmjenični napon.
●
●Ako ne namjeravate koristiti uređaj neko dulje vrijeme, odspojite USB kabel iz
uređaja iz sigurnosnih razloga.
●
●Punjenje možda neće biti moguće, ovisno o radnom okruženju korištenog računala
(npr. posebno prilagođeno računalo).
●
●Punjenje će se zaustaviti nakon što isključite računalo ili ga stavite u stanje
mirovanja. Punjenje će se nastaviti nakon što ponovno uključite računalo ili ga vratite
iz stanja mirovanja.
●
●Uređaj će se puniti ako je spojen na Panasonicov Blu-ray snimač ili DVD snimač
putem USB kabela, čak i ako je isključen.
●
●Preporučujemo uporabu izvornih Panasonicovih baterija (→ 12).
●
●Ako koristite baterije drugih proizvođača, ne možemo jamčiti kvalitetu ovog
proizvoda.
●
●Nemojte ga zagrijavati i izlagati otvorenom plamenu.
●
●Baterije nemojte ostavljati dulje vrijeme u vozilu sa zatvorenim vratima i prozorima
koje je direktno izloženo sunčevim zrakama.
10
VQT4C37 (ENG)
∫ Connecting to the AC outlet
If you turn on the unit while connecting with the AC adaptor, you can use the unit with power
supplied from the outlet.
When recording for a long time, keep the AC adaptor connected and use it together with the battery.
∫ Connecting to a PC and charging.
Charge the unit if you do not have the AC adaptor handy.
A USB cable (supplied)
≥ Insert the plugs as far as they will go.
≥ Press the power button and turn the power off. (l 14)
1 Turn the power of the PC on.
2 Connect the USB cable
≥ The status indicator B will flash red with approx. 2 seconds period (off for approx. 1 second, on for
approx. 1 second), indicating that charging has begun.
It will turn off when the charging is completed.
≥ Do not use any other USB cables except the supplied one. (Operation is not guaranteed
with any other USB cables.)
≥ Always connect directly to a PC.
≥ You cannot charge when the status indicator flashes rapidly, or when it does not light at all.
Charge using the AC adaptor. (l 9)
≥ It will take 2 or 3 times longer to charge compared to when using the AC adaptor.


HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 10 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
Page: 11
11
(ENG) VQT4C37
≥ If you do not intend to use the unit for an extended period, disconnect the USB cable from
the unit for safety.
≥ Charging may not be possible depending on the operating environment of the PC being
used (such as custom-made PC).
≥ Charging will stop when turning the power of the PC off or forcing it into sleep mode. Charging
will start again when turning the power of the PC on again, or waking from sleep mode.
≥ The unit will be charged if it is connected to a Panasonic Blu-ray disc recorder or DVD
recorder with a USB cable, even if the power is turned off.
≥ We recommend using Panasonic batteries (l 6, 7).
≥ If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee the quality of this product.
≥ Do not heat or expose to flame.
≥ Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct sunlight for a long period of time
with doors and windows closed.
Charging and recording time
∫ Charging/Recording time
≥ Temperature: 25 oC/humidity: 60%RH
≥ Time in the parenthesis is charging time when this unit is connected to a PC, Panasonic
Blu-ray disc recorder, or DVD recorder.
≥ These times are approximations.
≥ The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.
Charging time and recordable time vary depending on the usage conditions such as
high/low temperature.
≥ The actual recordable time refers to the recordable time when repeatedly starting/stopping
recording, turning the unit on/off, moving the zoom lever etc.
≥ The batteries heat up after use or charging. This is not a malfunction.
Battery model number
[Voltage/Capacity
(minimum)]
Charging
time
Recording
mode
Maximum
continuously
recordable
time
Actual
recordable
time
Supplied battery/
VW-VBL090 (optional)
[3.6 V/895 mAh]
2 h 10 min
(3 h)
[1280k720/50p] 1 h 25 min 40 min
[iFrame]/
[640k480/50p]
1 h 40 min 50 min
Battery capacity indication
The display changes as the battery capacity reduces.
# # # #
When the charge runs out, flashes red.
- 12 -
Vrijeme punjenja i snimanja
■
■ Vrijeme punjenja/snimanja
●
●Temperatura: 25 °C/Vlaga: 60 % relativne vlage
●
●Vrijeme u zagradi odnosi se na vrijeme punjenja kada je uređaj spojen na računalo,
Panasonicov Blu-ray snimač ili DVD snimač.
Broj modela baterije
[napon/kapacitet
(minimalni)]
Vrijeme
punjenja
Način
snimanja
Maksimalno
raspoloživo
vrijeme
neprekidnog
snimanja
Stvarno
vrijeme
snimanja
Isporučena baterija/
VW-VBL090
(neobavezna)
[3,6 V/895 mAh]
2 h 10 min
(3 h)
[1280x720/50p] 1 h 25 min 40 min
[iFrame]/
[640x480/50p]
1 h 40 min 50 min
VW-VBK180 (na izbor)
[3,6 V/1790 mAh]
2 h 50 min
(5 h 20
min)
[1280x720/50p] 3 h 10 min 1 h 40 min
[iFrame]/
[640x480/50p]
3 h 45 min 1 h 55 min
VW-VBK360 (na izbor)
[3,6 V/3580 mAh]
4 h 45 min
(10 h)
[1280x720/50p] 6 h 30 min 3 h 20 min
[iFrame]/
[640x480/50p]
7 h 30 min 3 h 55 min
●
●Navedena vremena su približna.
●
●Prikazano vrijeme punjenja odnosi se na slučaj kada je baterija u potpunosti
ispražnjena. Vrijeme punjenja i raspoloživo vrijeme snimanja ovise o uvjetima
korištenja, kao što su visoka/niska temperatura.
●
●Stvarno vrijeme snimanja odnosi se na vrijeme snimanja kod uzastopnog pokretanja/
zaustavljanja snimanja, uključivanja/isključivanja uređaja, pomicanja ručice zuma itd.
●
●Baterije se tijekom uporabe ili punjenja zagrijavaju. Nije riječ o kvaru.
Pokazatelj kapaciteta baterije
Prikaz se mijenja sa smanjenjem kapaciteta baterije.
Kada se baterija isprazni, treperi crveno.
11
(ENG) VQT4C37
≥ If you do not intend to use the unit for an extended period, disconnect the USB cable from
the unit for safety.
≥ Charging may not be possible depending on the operating environment of the PC being
used (such as custom-made PC).
≥ Charging will stop when turning the power of the PC off or forcing it into sleep mode. Charging
will start again when turning the power of the PC on again, or waking from sleep mode.
≥ The unit will be charged if it is connected to a Panasonic Blu-ray disc recorder or DVD
recorder with a USB cable, even if the power is turned off.
≥ We recommend using Panasonic batteries (l 6, 7).
≥ If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee the quality of this product.
≥ Do not heat or expose to flame.
≥ Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct sunlight for a long period of time
with doors and windows closed.
Charging and recording time
∫ Charging/Recording time
≥ Temperature: 25 oC/humidity: 60%RH
≥ Time in the parenthesis is charging time when this unit is connected to a PC, Panasonic
Blu-ray disc recorder, or DVD recorder.
≥ These times are approximations.
≥ The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.
Charging time and recordable time vary depending on the usage conditions such as
high/low temperature.
≥ The actual recordable time refers to the recordable time when repeatedly starting/stopping
recording, turning the unit on/off, moving the zoom lever etc.
≥ The batteries heat up after use or charging. This is not a malfunction.
Battery model number
[Voltage/Capacity
(minimum)]
Charging
time
Recording
mode
Maximum
continuously
recordable
time
Actual
recordable
time
Supplied battery/
VW-VBL090 (optional)
[3.6 V/895 mAh]
2 h 10 min
(3 h)
[1280k720/50p] 1 h 25 min 40 min
[iFrame]/
[640k480/50p]
1 h 40 min 50 min
Battery capacity indication
The display changes as the battery capacity reduces.
# # # #
When the charge runs out, flashes red.
Page: 12
12
VQT4C37 (ENG)
Cards that you can use with this unit
Use SD cards conforming to Class 4 or higher of the SD Speed Class Rating* for
motion picture recording.
* SD Speed Class Rating is the speed
standard regarding continuous writing.
Check via the label on the card, etc.
≥ Please confirm the latest information about SD Memory Cards/SDHC Memory Cards/
SDXC Memory Cards that can be used for motion picture recording on the following
website.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/e_cam
(This website is in English only.)
≥ Operation of the SD Card 256 MB or less is not guaranteed. Also, the SD Card 32 MB or
less cannot be used for the motion picture recording.
≥ 4 GB or more Memory Cards that do not have the SDHC logo or 48 GB or more Memory
Cards that do not have the SDXC logo are not based on SD Memory Card Specifications.
≥ The operation of Memory cards exceeding 64 GB cannot be guaranteed.
≥ When the write-protect switch A on SD card is locked, no recording,
deletion or editing will be possible on the card.
≥ Keep the memory card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
Preparation
Recording to a card
This unit (an SDXC compatible device) is compatible with SD Memory Cards, SDHC
Memory Cards and SDXC Memory Cards. When using an SDHC Memory Card/SDXC
Memory Card with other equipment, check the equipment is compatible with these
Memory Cards.
Card type Capacity
SD Memory Card 512 MB/1 GB/2 GB
SDHC Memory Card 4 GB/6 GB/8 GB/12 GB/16 GB/24 GB/32 GB
SDXC Memory Card 48 GB/64 GB
e.g.:
32
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 12 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
- 13 -
Cards that you can use with this unit
Use SD cards conforming to Class 4 or higher of the SD Speed Class Rating* for
motion picture recording.
* SD Speed Class Rating is the speed
standard regarding continuous writing.
Check via the label on the card, etc.
≥ Please confirm the latest information about SD Memory Cards/SDHC Memory Cards/
SDXC Memory Cards that can be used for motion picture recording on the following
website.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/e_cam
(This website is in English only.)
≥ Operation of the SD Card 256 MB or less is not guaranteed. Also, the SD Card 32 MB or
less cannot be used for the motion picture recording.
≥ 4 GB or more Memory Cards that do not have the SDHC logo or 48 GB or more Memory
Cards that do not have the SDXC logo are not based on SD Memory Card Specifications.
≥ The operation of Memory cards exceeding 64 GB cannot be guaranteed.
≥ When the write-protect switch A on SD card is locked, no recording,
deletion or editing will be possible on the card.
≥ Keep the memory card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
Preparation
Recording to a card
This unit (an SDXC compatible device) is compatible with SD Memory Cards, SDHC
Memory Cards and SDXC Memory Cards. When using an SDHC Memory Card/SDXC
Memory Card with other equipment, check the equipment is compatible with these
Memory Cards.
Card type Capacity
SD Memory Card 512 MB/1 GB/2 GB
SDHC Memory Card 4 GB/6 GB/8 GB/12 GB/16 GB/24 GB/32 GB
SDXC Memory Card 48 GB/64 GB
e.g.:
32
- 13 -
Cards that you can use with this unit
Use SD cards conforming to Class 4 or higher of the SD Speed Class Rating* for
motion picture recording.
* SD Speed Class Rating is the speed
standard regarding continuous writing.
Check via the label on the card, etc.
≥ Please confirm the latest information about SD Memory Cards/SDHC Memory Cards/
SDXC Memory Cards that can be used for motion picture recording on the following
website.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/e_cam
(This website is in English only.)
≥ Operation of the SD Card 256 MB or less is not guaranteed. Also, the SD Card 32 MB or
less cannot be used for the motion picture recording.
≥ 4 GB or more Memory Cards that do not have the SDHC logo or 48 GB or more Memory
Cards that do not have the SDXC logo are not based on SD Memory Card Specifications.
≥ The operation of Memory cards exceeding 64 GB cannot be guaranteed.
≥ When the write-protect switch A on SD card is locked, no recording,
deletion or editing will be possible on the card.
≥ Keep the memory card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
Preparation
Recording to a card
This unit (an SDXC compatible device) is compatible with SD Memory Cards, SDHC
Memory Cards and SDXC Memory Cards. When using an SDHC Memory Card/SDXC
Memory Card with other equipment, check the equipment is compatible with these
Memory Cards.
Card type Capacity
SD Memory Card 512 MB/1 GB/2 GB
SDHC Memory Card 4 GB/6 GB/8 GB/12 GB/16 GB/24 GB/32 GB
SDXC Memory Card 48 GB/64 GB
e.g.:
32
- 13 -
Vrsta kartice Kapacitet
SD memorijska kartica 512 MB/1 GB/2 GB
SDHC memorijska kartica 4 GB/6 GB/8 GB/12 GB/16 GB/24 GB/32 GB
SDXC memorijska kartica 48 GB/64GB
Ovaj je uređaj (SDXC kompatibilan uređaj) kompatibilan s SD, SDHC i SDXC
memorijskim karticama. Kod uporabe SDHC/SDXC memorijske kartice s drugom
opremom, provjerite je li ta oprema kompatibilna s ovim memorijskim karticama.
Kartice koje možete koristiti s ovim uređajem
Koristite SD kartice koje odgovaraju Klasi 4 ili većoj prema klasifikaciji SD
Speed Class Rating* za snimanje videozapisa.
●
●Na sljedećem web-mjestu provjerite najnovije informacije o SD/SDHC/SDXC
memorijskim karticama koje se mogu koristiti za snimanje videozapisa.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/e_cam
(ovo je web-mjesto samo na engleskom).
●
●Rad SD kartice od 256 MB ili manje nije zajamčen. Također, SD kartica od 32 MB ili
manje ne može se koristiti za snimanje videozapisa.
●
●Memorijske kartice od 4 GB ili više koje nemaju logotip SDHC ili memorijske kartice
od 48 GB ili više koje nemaju logotip SDXC ne temelje se na tehničkim podacima za
SD memorijske kartice
●
●Rad memorijskih kartica s više od 64 GB nije zajamčen.
●
●Kada je prekidač za zaštitu od pisanja na SD kartici zaključan,
snimanje, brisanje ili uređivanje na kartici nije moguće.
●
●Čuvajte memorijsku karticu izvan dohvata djece da je ne bi
progutala.
* SD speed class (razred brzine SD
kartice) standard je brzine neprekinutog
zapisivanja. Provjerite naljepnicu na
kartici i sl.
npr.:
Priprema
Snimanje na karticu
12
VQT4C37 (ENG)
Cards that you can use with this unit
Use SD cards conforming to Class 4 or higher of the SD Speed Class Rating* for
motion picture recording.
* SD Speed Class Rating is the speed
standard regarding continuous writing.
Check via the label on the card, etc.
≥ Please confirm the latest information about SD Memory Cards/SDHC Memory Cards/
SDXC Memory Cards that can be used for motion picture recording on the following
website.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/e_cam
(This website is in English only.)
≥ Operation of the SD Card 256 MB or less is not guaranteed. Also, the SD Card 32 MB or
less cannot be used for the motion picture recording.
≥ 4 GB or more Memory Cards that do not have the SDHC logo or 48 GB or more Memory
Cards that do not have the SDXC logo are not based on SD Memory Card Specifications.
≥ The operation of Memory cards exceeding 64 GB cannot be guaranteed.
≥ When the write-protect switch A on SD card is locked, no recording,
deletion or editing will be possible on the card.
≥ Keep the memory card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
Preparation
Recording to a card
This unit (an SDXC compatible device) is compatible with SD Memory Cards, SDHC
Memory Cards and SDXC Memory Cards. When using an SDHC Memory Card/SDXC
Memory Card with other equipment, check the equipment is compatible with these
Memory Cards.
Card type Capacity
SD Memory Card 512 MB/1 GB/2 GB
SDHC Memory Card 4 GB/6 GB/8 GB/12 GB/16 GB/24 GB/32 GB
SDXC Memory Card 48 GB/64 GB
e.g.:
32
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 12 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
Page: 13
13
(ENG) VQT4C37
Inserting/removing an SD card
Caution:
Check that the access lamp has gone off.
1 Open the LCD monitor.
2 Open the SD card cover and
insert (remove) the SD card
into (from) the card slot B.
≥ Face the label side C in the direction
shown in the illustration and press it
straight in as far as it will go.
≥ Press the centre of the SD card and then
pull it straight out.
3 Securely close the SD card
cover.
≥ Securely close it until it clicks.
≥ Do not touch the terminals on the back of
the SD card.
≥ Do not apply strong shocks, bend, or drop
the SD card.
≥ Electrical noise, static electricity or the
failure of this unit or the SD card may
damage or erase the data stored on the
SD card.
≥ When the card access lamp is lit, do not:
jRemove the SD card
jTurn the unit off
jInsert and remove the USB cable
jExpose the unit to vibrations or shock
Performing the above while the lamp is on
may result in damage to data/SD card or
this unit.
≥ Do not expose the terminals of the SD
card to water, dirt or dust.
≥ Do not place SD cards in the following areas:
jIn direct sunlight
jIn very dusty or humid areas
jNear a heater
jLocations susceptible to significant
difference in temperature (condensation
can occur.)
jWhere static electricity or
electromagnetic waves occur
≥ To protect SD cards, return them to their
cases when you are not using them.
≥ About disposing of or giving away the SD
card.
(Refer to the Operating Instructions (PDF
format))
When using an SD card not from Panasonic, or one previously used on other equipment,
for the first time on this unit, format the SD card. (l 21) When the SD card is formatted, all
of the recorded data is deleted. Once the data is deleted, it cannot be restored.



Access lamp [ACCESS] A
≥ When this unit is accessing the SD
card, the access lamp lights up.
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 13 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
13
(ENG) VQT4C37
Inserting/removing an SD card
Caution:
Check that the access lamp has gone off.
1 Open the LCD monitor.
2 Open the SD card cover and
insert (remove) the SD card
into (from) the card slot B.
≥ Face the label side C in the direction
shown in the illustration and press it
straight in as far as it will go.
≥ Press the centre of the SD card and then
pull it straight out.
3 Securely close the SD card
cover.
≥ Securely close it until it clicks.
≥ Do not touch the terminals on the back of
the SD card.
≥ Do not apply strong shocks, bend, or drop
the SD card.
≥ Electrical noise, static electricity or the
failure of this unit or the SD card may
damage or erase the data stored on the
SD card.
≥ When the card access lamp is lit, do not:
jRemove the SD card
jTurn the unit off
jInsert and remove the USB cable
jExpose the unit to vibrations or shock
Performing the above while the lamp is on
may result in damage to data/SD card or
this unit.
≥ Do not expose the terminals of the SD
card to water, dirt or dust.
≥ Do not place SD cards in the following areas:
jIn direct sunlight
jIn very dusty or humid areas
jNear a heater
jLocations susceptible to significant
difference in temperature (condensation
can occur.)
jWhere static electricity or
electromagnetic waves occur
≥ To protect SD cards, return them to their
cases when you are not using them.
≥ About disposing of or giving away the SD
card.
(Refer to the Operating Instructions (PDF
format))
When using an SD card not from Panasonic, or one previously used on other equipment,
for the first time on this unit, format the SD card. (l 21) When the SD card is formatted, all
of the recorded data is deleted. Once the data is deleted, it cannot be restored.



Access lamp [ACCESS] A
≥ When this unit is accessing the SD
card, the access lamp lights up.
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 13 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
- 14 -
Umetanje/vađenje SD kartice
Oprez:
Provjerite je li se pokazatelj pristupa isključio.
Kada po prvi puta u ovom uređaju koristite SD kartice koje nije proizveo Panasonic
ili karticu koja je prethodno korištena u drugom uređaju, potrebno ju je formatirati.
(→ 32) Kada se SD kartica formatira, svi se snimljeni podaci brišu. Nakon što se
podaci izbrišu, više ih nije moguće vratiti.
1 Otvorite LCD monitor.
2 Otvorite poklopac pretinca
za SD karticu i umetnite
(izvadite) SD karticu u (iz)
utor(a) za karticu .
●
●Stranu s oznakom okrenite u
smjeru prikazanom na slici i ravno
gurnite do kraja.
●
●Pritisnite sredinu SD kartice te je ravno
izvadite.
3 Čvrsto zatvorite poklopac
pretinca za SD karticu.
●
●Čvrsto zatvorite tako da čujete zvuk klika.
Pokazatelj pristupa [ACCESS]
●
●Kada ovaj uređaj pristupa SD kartici,
pokazatelj pristupa se pali.
●
●Nemojte dirati kontakte na stražnjoj
strani SD kartice.
●
●SD karticu nemojte izlagati snažnim
vibracijama, savijati je ili bacati.
●
●Električne smetnje, statički elektricitet ili
kvar ovog uređaja ili SD kartice mogu
oštetiti ili izbrisati podatke pohranjene
na SD kartici.
●
●Kada pokazatelj pristupa kartici svijetli,
nemojte:
-
- Vaditi SD karticu
-
- Isključivati uređaj
-
- Umetati i vaditi USB kabel
-
- Izlagati uređaj vibracijama ili udaru
Izvršavanje gore navedenih radnji dok
pokazatelj svijetli može rezultirati
oštećenjem podataka/SD kartice ili uređaja.
●
●Priključci SD kartice ne smiju biti
izloženi vodi, prljavštini ili prašini.
●
●SD kartice nemojte ostavljati na
sljedećim mjestima:
-
- Izravno izložene sunčevom zračenju
-
- Na izrazito prašnjavim ili vlažnim
mjestima
-
- U blizini grijalice
-
- Mjestima izloženima značajnim
temperaturnim razlikama (može doći
do kondenzacije)
-
- Na mjestima gdje bi uređaj bio
izložen statičkom elektricitetu ili
elektromagnetskim valovima
●
●Da biste zaštitili SD kartice, vratite ih
u njihove zaštitne kutijice kada ih ne
koristite.
●
●Odlaganje ili predaja SD kartice. (→ 86)
13
(ENG) VQT4C37
Inserting/removing an SD card
Caution:
Check that the access lamp has gone off.
1 Open the LCD monitor.
2 Open the SD card cover and
insert (remove) the SD card
into (from) the card slot B.
≥ Face the label side C in the direction
shown in the illustration and press it
straight in as far as it will go.
≥ Press the centre of the SD card and then
pull it straight out.
3 Securely close the SD card
cover.
≥ Securely close it until it clicks.
≥ Do not touch the terminals on the back of
the SD card.
≥ Do not apply strong shocks, bend, or drop
the SD card.
≥ Electrical noise, static electricity or the
failure of this unit or the SD card may
damage or erase the data stored on the
SD card.
≥ When the card access lamp is lit, do not:
jRemove the SD card
jTurn the unit off
jInsert and remove the USB cable
jExpose the unit to vibrations or shock
Performing the above while the lamp is on
may result in damage to data/SD card or
this unit.
≥ Do not expose the terminals of the SD
card to water, dirt or dust.
≥ Do not place SD cards in the following areas:
jIn direct sunlight
jIn very dusty or humid areas
jNear a heater
jLocations susceptible to significant
difference in temperature (condensation
can occur.)
jWhere static electricity or
electromagnetic waves occur
≥ To protect SD cards, return them to their
cases when you are not using them.
≥ About disposing of or giving away the SD
card.
(Refer to the Operating Instructions (PDF
format))
When using an SD card not from Panasonic, or one previously used on other equipment,
for the first time on this unit, format the SD card. (l 21) When the SD card is formatted, all
of the recorded data is deleted. Once the data is deleted, it cannot be restored.



Access lamp [ACCESS] A
≥ When this unit is accessing the SD
card, the access lamp lights up.
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 13 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
13
(ENG) VQT4C37
Inserting/removing an SD card
Caution:
Check that the access lamp has gone off.
1 Open the LCD monitor.
2 Open the SD card cover and
insert (remove) the SD card
into (from) the card slot B.
≥ Face the label side C in the direction
shown in the illustration and press it
straight in as far as it will go.
≥ Press the centre of the SD card and then
pull it straight out.
3 Securely close the SD card
cover.
≥ Securely close it until it clicks.
≥ Do not touch the terminals on the back of
the SD card.
≥ Do not apply strong shocks, bend, or drop
the SD card.
≥ Electrical noise, static electricity or the
failure of this unit or the SD card may
damage or erase the data stored on the
SD card.
≥ When the card access lamp is lit, do not:
jRemove the SD card
jTurn the unit off
jInsert and remove the USB cable
jExpose the unit to vibrations or shock
Performing the above while the lamp is on
may result in damage to data/SD card or
this unit.
≥ Do not expose the terminals of the SD
card to water, dirt or dust.
≥ Do not place SD cards in the following areas:
jIn direct sunlight
jIn very dusty or humid areas
jNear a heater
jLocations susceptible to significant
difference in temperature (condensation
can occur.)
jWhere static electricity or
electromagnetic waves occur
≥ To protect SD cards, return them to their
cases when you are not using them.
≥ About disposing of or giving away the SD
card.
(Refer to the Operating Instructions (PDF
format))
When using an SD card not from Panasonic, or one previously used on other equipment,
for the first time on this unit, format the SD card. (l 21) When the SD card is formatted, all
of the recorded data is deleted. Once the data is deleted, it cannot be restored.



Access lamp [ACCESS] A
≥ When this unit is accessing the SD
card, the access lamp lights up.
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 13 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
13
(ENG) VQT4C37
Inserting/removing an SD card
Caution:
Check that the access lamp has gone off.
1 Open the LCD monitor.
2 Open the SD card cover and
insert (remove) the SD card
into (from) the card slot B.
≥ Face the label side C in the direction
shown in the illustration and press it
straight in as far as it will go.
≥ Press the centre of the SD card and then
pull it straight out.
3 Securely close the SD card
cover.
≥ Securely close it until it clicks.
≥ Do not touch the terminals on the back of
the SD card.
≥ Do not apply strong shocks, bend, or drop
the SD card.
≥ Electrical noise, static electricity or the
failure of this unit or the SD card may
damage or erase the data stored on the
SD card.
≥ When the card access lamp is lit, do not:
jRemove the SD card
jTurn the unit off
jInsert and remove the USB cable
jExpose the unit to vibrations or shock
Performing the above while the lamp is on
may result in damage to data/SD card or
this unit.
≥ Do not expose the terminals of the SD
card to water, dirt or dust.
≥ Do not place SD cards in the following areas:
jIn direct sunlight
jIn very dusty or humid areas
jNear a heater
jLocations susceptible to significant
difference in temperature (condensation
can occur.)
jWhere static electricity or
electromagnetic waves occur
≥ To protect SD cards, return them to their
cases when you are not using them.
≥ About disposing of or giving away the SD
card.
(Refer to the Operating Instructions (PDF
format))
When using an SD card not from Panasonic, or one previously used on other equipment,
for the first time on this unit, format the SD card. (l 21) When the SD card is formatted, all
of the recorded data is deleted. Once the data is deleted, it cannot be restored.



Access lamp [ACCESS] A
≥ When this unit is accessing the SD
card, the access lamp lights up.
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 13 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
Page: 14
14
VQT4C37 (ENG)
You can turn the unit on and off using the power button or by opening and closing the LCD
monitor.
Open the LCD monitor and press the power button to turn on the unit.
A The status indicator lights on.
The unit is turned on when the LCD monitor is opened, and unit is turned off when it is
closed.
Change the mode to recording or playback.
Operate the mode switch to change the mode to or .
Preparation
Turning the unit on/off
Turning the unit on and off with the power button
Preparation
Selecting a mode
Recording Mode (l 16, 17)
Playback Mode (l 18)
 To turn off the unit
Hold down the power button until the status
indicator goes off.
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 14 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
14
VQT4C37 (ENG)
You can turn the unit on and off using the power button or by opening and closing the LCD
monitor.
Open the LCD monitor and press the power button to turn on the unit.
A The status indicator lights on.
The unit is turned on when the LCD monitor is opened, and unit is turned off when it is
closed.
Change the mode to recording or playback.
Operate the mode switch to change the mode to or .
Preparation
Turning the unit on/off
Turning the unit on and off with the power button
Preparation
Selecting a mode
Recording Mode (l 16, 17)
Playback Mode (l 18)
 To turn off the unit
Hold down the power button until the status
indicator goes off.
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 14 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
You can turn the unit on and off using the power button or by opening and closing the LCD
monitor.
Open the LCD monitor and press the power button to turn on the unit.
A The status indicator lights on.
The unit is turned on when the LCD monitor is opened, and unit is turned off when it is
closed.
Change the mode to recording or playback.
Operate the mode switch to change the mode to or .
Preparation
Turning the unit on/off
Turning the unit on and off with the power button
Preparation
Selecting a mode
Recording Mode (l 16, 17)
 To turn off the unit
Hold down the power button until the status
indicator goes off.
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 14 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
- 15 -
You can turn the unit on and off using the power button or by opening and closing the LCD
monitor.
Open the LCD monitor and press the power button to turn on the unit.
A The status indicator lights on.
Unit is turned on when the LCD monitor is opened, and unit is turned off when it is closed.
During normal use, opening and closing of the LCD monitor can be conveniently used
to turn the unit on/off.
∫ To turn on the unit
A The status indicator lights on.
∫ To turn off the unit
B The status indicator goes off.
≥ The unit will not turn off while recording motion pictures even if the LCD monitor is closed.
≥ In the following cases, opening the LCD monitor does not turn on the unit. Press the power
button to turn on the unit.
jWhen the unit is originally purchased
jWhen you have turned off the unit using the power button
Preparation
Turning the unit on/off
Turning the unit on and off with the power button
Turning the unit on and off with the LCD monitor

To turn off the unit
Hold down the power button until the status
indicator goes off.
 
- 15 -
You can turn the unit on and off using the power button or by opening and closing the LCD
monitor.
Open the LCD monitor and press the power button to turn on the unit.
A The status indicator lights on.
Unit is turned on when the LCD monitor is opened, and unit is turned off when it is closed.
During normal use, opening and closing of the LCD monitor can be conveniently used
to turn the unit on/off.
∫ To turn on the unit
A The status indicator lights on.
∫ To turn off the unit
B The status indicator goes off.
≥ The unit will not turn off while recording motion pictures even if the LCD monitor is closed.
≥ In the following cases, opening the LCD monitor does not turn on the unit. Press the power
button to turn on the unit.
jWhen the unit is originally purchased
jWhen you have turned off the unit using the power button
Preparation
Turning the unit on/off
Turning the unit on and off with the power button
Turning the unit on and off with the LCD monitor

To turn off the unit
Hold down the power button until the status
indicator goes off.
 
- 15 -
You can turn the unit on and off using the power button or by opening and closing the LCD
monitor.
Open the LCD monitor and press the power button to turn on the unit.
A The status indicator lights on.
Unit is turned on when the LCD monitor is opened, and unit is turned off when it is closed.
During normal use, opening and closing of the LCD monitor can be conveniently used
to turn the unit on/off.
∫ To turn on the unit
A The status indicator lights on.
∫ To turn off the unit
B The status indicator goes off.
≥ The unit will not turn off while recording motion pictures even if the LCD monitor is closed.
≥ In the following cases, opening the LCD monitor does not turn on the unit. Press the power
button to turn on the unit.
jWhen the unit is originally purchased
jWhen you have turned off the unit using the power button
Preparation
Turning the unit on/off
Turning the unit on and off with the power button
Turning the unit on and off with the LCD monitor

To turn off the unit
Hold down the power button until the status
indicator goes off.
 
- 15 -
Uključivanje i isključivanje uređaja pomoću gumba za uključivanje/
isključivanje
Uključivanje i isključivanje uređaja pomoću LCD monitora
Isključivanje uređaja
Držite gumb za uključivanje/isključivanje sve
dok se pokazatelj statusa ne isključi.
Uređaj možete uključiti i isključiti pomoću gumba za uključivanje/isključivanje ili tako
da otvorite/zatvorite LCD monitor.
Pokazatelj statusa svijetli.
■
■ Uključivanje uređaja ■
■ Isključivanje uređaja
Pokazatelj statusa svijetli. Pokazatelj statusa svijetli.
Otvorite LCD monitor i pritisnite gumb za uključivanje/isključivanje uređaja.
Uređaj je uključen dok je LCD monitor otvoren, a isključen je kada je monitor zatvoren.
Otvaranje i zatvaranje LCD monitora tijekom standardne uporabe uređaja može
se prikladno koristiti za uključivanje/isključivanje uređaja.
●
●Uređaj se neće isključiti tijekom snimanja videozapisa čak i ako se LCD monitor zatvori.
●
●U sljedećim slučajevima otvaranje LCD monitora ne uključuje uređaj. Pritisnite gumb
za uključivanje/isključivanje kako biste uključili uređaj.
-
- Kod prve kupnje uređaja
-
- Kad ste isključili uređaj pomoću gumba za uključivanje/isključivanje
Priprema
Uključivanje/isključivanje uređaja
Page: 15
- 16 -
Change the mode to recording or playback.
Operate the mode switch to change the mode to or .
Preparation
Selecting a mode
Recording Mode (l 19, 21)
Playback Mode (l 24, 48)
- 16 -
14
VQT4C37 (ENG)
A The status indicator lights on.
The unit is turned on when the LCD monitor is opened, and unit is turned off when it is
closed.
Change the mode to recording or playback.
Operate the mode switch to change the mode to or .
Preparation
Selecting a mode
Recording Mode (l 16, 17)
Playback Mode (l 18)
power button to turn on the unit.
pened, and unit is turned off when it is
he mode to or .
power button
off the unit
the power button until the status
oes off.
ss the power button to turn on the unit.
nitor is opened, and unit is turned off when it is
ack.
ange the mode to or .
th the power button
e
l 16, 17)
18)
o turn off the unit
old down the power button until the status
dicator goes off.
Promijenite način rada na snimanje ili reprodukciju.
Pomoću prekidača za odabir načina rada promijenite način rada na
ili .
Snimanje (→ 19, 21)
Reprodukcija (→ 24, 48)
Priprema
Odabir načina rada
d, and unit is turned off when it is
mode to or .
14
VQT4C37 (ENG)
A The status indicator lights on.
The unit is turned on when the LCD monitor is opened, and unit is turned off when it is
closed.
Change the mode to recording or playback.
Operate the mode switch to change the mode to or .
Preparation
Selecting a mode
Recording Mode (l 16, 17)
Playback Mode (l 18)
Page: 16
- 17 -
When the unit is turned on for the first time, a message asking you to set the date and time
will appear.
Select [YES] and perform Steps 2 to 3 below to set the date and time.
¬ Change the mode to .
1 Select the menu. (l 27)
2 Select the date or time using 2/1 and set the desired value using
3/4.
A Displaying the World time setting
(l 28):
[HOME]/ [DESTINATION]
≥ The year can be set between 2000 and
2039.
≥ The 24-hour system is used to display the
time.
3 Press the ENTER button.
≥ A message prompting for World Time setting may be displayed. Perform the World Time
setting by pressing the ENTER button. (l 28)
≥ Press the MENU button to complete the setting.
≥ The date and time function is driven by a built-in lithium battery.
≥ If the time display becomes [- -], the built-in lithium battery needs to be charged. To
recharge the built-in lithium battery, connect the AC adaptor or attach the battery to this
unit. Leave the unit as it is for approx. 24 hours and the battery will maintain the date and
time for approx. 4 months. (The battery is still being recharged even if the unit is off.)
Preparation
Setting date and time
: [SETUP] # [CLOCK SET]
- 17 -
Priprema
Postavljanje datuma i vremena
15
(ENG) VQT4C37
When the unit is turned on for the first time, a message asking you to set the date and time
will appear.
Select [YES] and perform Steps 2 to 3 below to set the date and time.
¬ Change the mode to .
1 Select the menu. (l 20)
2 Select the date or time using 2/1 and set the desired value using
3/4.
A Displaying the World time setting:
[HOME]/ [DESTINATION]
≥ The year can be set between 2000 and
2039.
≥ The 24-hour system is used to display the
time.
3 Press the ENTER button.
≥ A message prompting for World Time setting may be displayed. Perform the World Time
setting by pressing the ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button to complete the setting.
≥ The date and time function is driven by a built-in lithium battery.
≥ If the time display becomes [- -], the built-in lithium battery needs to be charged. To
recharge the built-in lithium battery, connect the AC adaptor or attach the battery to this
unit. Leave the unit as it is for approx. 24 hours and the battery will maintain the date and
time for approx. 4 months. (The battery is still being recharged even if the unit is off.)
Preparation
Setting date and time
: [SETUP] # [CLOCK SET]
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 15 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
15
(ENG) VQT4C37
When the unit is turned on for the first time, a message asking you to set the date and time
will appear.
Select [YES] and perform Steps 2 to 3 below to set the date and time.
¬ Change the mode to .
1 Select the menu. (l 20)
2 Select the date or time using 2/1 and set the desired value using
3/4.
A Displaying the World time setting:
[HOME]/ [DESTINATION]
≥ The year can be set between 2000 and
2039.
≥ The 24-hour system is used to display the
time.
3 Press the ENTER button.
≥ A message prompting for World Time setting may be displayed. Perform the World Time
setting by pressing the ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button to complete the setting.
≥ The date and time function is driven by a built-in lithium battery.
≥ If the time display becomes [- -], the built-in lithium battery needs to be charged. To
recharge the built-in lithium battery, connect the AC adaptor or attach the battery to this
unit. Leave the unit as it is for approx. 24 hours and the battery will maintain the date and
time for approx. 4 months. (The battery is still being recharged even if the unit is off.)
Preparation
Setting date and time
: [SETUP] # [CLOCK SET]
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 15 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
15
(ENG) VQT4C37
When the unit is turned on for the first time, a message asking you to set the date and time
will appear.
Select [YES] and perform Steps 2 to 3 below to set the date and time.
¬ Change the mode to .
1 Select the menu. (l 20)
2 Select the date or time using 2/1 and set the desired value using
3/4.
A Displaying the World time setting:
[HOME]/ [DESTINATION]
≥ The year can be set between 2000 and
2039.
≥ The 24-hour system is used to display the
time.
3 Press the ENTER button.
≥ A message prompting for World Time setting may be displayed. Perform the World Time
setting by pressing the ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button to complete the setting.
≥ The date and time function is driven by a built-in lithium battery.
≥ If the time display becomes [- -], the built-in lithium battery needs to be charged. To
recharge the built-in lithium battery, connect the AC adaptor or attach the battery to this
unit. Leave the unit as it is for approx. 24 hours and the battery will maintain the date and
time for approx. 4 months. (The battery is still being recharged even if the unit is off.)
Preparation
Setting date and time
: [SETUP] # [CLOCK SET]
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 15 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
15
(ENG) VQT4C37
When the unit is turned on for the first time, a message asking you to set the date and time
will appear.
Select [YES] and perform Steps 2 to 3 below to set the date and time.
¬ Change the mode to .
1 Select the menu. (l 20)
2 Select the date or time using 2/1 and set the desired value using
3/4.
A Displaying the World time setting:
[HOME]/ [DESTINATION]
≥ The year can be set between 2000 and
2039.
≥ The 24-hour system is used to display the
time.
3 Press the ENTER button.
≥ A message prompting for World Time setting may be displayed. Perform the World Time
setting by pressing the ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button to complete the setting.
≥ The date and time function is driven by a built-in lithium battery.
≥ If the time display becomes [- -], the built-in lithium battery needs to be charged. To
recharge the built-in lithium battery, connect the AC adaptor or attach the battery to this
unit. Leave the unit as it is for approx. 24 hours and the battery will maintain the date and
time for approx. 4 months. (The battery is still being recharged even if the unit is off.)
Preparation
Setting date and time
: [SETUP] # [CLOCK SET]
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 15 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
Kada prvi put uključite uređaj, pojavljuje se poruka za podešavanje datuma i vremena.
Odaberite [YES] (Da) i izvedite niže opisane korake 2. i 3. da biste podesili datum i
vrijeme.
◊ Promijenite način rada na .
1 Odaberite izbornik. (→ 27)
2 Odaberite datum ili vrijeme pomoću ◄/► i potom postavite željene
vrijednosti pomoću ▲/▼.
Prikaz postavki za svjetsko vrijeme
(→ 28):
[HOME] (Dom) /
[DESTINATION] (Odredište)
●
●Godina se može podesiti između 2000.
i 2039.
●
●Za prikaz vremena koristi se 24-satni sustav.
3 Pritisnite gumb ENTER.
●
●Može se prikazati poruka kojom se traži postavljanje svjetskog vremena. Postavite
svjetsko vrijeme pritiskom na gumb ENTER. (→ 28)
●
●Pritisnite gumb MENU za dovršetak podešavanja.
●
●Funkcija prikaza datuma i vremena napaja se iz ugrađene litijske baterije.
●
●Ako prikaz vremena pokazuje [- -], potrebno je napuniti ugrađenu litijsku bateriju.
Za punjenje ugrađene litijske baterije priključite prilagodnik za izmjenični napon
ili spojite bateriju na ovaj uređaj. Ne koristite uređaj otprilike 24 sata, a baterija će
napajati datum i vrijeme približno 4 mjeseca (baterija se i dalje puni čak i kada je
uređaj isključen).
: [SETUP] (Postavljanje) → [CLOCK SET] (Postavke sata)
indicator lights on.
ned on when the LCD monitor is opened, and unit is turned off when it is
ode to recording or playback.
e mode switch to change the mode to or .
cting a mode
Recording Mode (l 16, 17)
Playback Mode (l 18)
15
(ENG) VQT4C37
When the unit is turned on for the first time, a message asking you to set the date and time
will appear.
Select [YES] and perform Steps 2 to 3 below to set the date and time.
¬ Change the mode to .
1 Select the menu. (l 20)
2 Select the date or time using 2/1 and set the desired value using
3/4.
A Displaying the World time setting:
[HOME]/ [DESTINATION]
≥ The year can be set between 2000 and
2039.
≥ The 24-hour system is used to display the
time.
3 Press the ENTER button.
≥ A message prompting for World Time setting may be displayed. Perform the World Time
setting by pressing the ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button to complete the setting.
≥ The date and time function is driven by a built-in lithium battery.
≥ If the time display becomes [- -], the built-in lithium battery needs to be charged. To
recharge the built-in lithium battery, connect the AC adaptor or attach the battery to this
unit. Leave the unit as it is for approx. 24 hours and the battery will maintain the date and
time for approx. 4 months. (The battery is still being recharged even if the unit is off.)
Preparation
Setting date and time
: [SETUP] # [CLOCK SET]
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 15 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
Page: 17
- 18 -
∫ Basic camera positioning
1 Hold the unit with both hands.
2 Put your hand through the grip belt.
≥ When recording, make sure your footing is stable and there is no danger of colliding with
another person or object.
≥ When you are outdoors, record pictures with the sunlight behind you. If the subject is
backlit, it will become dark in the recording.
≥ Keep your arms near your body and separate your legs for better balance.
≥ Do not cover the microphones with your hand etc.
∫ Basic motion picture recording
≥ The unit should normally be held steady when recording.
≥ If you move the unit when recording, do so slowly, maintaining a constant speed.
≥ The zoom operation is useful for recording subjects you cannot get close to, but overuse of
zoom in and zoom out can make the resulting motion picture less enjoyable to watch.
∫ Recording yourself
Rotate the LCD monitor towards the lens side.
≥ The image is horizontally flipped as if you see a mirror
image. (However the image recorded is the same as a
normal recording.)
≥ Only some indications will appear on the screen. When
appears, return the direction of the LCD monitor to
normal position and check the warning/alarm indication.
(l 78)
Basic
Before recording
- 18 -
∫ Basic camera positioning
1 Hold the unit with both hands.
2 Put your hand through the grip belt.
≥ When recording, make sure your footing is stable and there is no danger of colliding with
another person or object.
≥ When you are outdoors, record pictures with the sunlight behind you. If the subject is
backlit, it will become dark in the recording.
≥ Keep your arms near your body and separate your legs for better balance.
≥ Do not cover the microphones with your hand etc.
∫ Basic motion picture recording
≥ The unit should normally be held steady when recording.
≥ If you move the unit when recording, do so slowly, maintaining a constant speed.
≥ The zoom operation is useful for recording subjects you cannot get close to, but overuse of
zoom in and zoom out can make the resulting motion picture less enjoyable to watch.
∫ Recording yourself
Rotate the LCD monitor towards the lens side.
≥ The image is horizontally flipped as if you see a mirror
image. (However the image recorded is the same as a
normal recording.)
≥ Only some indications will appear on the screen. When
appears, return the direction of the LCD monitor to
normal position and check the warning/alarm indication.
(l 78)
Basic
Before recording
- 18 -
∫ Basic camera positioning
1 Hold the unit with both hands.
2 Put your hand through the grip belt.
≥ When recording, make sure your footing is stable and there is no danger of colliding with
another person or object.
≥ When you are outdoors, record pictures with the sunlight behind you. If the subject is
backlit, it will become dark in the recording.
≥ Keep your arms near your body and separate your legs for better balance.
≥ Do not cover the microphones with your hand etc.
∫ Basic motion picture recording
≥ The unit should normally be held steady when recording.
≥ If you move the unit when recording, do so slowly, maintaining a constant speed.
≥ The zoom operation is useful for recording subjects you cannot get close to, but overuse of
zoom in and zoom out can make the resulting motion picture less enjoyable to watch.
∫ Recording yourself
Rotate the LCD monitor towards the lens side.
≥ The image is horizontally flipped as if you see a mirror
image. (However the image recorded is the same as a
normal recording.)
≥ Only some indications will appear on the screen. When
appears, return the direction of the LCD monitor to
normal position and check the warning/alarm indication.
(l 78)
Basic
Before recording
- 18 -
∫ Basic camera positioning
1 Hold the unit with both hands.
2 Put your hand through the grip belt.
≥ When recording, make sure your footing is stable and there is no danger of colliding with
another person or object.
≥ When you are outdoors, record pictures with the sunlight behind you. If the subject is
backlit, it will become dark in the recording.
≥ Keep your arms near your body and separate your legs for better balance.
≥ Do not cover the microphones with your hand etc.
∫ Basic motion picture recording
≥ The unit should normally be held steady when recording.
≥ If you move the unit when recording, do so slowly, maintaining a constant speed.
≥ The zoom operation is useful for recording subjects you cannot get close to, but overuse of
zoom in and zoom out can make the resulting motion picture less enjoyable to watch.
∫ Recording yourself
Rotate the LCD monitor towards the lens side.
≥ The image is horizontally flipped as if you see a mirror
image. (However the image recorded is the same as a
normal recording.)
≥ Only some indications will appear on the screen. When
appears, return the direction of the LCD monitor to
normal position and check the warning/alarm indication.
(l 78)
Basic
Before recording
- 18 -
Uređaj držite objema rukama.
Ruku provucite kroz remen za držanje.
●
●Prilikom snimanja pazite da vaš položaj bude stabilan i da nema opasnosti od
sudara s drugom osobom ili predmetom.
●
●Kada ste na otvorenome, snimajte tako da se sunčeva svjetlost nalazi iza vas.
Ako dođe do pozadinskog osvjetljenja objekta snimanja, taj će objekt na snimci biti
zatamnjen.
●
●Držite ruke blizu tijela i raširite noge da biste uspostavili bolju ravnotežu.
●
●Ne prekrivajte mikrofone rukama i sl.
■
■ Osnovno snimanje videozapisa
●
●Držite uređaj stabilnim za vrijeme snimanja.
●
●Ako tijekom snimanja pomičete uređaj, činite to polagano i stalnom brzinom.
●
●Zumiranje može biti korisno za snimanje objekata kojima se ne možete približiti, no
pretjerano korištenje funkcija uvećanja/smanjenja zuma mogu utjecati na kvalitetu
videozapisa.
■
■ Snimanje samih sebe
Okrenite LCD monitor prema objektivu.
●
●Slika je vodoravno okrenuta, kao da gledate sliku u
ogledalu (međutim, snimljena slika ista je kao i kod
normalnog snimanja).
●
●Na zaslonu će se prikazati samo neki pokazatelji.
Kada se prikaže oznaka , vratite LCD monitor
u normalni položaj i provjerite pokazatelj upozorenja/
alarma. (→ 78)
Osnovne funkcije
Prije snimanja
■
■ Osnovno postavljanje kamere
- 18 -
∫ Basic camera positioning
1 Hold the unit with both hands.
2 Put your hand through the grip belt.
≥ When recording, make sure your footing is stable and there is no danger of collid
another person or object.
≥ When you are outdoors, record pictures with the sunlight behind you. If the subje
backlit, it will become dark in the recording.
≥ Keep your arms near your body and separate your legs for better balance.
≥ Do not cover the microphones with your hand etc.
∫ Basic motion picture recording
≥ The unit should normally be held steady when recording.
≥ If you move the unit when recording, do so slowly, maintaining a constant speed.
≥ The zoom operation is useful for recording subjects you cannot get close to, but o
zoom in and zoom out can make the resulting motion picture less enjoyable to wa
∫ Recording yourself
Rotate the LCD monitor towards the lens side.
≥ The image is horizontally flipped as if you see a mirror
image. (However the image recorded is the same as a
normal recording.)
≥ Only some indications will appear on the screen. When
appears, return the direction of the LCD monitor to
normal position and check the warning/alarm indication.
(l 78)
Basic
Before recording
Page: 18
- 19 -
≥ Open the lens cover before turning on the unit. (l 7)
1 Change the mode to and
open the LCD monitor.
2 Press the recording start/stop
button to start recording.
A When you begin recording, ; changes to ¥.
3 Press the recording start/stop button again to pause recording.
∫ About the screen indications in the motion picture recording
Basic
Recording motion pictures
Recording mode
R 1h20m
Approximate remaining recordable time
≥ When the remaining time is less than
1 minute, R 0h00m flashes red.
0h00m00s
Recording time elapsed
≥ “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for
minute and “s” for second.
≥ Each time the unit is put into recording
pause, the counter display will be reset
to 0h00m00s.

0h00m00s
0h00m00s
R 1h20m
R 1h20m
- 19 -
≥ Open the lens cover before turning on the unit. (l 7)
1 Change the mode to and
open the LCD monitor.
2 Press the recording start/stop
button to start recording.
A When you begin recording, ; changes to ¥.
3 Press the recording start/stop button again to pause recording.
∫ About the screen indications in the motion picture recording
Basic
Recording motion pictures
Recording mode
R 1h20m
Approximate remaining recordable time
≥ When the remaining time is less than
1 minute, R 0h00m flashes red.
0h00m00s
Recording time elapsed
≥ “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for
minute and “s” for second.
≥ Each time the unit is put into recording
pause, the counter display will be reset
to 0h00m00s.

0h00m00s
0h00m00s
R 1h20m
R 1h20m
- 19 -
≥ Open the lens cover before turning on the unit. (l 7)
1 Change the mode to and
open the LCD monitor.
2 Press the recording start/stop
button to start recording.
A When you begin recording, ; changes to ¥.
3 Press the recording start/stop button again to pause recording.
∫ About the screen indications in the motion picture recording
Basic
Recording motion pictures
Recording mode
R 1h20m
Approximate remaining recordable time
≥ When the remaining time is less than
1 minute, R 0h00m flashes red.
0h00m00s
Recording time elapsed
≥ “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for
minute and “s” for second.
≥ Each time the unit is put into recording
pause, the counter display will be reset
to 0h00m00s.

0h00m00s
0h00m00s
R 1h20m
R 1h20m
- 19 -
≥ Open the lens cover before turning on the unit. (l 7)
1 Change the mode to and
open the LCD monitor.
2 Press the recording start/stop
button to start recording.
A When you begin recording, ; changes to ¥.
3 Press the recording start/stop button again to pause recording.
∫ About the screen indications in the motion picture recording
Basic
Recording motion pictures
Recording mode
R 1h20m
Approximate remaining recordable time
≥ When the remaining time is less than
1 minute, R 0h00m flashes red.
0h00m00s
Recording time elapsed
≥ “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for
minute and “s” for second.
≥ Each time the unit is put into recording
pause, the counter display will be reset
to 0h00m00s.

0h00m00s
0h00m00s
R 1h20m
R 1h20m
- 19 -
≥ Open the lens cover before turning on the unit. (l 7)
1 Change the mode to and
open the LCD monitor.
2 Press the recording start/stop
button to start recording.
A When you begin recording, ; changes to ¥.
3 Press the recording start/stop button again to pause recording.
∫ About the screen indications in the motion picture recording
Basic
Recording motion pictures
Recording mode
R 1h20m
Approximate remaining recordable time
≥ When the remaining time is less than
1 minute, R 0h00m flashes red.
0h00m00s
Recording time elapsed
≥ “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for
minute and “s” for second.
≥ Each time the unit is put into recording
pause, the counter display will be reset
to 0h00m00s.

0h00m00s
0h00m00s
R 1h20m
R 1h20m
- 19 -
●
●Prije nego što uključite uređaj, otvorite poklopac objektiva. (→ 7)
1 Promijenite način rada u i
otvorite LCD monitor.
2 Pritisnite gumb za pokretanje/
zaustavljanje snimanja za početak
snimanja.
Kada započnete sa snimanjem, simbol mijenja se u ●.
3 Ponovo pritisnite gumb za pokretanje/zaustavljanje snimanja da
biste pauzirali snimanje.
■
■ Pokazatelji na zaslonu prilikom snimanja fotografija
Način snimanja
R 1h20m Približno preostalo vrijeme snimanja
●
● Kada preostalo vrijeme iznosi
manje od 1 minute, R 0h00m treperi
crveno.
0h00m00s Proteklo vrijeme snimanja
●
● "h" je kratica za sat, "m" za minutu,
a "s" za sekundu.
●
● Svaki puta kada se snimanje
pauzira, brojač će se resetirati na
„0h00m00s”.
Osnovne funkcije
Snimanje videozapisa
- 19 -
≥ Open the lens cover before turning on the unit. (l 7)
1 Change the mode to and
open the LCD monitor.
2 Press the recording start/stop
button to start recording.
A When you begin recording, ; changes to ¥.
3 Press the recording start/stop button again to pause recording.
∫ About the screen indications in the motion picture recording
Basic
Recording motion pictures
Recording mode
R 1h20m
Approximate remaining recordable time
≥ When the remaining time is less than
1 minute, R 0h00m flashes red.
0h00m00s
Recording time elapsed
≥ “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for
minute and “s” for second.
≥ Each time the unit is put into recording
pause, the counter display will be reset
to 0h00m00s.

0h00m00s
0h00m00s
R 1h20m
R 1h20m
- 19 -
≥ Open the lens cover before turning on the unit. (l 7)
1 Change the mode to and
open the LCD monitor.
2 Press the recording start/stop
button to start recording.
A When you begin recording, ; changes to ¥.
3 Press the recording start/stop button again to pause recording.
∫ About the screen indications in the motion picture recording
Basic
Recording motion pictures
Recording mode
R 1h20m
Approximate remaining recordable time
≥ When the remaining time is less than
1 minute, R 0h00m flashes red.
0h00m00s
Recording time elapsed
≥ “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for
minute and “s” for second.
≥ Each time the unit is put into recording
pause, the counter display will be reset
to 0h00m00s.

0h00m00s
0h00m00s
R 1h20m
R 1h20m
- 19 -
≥ Open the lens cover before turning on the unit. (l 7)
1 Change the mode to and
open the LCD monitor.
2 Press the recording start/stop
button to start recording.
A When you begin recording, ; changes to ¥.
3 Press the recording start/stop button again to pause recording.
∫ About the screen indications in the motion picture recording
Basic
Recording motion pictures
Recording mode
R 1h20m
Approximate remaining recordable time
≥ When the remaining time is less than
1 minute, R 0h00m flashes red.
0h00m00s
Recording time elapsed
≥ “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for
minute and “s” for second.
≥ Each time the unit is put into recording
pause, the counter display will be reset
to 0h00m00s.

0h00m00s
0h00m00s
R 1h20m
R 1h20m
Page: 20
- 21 -
≥ Open the lens cover before turning on the unit. (l 7)
1 Change the mode to and
open the LCD monitor.
2 Press the button.
∫ About the screen indications in Still Picture Recording
≥ During motion picture recording or when set to PRE-REC, you cannot record still pictures.
≥ Using a tripod is recommended when recording still pictures in dark places because the
shutter speed becomes slow.
≥ To print a picture, print using a PC or a printer.
≥ The edges of still pictures recorded on this unit with a 16:9 aspect ratio may be cut at
printing. Check the printer or photo studio before printing.
≥ Please refer to page 89 for details about the number of recordable pictures.
Basic
Recording still pictures
Quality of still pictures (l 43)
Size of still pictures (l 40)
R3000
Remaining number of still pictures
≥ Flashes in red when [0] appears.
Still picture operation indicator (l 77)
0.9M
R3000
R3000
0.9M
- 21 -
≥ Open the lens cover before turning on the unit. (l 7)
1 Change the mode to and
open the LCD monitor.
2 Press the button.
∫ About the screen indications in Still Picture Recording
≥ During motion picture recording or when set to PRE-REC, you cannot record still pictures.
≥ Using a tripod is recommended when recording still pictures in dark places because the
shutter speed becomes slow.
≥ To print a picture, print using a PC or a printer.
≥ The edges of still pictures recorded on this unit with a 16:9 aspect ratio may be cut at
printing. Check the printer or photo studio before printing.
≥ Please refer to page 89 for details about the number of recordable pictures.
Basic
Recording still pictures
Quality of still pictures (l 43)
Size of still pictures (l 40)
R3000
Remaining number of still pictures
≥ Flashes in red when [0] appears.
Still picture operation indicator (l 77)
0.9M
R3000
R3000
0.9M
- 21 -
≥ Open the lens cover before turning on the unit. (l 7)
1 Change the mode to and
open the LCD monitor.
2 Press the button.
∫ About the screen indications in Still Picture Recording
≥ During motion picture recording or when set to PRE-REC, you cannot record still pictures.
≥ Using a tripod is recommended when recording still pictures in dark places because the
shutter speed becomes slow.
≥ To print a picture, print using a PC or a printer.
≥ The edges of still pictures recorded on this unit with a 16:9 aspect ratio may be cut at
printing. Check the printer or photo studio before printing.
≥ Please refer to page 89 for details about the number of recordable pictures.
Basic
Recording still pictures
Quality of still pictures (l 43)
Size of still pictures (l 40)
R3000
Remaining number of still pictures
≥ Flashes in red when [0] appears.
Still picture operation indicator (l 77)
0.9M
R3000
R3000
0.9M
- 21 -
≥ Open the lens cover before turning on the unit. (l 7)
1 Change the mode to and
open the LCD monitor.
2 Press the button.
∫ About the screen indications in Still Picture Recording
≥ During motion picture recording or when set to PRE-REC, you cannot record still pictures.
≥ Using a tripod is recommended when recording still pictures in dark places because the
shutter speed becomes slow.
≥ To print a picture, print using a PC or a printer.
≥ The edges of still pictures recorded on this unit with a 16:9 aspect ratio may be cut at
printing. Check the printer or photo studio before printing.
≥ Please refer to page 89 for details about the number of recordable pictures.
Basic
Recording still pictures
Quality of still pictures (l 43)
Size of still pictures (l 40)
R3000
Remaining number of still pictures
≥ Flashes in red when [0] appears.
Still picture operation indicator (l 77)
0.9M
R3000
R3000
0.9M
- 21 -
• Prije nego što uključite uređaj, otvorite poklopac objektiva. (→ 7)
1 Promijenite način rada u i
otvorite LCD monitor.
2 Pritisnite gumb .
■
■ Pokazatelji na zaslonu prilikom snimanja fotografija
Kvaliteta fotografija (→ 43)
Veličina fotografija (→ 40)
R3000
Preostali broj fotografija
• Svijetli crveno kada se pojavi [0].
Pokazatelji funkcija snimanja (→ 77)
●
●Tijekom snimanja videozapisa ili ako je postavljeno na PRE-REC opciju, snimanje
fotografija nije moguće.
●
●Preporučuje se uporaba tronošca za snimanje fotografija na mračnim mjestima jer
brzina zatvarača postaje manja.
●
●Za ispis fotografije koristite računalo ili pisač.
●
●Kod ispisa može doći do izrezivanja rubova fotografija ako su snimljene ovim
uređajem u omjeru 16:9. Prije izrade ispisa provjerite na pisaču ili u fotostudiju.
●
●Pogledajte 89. stranicu za informacije o broju raspoloživih slika za snimanje.
- 21 -
≥ Open the lens cover before turning on the unit. (l 7)
1 Change the mode to and
open the LCD monitor.
2 Press the button.
∫ About the screen indications in Still Picture Recording
≥ During motion picture recording or when set to PRE-REC, you cannot record still pictures.
≥ Using a tripod is recommended when recording still pictures in dark places because the
shutter speed becomes slow.
≥ To print a picture, print using a PC or a printer.
≥ The edges of still pictures recorded on this unit with a 16:9 aspect ratio may be cut at
printing. Check the printer or photo studio before printing.
≥ Please refer to page 89 for details about the number of recordable pictures.
Basic
Recording still pictures
Quality of still pictures (l 43)
Size of still pictures (l 40)
R3000
Remaining number of still pictures
≥ Flashes in red when [0] appears.
Still picture operation indicator (l 77)
0.9M
R3000
R3000
0.9M
- 21 -
≥ Open the lens cover before turning on the unit. (l 7)
1 Change the mode to and
open the LCD monitor.
2 Press the button.
∫ About the screen indications in Still Picture Recording
≥ During motion picture recording or when set to PRE-REC, you cannot record still pictures.
≥ Using a tripod is recommended when recording still pictures in dark places because the
shutter speed becomes slow.
≥ To print a picture, print using a PC or a printer.
≥ The edges of still pictures recorded on this unit with a 16:9 aspect ratio may be cut at
printing. Check the printer or photo studio before printing.
≥ Please refer to page 89 for details about the number of recordable pictures.
Basic
Recording still pictures
Quality of still pictures (l 43)
Size of still pictures (l 40)
R3000
Remaining number of still pictures
≥ Flashes in red when [0] appears.
Still picture operation indicator (l 77)
0.9M
R3000
R3000
0.9M
- 21 -
≥ Open the lens cover before turning on the unit. (l 7)
1 Change the mode to and
open the LCD monitor.
2 Press the button.
∫ About the screen indications in Still Picture Recording
≥ During motion picture recording or when set to PRE-REC, you cannot record still pictures.
≥ Using a tripod is recommended when recording still pictures in dark places because the
shutter speed becomes slow.
≥ To print a picture, print using a PC or a printer.
≥ The edges of still pictures recorded on this unit with a 16:9 aspect ratio may be cut at
printing. Check the printer or photo studio before printing.
≥ Please refer to page 89 for details about the number of recordable pictures.
Basic
Recording still pictures
Quality of still pictures (l 43)
Size of still pictures (l 40)
R3000
Remaining number of still pictures
≥ Flashes in red when [0] appears.
Still picture operation indicator (l 77)
0.9M
R3000
R3000
0.9M
- 21 -
≥ Open the lens cover before turning on the unit. (l 7)
1 Change the mode to and
open the LCD monitor.
2 Press the button.
∫ About the screen indications in Still Picture Recording
≥ During motion picture recording or when set to PRE-REC, you cannot record still pictures.
≥ Using a tripod is recommended when recording still pictures in dark places because the
shutter speed becomes slow.
≥ To print a picture, print using a PC or a printer.
≥ The edges of still pictures recorded on this unit with a 16:9 aspect ratio may be cut at
printing. Check the printer or photo studio before printing.
≥ Please refer to page 89 for details about the number of recordable pictures.
Basic
Recording still pictures
Quality of still pictures (l 43)
Size of still pictures (l 40)
R3000
Remaining number of still pictures
≥ Flashes in red when [0] appears.
Still picture operation indicator (l 77)
0.9M
R3000
R3000
0.9M
- 21 -
≥ Open the lens cover before turning on the unit. (l 7)
1 Change the mode to and
open the LCD monitor.
2 Press the button.
∫ About the screen indications in Still Picture Recording
≥ During motion picture recording or when set to PRE-REC, you cannot record still pictures.
≥ Using a tripod is recommended when recording still pictures in dark places because the
shutter speed becomes slow.
≥ To print a picture, print using a PC or a printer.
≥ The edges of still pictures recorded on this unit with a 16:9 aspect ratio may be cut at
printing. Check the printer or photo studio before printing.
≥ Please refer to page 89 for details about the number of recordable pictures.
Basic
Recording still pictures
Quality of still pictures (l 43)
Size of still pictures (l 40)
R3000
Remaining number of still pictures
≥ Flashes in red when [0] appears.
Still picture operation indicator (l 77)
0.9M
R3000
R3000
0.9M
Osnovne funkcije
Snimanje fotografija
Page: 21
- 22 -
The following modes (appropriate for the condition) are set just by pointing the unit to what
you want to record.
≥ Depending on the recording conditions, the unit may not enter the desired mode.
≥ In the Portrait, Spotlight and Low light mode, the face will be surrounded by white frame
when detected. In the Portrait mode, a subject that is bigger and close to centre of the
screen will be surrounded by an orange frame. (l 41)
≥ Faces cannot be detected depending on the recording conditions, such as when faces are
of certain sizes or at certain tilts or when digital zoom is used.
Basic
Intelligent Auto Mode
Mode Effect
Portrait Faces are detected and focused automatically, and the
brightness is adjusted so it is recorded clearly.
Scenery The whole landscape will be recorded vividly without whiting
out the background sky, which may be very bright.
Spotlight Very bright object is recorded clearly.
Low light It can record very clearly even in a dark room or twilight.
Normal In modes other than those described above, the contrast is
adjusted to give a clear picture.
Intelligent auto/Manual button
Press this button to switch Intelligent Auto
Mode/Manual Mode.
≥ Please refer to page 44 for details about Manual
Mode.
/MANUAL
- 22 -
The following modes (appropriate for the condition) are set just by pointing the unit to what
you want to record.
≥ Depending on the recording conditions, the unit may not enter the desired mode.
≥ In the Portrait, Spotlight and Low light mode, the face will be surrounded by white frame
when detected. In the Portrait mode, a subject that is bigger and close to centre of the
screen will be surrounded by an orange frame. (l 41)
≥ Faces cannot be detected depending on the recording conditions, such as when faces are
of certain sizes or at certain tilts or when digital zoom is used.
Basic
Intelligent Auto Mode
Mode Effect
Portrait Faces are detected and focused automatically, and the
brightness is adjusted so it is recorded clearly.
Scenery The whole landscape will be recorded vividly without whiting
out the background sky, which may be very bright.
Spotlight Very bright object is recorded clearly.
Low light It can record very clearly even in a dark room or twilight.
Normal In modes other than those described above, the contrast is
adjusted to give a clear picture.
Intelligent auto/Manual button
Press this button to switch Intelligent Auto
Mode/Manual Mode.
≥ Please refer to page 44 for details about Manual
Mode.
/MANUAL
- 22 -
Sljedeći načini rada (koji odgovaraju uvjetima) postavljaju se usmjeravanjem uređaja
prema onome što želite snimati.
●
●Ovisno o uvjetima snimanja, uređaj se možda neće prebaciti na željeni način rada.
●
●Kod snimanja portreta, pod reflektorima ili pod slabim osvjetljenjem, lice će biti
okruženo bijelim okvirom kada ga uređaj prepozna. U načinu snimanja portreta
objekt koji je veći i bliži središtu zaslona bit će okružen narančastim okvirom. (→ 41)
●
●Lica ne mogu biti prepoznata ovisno o uvjetima snimanja, poput onih kada su lica
određene veličine ili pod određenim kutom ili se koristi digitalni zum.
Način rada Efekt
Portret Uređaj prepoznaje lica te ih automatski izoštrava, dok se
svjetlina podešava tako da ona budu jasno snimljena.
Krajolik Krajolik će se snimiti u živim bojama, bez izbjeljivanja
neba u pozadini, koje može biti vrlo svijetlo.
Reflektor Vrlo svijetli objekt jasno će se snimiti.
Nedovoljno
svjetla
Uređaj može snimati vrlo jasne snimke, čak i u tamnoj
prostoriji ili u sumrak.
Normalno U načinima osim onih prethodno opisanih kontrast se
prilagođava kako bi se postigla jasna slika.
Gumb inteligentnog automatskog načina
rada/ručnog podešavanja
Pritisnite ovaj gumb da biste prelazili iz
inteligentnog automatskog načina u ručni
način i obratno.
●
●Detalje o ručnom načinu rada potražite na 44.
stranici.
Osnovne funkcije
Inteligentni automatski način rada
- 22 -
The following modes (appropriate for the condition) are set just by pointing the unit to what
you want to record.
≥ Depending on the recording conditions, the unit may not enter the desired mode.
≥ In the Portrait, Spotlight and Low light mode, the face will be surrounded by white frame
when detected. In the Portrait mode, a subject that is bigger and close to centre of the
screen will be surrounded by an orange frame. (l 41)
≥ Faces cannot be detected depending on the recording conditions, such as when faces are
of certain sizes or at certain tilts or when digital zoom is used.
Basic
Intelligent Auto Mode
Mode Effect
Portrait Faces are detected and focused automatically, and the
brightness is adjusted so it is recorded clearly.
Scenery The whole landscape will be recorded vividly without whiting
out the background sky, which may be very bright.
Spotlight Very bright object is recorded clearly.
Low light It can record very clearly even in a dark room or twilight.
Normal In modes other than those described above, the contrast is
adjusted to give a clear picture.
Intelligent auto/Manual button
Press this button to switch Intelligent Auto
Mode/Manual Mode.
≥ Please refer to page 44 for details about Manual
Mode.
/MANUAL
- 22 -
The following modes (appropriate for the condition) are set just by pointing the unit to what
you want to record.
≥ Depending on the recording conditions, the unit may not enter the desired mode.
≥ In the Portrait, Spotlight and Low light mode, the face will be surrounded by white frame
when detected. In the Portrait mode, a subject that is bigger and close to centre of the
screen will be surrounded by an orange frame. (l 41)
≥ Faces cannot be detected depending on the recording conditions, such as when faces are
of certain sizes or at certain tilts or when digital zoom is used.
Basic
Intelligent Auto Mode
Mode Effect
Portrait Faces are detected and focused automatically, and the
brightness is adjusted so it is recorded clearly.
Scenery The whole landscape will be recorded vividly without whiting
out the background sky, which may be very bright.
Spotlight Very bright object is recorded clearly.
Low light It can record very clearly even in a dark room or twilight.
Normal In modes other than those described above, the contrast is
adjusted to give a clear picture.
Intelligent auto/Manual button
Press this button to switch Intelligent Auto
Mode/Manual Mode.
≥ Please refer to page 44 for details about Manual
Mode.
/MANUAL
- 22 -
The following modes (appropriate for the condition) are set just by pointing the unit to what
you want to record.
≥ Depending on the recording conditions, the unit may not enter the desired mode.
≥ In the Portrait, Spotlight and Low light mode, the face will be surrounded by white frame
when detected. In the Portrait mode, a subject that is bigger and close to centre of the
screen will be surrounded by an orange frame. (l 41)
≥ Faces cannot be detected depending on the recording conditions, such as when faces are
of certain sizes or at certain tilts or when digital zoom is used.
Basic
Intelligent Auto Mode
Mode Effect
Portrait Faces are detected and focused automatically, and the
brightness is adjusted so it is recorded clearly.
Scenery The whole landscape will be recorded vividly without whiting
out the background sky, which may be very bright.
Spotlight Very bright object is recorded clearly.
Low light It can record very clearly even in a dark room or twilight.
Normal In modes other than those described above, the contrast is
adjusted to give a clear picture.
Intelligent auto/Manual button
Press this button to switch Intelligent Auto
Mode/Manual Mode.
≥ Please refer to page 44 for details about Manual
Mode.
/MANUAL
- 22 -
The following modes (appropriate for the condition) are set just by pointing the unit to what
you want to record.
≥ Depending on the recording conditions, the unit may not enter the desired mode.
≥ In the Portrait, Spotlight and Low light mode, the face will be surrounded by white frame
when detected. In the Portrait mode, a subject that is bigger and close to centre of the
screen will be surrounded by an orange frame. (l 41)
≥ Faces cannot be detected depending on the recording conditions, such as when faces are
of certain sizes or at certain tilts or when digital zoom is used.
Basic
Intelligent Auto Mode
Mode Effect
Portrait Faces are detected and focused automatically, and the
brightness is adjusted so it is recorded clearly.
Scenery The whole landscape will be recorded vividly without whiting
out the background sky, which may be very bright.
Spotlight Very bright object is recorded clearly.
Low light It can record very clearly even in a dark room or twilight.
Normal In modes other than those described above, the contrast is
adjusted to give a clear picture.
Intelligent auto/Manual button
Press this button to switch Intelligent Auto
Mode/Manual Mode.
≥ Please refer to page 44 for details about Manual
Mode.
/MANUAL
- 22 -
The following modes (appropriate for the condition) are set just by pointing the unit to what
you want to record.
≥ Depending on the recording conditions, the unit may not enter the desired mode.
≥ In the Portrait, Spotlight and Low light mode, the face will be surrounded by white frame
when detected. In the Portrait mode, a subject that is bigger and close to centre of the
screen will be surrounded by an orange frame. (l 41)
≥ Faces cannot be detected depending on the recording conditions, such as when faces are
of certain sizes or at certain tilts or when digital zoom is used.
Basic
Intelligent Auto Mode
Mode Effect
Portrait Faces are detected and focused automatically, and the
brightness is adjusted so it is recorded clearly.
Scenery The whole landscape will be recorded vividly without whiting
out the background sky, which may be very bright.
Spotlight Very bright object is recorded clearly.
Low light It can record very clearly even in a dark room or twilight.
Normal In modes other than those described above, the contrast is
adjusted to give a clear picture.
Intelligent auto/Manual button
Press this button to switch Intelligent Auto
Mode/Manual Mode.
≥ Please refer to page 44 for details about Manual
Mode.
/MANUAL
Page: 23
- 24 -
1 Change the mode to .
2 Select the play mode select
icon A using 3/4/2 and
press the ENTER button.
3 Select the [VIDEO/PICTURE] you wish to play back, then press the
ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button.
≥ When a video item is selected, an icon will appear on the thumbnail display. ( ,
, )
4 Select the scene or the still
picture to be played back using
3/4/2/1, then press the
ENTER button.
≥ When you select / and press the
ENTER button, the next (previous) page is
displayed.
Basic
Motion picture/Still picture playback

15.11.2012
0h00m15s
- 24 -
18
VQT4C37 (ENG)
1 Change the mode to .
2 Select the play mode select
icon A using 3/4/2 and
press the ENTER button.
3 Select the [VIDEO/PICTURE] you wish to play back, then press the
ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button.
≥ When a video item is selected, an icon will appear on the thumbnail display. ( ,
, )
4 Select the scene or the still
picture to be played back using
3/4/2/1, then press the
ENTER button.
≥ When you select / and press the
ENTER button, the next (previous) page is displayed.
Basic
Motion picture/Still picture playback

15.11.2012
0h00m15s
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 18 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
18
VQT4C37 (ENG)
1 Change the mode to .
2 Select the play mode select
icon A using 3/4/2 and
press the ENTER button.
3 Select the [VIDEO/PICTURE] you wish to play back, then press the
ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button.
≥ When a video item is selected, an icon will appear on the thumbnail display. ( ,
, )
4 Select the scene or the still
picture to be played back using
3/4/2/1, then press the
ENTER button.
≥ When you select / and press the
ENTER button, the next (previous) page is displayed.
Basic
Motion picture/Still picture playback

15.11.2012
0h00m15s
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 18 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
18
VQT4C37 (ENG)
1 Change the mode to .
2 Select the play mode select
icon A using 3/4/2 and
press the ENTER button.
3 Select the [VIDEO/PICTURE] you wish to play back, then press the
ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button.
≥ When a video item is selected, an icon will appear on the thumbnail display. ( ,
, )
4 Select the scene or the still
picture to be played back using
3/4/2/1, then press the
ENTER button.
≥ When you select / and press the
ENTER button, the next (previous) page is displayed.
Basic
Motion picture/Still picture playback

15.11.2012
0h00m15s
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 18 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
1 Promijenite način rada na .
2 Gumbima ▲/▼/◄ odaberite
ikonu za odabir načina
reprodukcije i pritisnite
gumb ENTER.
3 Odaberite [VIDEO/PICTURE] (videozapis/fotografija) koju želite
reproducirati i pritisnite gumb
ENTER.
●
●Pritisnite gumb MENU.
●
●Kada odaberete videozapis, u prikazu minijatura pojavit će se ikona. (
)
4 Gumbima ▲/▼/◄/►
odaberite scenu ili fotografiju
koju želite reproducirati i
pritisnite gumb ENTER.
●
●Kada odaberete i pritisnete
gumb ENTER, prikazuje se sljedeća (prethodna) stranica.
Osnovne funkcije
Reprodukcija videozapisa/fotografija
icator lights on.
on when the LCD monitor is opened, and unit is turned off when it is
to recording or playback.
ode switch to change the mode to or .
ng a mode
Recording Mode (l 16, 17)
Playback Mode (l 18)
 To turn off the unit
Hold down the power button until the status
indicator goes off.
18
VQT4C37 (ENG)
1 Change the mode to .
2 Select the play mode select
icon A using 3/4/2 and
press the ENTER button.
3 Select the [VIDEO/PICTURE] you wish to play back, then press the
ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button.
≥ When a video item is selected, an icon will appear on the thumbnail display. ( ,
, )
4 Select the scene or the still
picture to be played back using
3/4/2/1, then press the
ENTER button.
≥ When you select / and press the
ENTER button, the next (previous) page is displayed.
Basic
Motion picture/Still picture playback

15.11.2012
0h00m15s
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 18 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
18
VQT4C37 (ENG)
1 Change the mode to .
2 Select the play mode select
icon A using 3/4/2 and
press the ENTER button.
3 Select the [VIDEO/PICTURE] you wish to play back, then press the
ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button.
≥ When a video item is selected, an icon will appear on the thumbnail display. ( ,
, )
4 Select the scene or the still
picture to be played back using
3/4/2/1, then press the
ENTER button.
≥ When you select / and press the
ENTER button, the next (previous) page is displayed.
Basic
Motion picture/Still picture playback

15.11.2012
0h00m15s
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 18 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
18
VQT4C37 (ENG)
1 Change the mode to .
2 Select the play mode select
icon A using 3/4/2 and
press the ENTER button.
3 Select the [VIDEO/PICTURE] you wish to play back, then press the
ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button.
≥ When a video item is selected, an icon will appear on the thumbnail display. ( ,
, )
4 Select the scene or the still
picture to be played back using
3/4/2/1, then press the
ENTER button.
≥ When you select / and press the
ENTER button, the next (previous) page is displayed.
Basic
Motion picture/Still picture playback

15.11.2012
0h00m15s
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 18 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
18
VQT4C37 (ENG)
1 Change the mode
2 Select the play mo
icon A using 3/4
press the ENTER
3 Select the [VIDEO
ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button.
≥ When a video item is sele
, )
4 Select the scene o
picture to be playe
3/4/2/1, then p
ENTER button.
≥ When you select /
ENTER button, the next (
Basic
Motion pict
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book
18
VQT4C37 (ENG)
1 Change the mode to .
2 Select the play mode select
icon A using 3/4/2 and
press the ENTER button.
3 Select the [VIDEO/PICTURE] you wish to play back, then press the
ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button.
≥ When a video item is selected, an icon will appear on the thumbnail display. ( ,
, )
4 Select the scene or the still
picture to be played back using
3/4/2/1, then press the
ENTER button.
≥ When you select / and press the
ENTER button, the next (previous) page is displayed.
Basic
Motion picture/Still picture playback

15.11.2012
0h00m15s
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 18 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
Page: 24
- 25 -
5 Select the operation icon using
3/4/2/1.
B Operation icon
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-display
the operation icon.
∫ Change the thumbnail display
While the thumbnail is displayed, the thumbnail display changes in the following order if the
zoom lever is operated to side or side.
20 scenes () 9 scenes () 1 scene
≥ 9 scenes display returns if the unit is turned off or the mode is
changed.
∫ Speaker volume adjustment
Operate the volume lever to adjust the
speaker volume during motion picture
playback.
≥ Sound will be heard only during normal playback.
≥ If pause play is continued for 5 minutes, the screen returns to the thumbnails.
≥ The elapsed time for playback indication will be reset to 0h00m00s for each scene.
≥ The image will pause momentarily and the screen may turn black when the scenes are
switching.
Motion picture playback Still picture playback
1/;: Playback/Pause
6: Rewind playback
5: Fast forward playback
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
1/;: Slide show (playback of the still
pictures in numerical order)
start/pause.
2;: Plays back the previous picture.
;1: Plays back the next picture.
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
Towards “r”: Increases the volume
Towards “s”: Decreases the volume
0h00m00s
0h00m00s

- 25 -
5 Select the operation icon using
3/4/2/1.
B Operation icon
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-display
the operation icon.
∫ Change the thumbnail display
While the thumbnail is displayed, the thumbnail display changes in the following order if the
zoom lever is operated to side or side.
20 scenes () 9 scenes () 1 scene
≥ 9 scenes display returns if the unit is turned off or the mode is
changed.
∫ Speaker volume adjustment
Operate the volume lever to adjust the
speaker volume during motion picture
playback.
≥ Sound will be heard only during normal playback.
≥ If pause play is continued for 5 minutes, the screen returns to the thumbnails.
≥ The elapsed time for playback indication will be reset to 0h00m00s for each scene.
≥ The image will pause momentarily and the screen may turn black when the scenes are
switching.
Motion picture playback Still picture playback
1/;: Playback/Pause
6: Rewind playback
5: Fast forward playback
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
1/;: Slide show (playback of the still
pictures in numerical order)
start/pause.
2;: Plays back the previous picture.
;1: Plays back the next picture.
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
Towards “r”: Increases the volume
Towards “s”: Decreases the volume
0h00m00s
0h00m00s

- 25 -
5 Select the operation icon using
3/4/2/1.
B Operation icon
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-display
the operation icon.
∫ Change the thumbnail display
While the thumbnail is displayed, the thumbnail display changes in the following order if the
zoom lever is operated to side or side.
20 scenes () 9 scenes () 1 scene
≥ 9 scenes display returns if the unit is turned off or the mode is
changed.
∫ Speaker volume adjustment
Operate the volume lever to adjust the
speaker volume during motion picture
playback.
≥ Sound will be heard only during normal playback.
≥ If pause play is continued for 5 minutes, the screen returns to the thumbnails.
≥ The elapsed time for playback indication will be reset to 0h00m00s for each scene.
≥ The image will pause momentarily and the screen may turn black when the scenes are
switching.
Motion picture playback Still picture playback
1/;: Playback/Pause
6: Rewind playback
5: Fast forward playback
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
1/;: Slide show (playback of the still
pictures in numerical order)
start/pause.
2;: Plays back the previous picture.
;1: Plays back the next picture.
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
Towards “r”: Increases the volume
Towards “s”: Decreases the volume
0h00m00s
0h00m00s

- 25 -
■
■ Promjena prikaza minijatura
Dok su minijature prikazane, njihov prikaz se mijenja prema sljedećem redoslijedu
pomicanjem ručice zuma prema ili .
20 scena 9 scena 1 scena
●
●Ako se uređaj isključi ili se promijeni način rada, vraća se prikaz
sa 9 kadrova.
■
■ Podešavanje glasnoće zvučnika
Pomičite ručicu za podešavanje glasnoće da
biste prilagodili glasnoću zvučnika tijekom
reprodukcije videozapisa.
Prema „+": Pojačavanje glasnoće
Prema „—": Smanjivanje glasnoće
●
●Zvuk će se čuti samo tijekom uobičajene reprodukcije.
●
●Ako pauza traje 5 minuta, zaslon se vraća na prikaz minijatura.
●
●Proteklo vrijeme reprodukcije vratit će se na „0h00m00s" za svaku scenu.
●
●Fotografije će se na trenutak zaustaviti i može se dogoditi da se zaslon zacrni
tijekom izmjene scena.
19
(ENG) VQT4C37
5 Select the operation icon using
3/4/2/1.
B Operation icon
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-display
the operation icon.
Watching Video/Pictures on your TV
1 Connect this unit to a TV.
A AV cable (supplied)
≥ Check that the plugs are inserted as far as they go.
≥ Do not use any other AV cables except the supplied one.
2 Select the video input on the TV.
3 Change the mode to to play back.
Motion picture playback Still picture playback
1/;: Playback/Pause
6: Rewind playback
5: Fast forward playback
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
1/;: Slide show (playback of the still
pictures in numerical order)
start/pause.
2;: Plays back the previous picture.
;1: Plays back the next picture.
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
0h00m00s
0h00m00s


HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 19 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
19
(ENG) VQT4C37
5 Select the operation icon using
3/4/2/1.
B Operation icon
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-display
the operation icon.
Watching Video/Pictures on your TV
1 Connect this unit to a TV.
A AV cable (supplied)
≥ Check that the plugs are inserted as far as they go.
≥ Do not use any other AV cables except the supplied one.
2 Select the video input on the TV.
3 Change the mode to to play back.
Motion picture playback Still picture playback
1/;: Playback/Pause
6: Rewind playback
5: Fast forward playback
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
1/;: Slide show (playback of the still
pictures in numerical order)
start/pause.
2;: Plays back the previous picture.
;1: Plays back the next picture.
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
0h00m00s
0h00m00s


HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 19 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
19
(ENG) VQT4C37
5 Select the operation icon using
3/4/2/1.
B Operation icon
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-display
the operation icon.
Watching Video/Pictures on your TV
1 Connect this unit to a TV.
A AV cable (supplied)
≥ Check that the plugs are inserted as far as they go.
≥ Do not use any other AV cables except the supplied one.
2 Select the video input on the TV.
3 Change the mode to to play back.
Motion picture playback Still picture playback
1/;: Playback/Pause
6: Rewind playback
5: Fast forward playback
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
1/;: Slide show (playback of the still
pictures in numerical order)
start/pause.
2;: Plays back the previous picture.
;1: Plays back the next picture.
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
0h00m00s
0h00m00s


HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 19 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
5 Gumbima ▲/▼/◄/► odaberite
funkcijsku ikonu.
Funkcijska ikona
●
●Pritisnite gumb ENTER da biste prikazali/
sakrili funkcijsku ikonu.
Reprodukcija videozapisa Reprodukcija fotografije
Reprodukcija/Pauza
Reprodukcija unatrag
Ubrzana reprodukcija unaprijed
Zaustavljanje reprodukcije i
prikaz minijatura.
Pokretanje/pauziranje prikaza
fotografija u nizu (reproduciranje
fotografija prema rednom broju).
Reprodukcija prethodne fotografije.
Reprodukcija sljedeće fotografije.
Zaustavljanje reprodukcije i
prikaz minijatura.
- 25 -
5 Select the operation icon using
3/4/2/1.
B Operation icon
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-display
the operation icon.
∫ Change the thumbnail display
While the thumbnail is displayed, the thumbnail display changes in the following order if the
zoom lever is operated to side or side.
20 scenes () 9 scenes () 1 scene
≥ 9 scenes display returns if the unit is turned off or the mode is
changed.
∫ Speaker volume adjustment
Operate the volume lever to adjust the
speaker volume during motion picture
playback.
≥ Sound will be heard only during normal playback.
≥ If pause play is continued for 5 minutes, the screen returns to the thumbnails.
≥ The elapsed time for playback indication will be reset to 0h00m00s for each scene.
≥ The image will pause momentarily and the screen may turn black when the scenes are
switching.
Motion picture playback Still picture playback
1/;: Playback/Pause
6: Rewind playback
5: Fast forward playback
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
1/;: Slide show (playback of the still
pictures in numerical order)
start/pause.
2;: Plays back the previous picture.
;1: Plays back the next picture.
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
Towards “r”: Increases the volume
Towards “s”: Decreases the volume
0h00m00s
0h00m00s

- 25 -
5 Select the operation icon using
3/4/2/1.
B Operation icon
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-display
the operation icon.
∫ Change the thumbnail display
While the thumbnail is displayed, the thumbnail display changes in the following order if the
zoom lever is operated to side or side.
20 scenes () 9 scenes () 1 scene
≥ 9 scenes display returns if the unit is turned off or the mode is
changed.
∫ Speaker volume adjustment
Operate the volume lever to adjust the
speaker volume during motion picture
playback.
≥ Sound will be heard only during normal playback.
≥ If pause play is continued for 5 minutes, the screen returns to the thumbnails.
≥ The elapsed time for playback indication will be reset to 0h00m00s for each scene.
≥ The image will pause momentarily and the screen may turn black when the scenes are
switching.
Motion picture playback Still picture playback
1/;: Playback/Pause
6: Rewind playback
5: Fast forward playback
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
1/;: Slide show (playback of the still
pictures in numerical order)
start/pause.
2;: Plays back the previous picture.
;1: Plays back the next picture.
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
Towards “r”: Increases the volume
Towards “s”: Decreases the volume
0h00m00s
0h00m00s

- 25 -
5 Select the operation icon using
3/4/2/1.
B Operation icon
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-display
the operation icon.
∫ Change the thumbnail display
While the thumbnail is displayed, the thumbnail display changes in the following order if the
zoom lever is operated to side or side.
20 scenes () 9 scenes () 1 scene
≥ 9 scenes display returns if the unit is turned off or the mode is
changed.
∫ Speaker volume adjustment
Operate the volume lever to adjust the
speaker volume during motion picture
playback.
≥ Sound will be heard only during normal playback.
≥ If pause play is continued for 5 minutes, the screen returns to the thumbnails.
≥ The elapsed time for playback indication will be reset to 0h00m00s for each scene.
≥ The image will pause momentarily and the screen may turn black when the scenes are
switching.
Motion picture playback Still picture playback
1/;: Playback/Pause
6: Rewind playback
5: Fast forward playback
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
1/;: Slide show (playback of the still
pictures in numerical order)
start/pause.
2;: Plays back the previous picture.
;1: Plays back the next picture.
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
Towards “r”: Increases the volume
Towards “s”: Decreases the volume
0h00m00s
0h00m00s

- 25 -
5 Select the operation icon using
3/4/2/1.
B Operation icon
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-display
the operation icon.
∫ Change the thumbnail display
While the thumbnail is displayed, the thumbnail display changes in the following order if the
zoom lever is operated to side or side.
20 scenes () 9 scenes () 1 scene
≥ 9 scenes display returns if the unit is turned off or the mode is
changed.
∫ Speaker volume adjustment
Operate the volume lever to adjust the
speaker volume during motion picture
playback.
≥ Sound will be heard only during normal playback.
≥ If pause play is continued for 5 minutes, the screen returns to the thumbnails.
≥ The elapsed time for playback indication will be reset to 0h00m00s for each scene.
≥ The image will pause momentarily and the screen may turn black when the scenes are
switching.
Motion picture playback Still picture playback
1/;: Playback/Pause
6: Rewind playback
5: Fast forward playback
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
1/;: Slide show (playback of the still
pictures in numerical order)
start/pause.
2;: Plays back the previous picture.
;1: Plays back the next picture.
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
Towards “r”: Increases the volume
Towards “s”: Decreases the volume
0h00m00s
0h00m00s

19
(ENG) VQT4C37
5 Select the operation icon using
3/4/2/1.
B Operation icon
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-display
the operation icon.
Watching Video/Pictures on your TV
1 Connect this unit to a TV.
A AV cable (supplied)
≥ Check that the plugs are inserted as far as they go.
≥ Do not use any other AV cables except the supplied one.
2 Select the video input on the TV.
3 Change the mode to to play back.
Motion picture playback Still picture playback
1/;: Playback/Pause
6: Rewind playback
5: Fast forward playback
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
1/;: Slide show (playback of the still
pictures in numerical order)
start/pause.
2;: Plays back the previous picture.
;1: Plays back the next picture.
∫: Stops the playback and shows
the thumbnails.
0h00m00s
0h00m00s


HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 19 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
Page: 26
- 27 -
1 Press the MENU button.
2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the
top menu A, then press the
ENTER button.
3 Select the submenu B using
3/4 and press 1 or press the
ENTER button.
4 Select the desired item using
3/4, and press the ENTER
button to set.
To get back to the previous screen
Press 2 of the cursor button.
To exit the menu screen
Press the MENU button.
∫ About the information display
Descriptions of the selected submenus and
items displayed in Steps 3 and 4, and
messages to confirm settings are displayed.
∫ About the operation icons
/ :
Select and then press the ENTER button
to switch the menu and thumbnail
display page.
:
Select and then press the ENTER button
to return to the previous screen in cases
such as menu setting, etc.
Basic
Using the menu screen
- 27 -
20
VQT4C37 (ENG)
1 Press the MENU button.
2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the
top menu A, then press the
ENTER button.
3 Select the submenu B using
3/4 and press 1 or press the
ENTER button.
4 Select the desired item using
3/4, and press the ENTER
button to set.
To get back to the previous screen
Press 2 of the cursor button.
To exit the menu screen
Press the MENU button.
∫ About the information display
Descriptions of the selected submenus and
items displayed in Steps 3 and 4, and
messages to confirm settings are displayed.
∫ About the operation icons
/ :
Select and then press the ENTER button
to switch the menu and thumbnail
display page.
:
Select and then press the ENTER button
to return to the previous screen in cases
such as menu setting, etc.
Language selection
You can select the language on the screen
display and the menu screen.
Basic
Using the menu screen
: [SETUP] # [LANGUAGE]
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 20 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
20
VQT4C37 (ENG)
1 Press the MENU button.
2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the
top menu A, then press the
ENTER button.
3 Select the submenu B using
3/4 and press 1 or press the
ENTER button.
4 Select the desired item using
3/4, and press the ENTER
button to set.
To get back to the previous screen
Press 2 of the cursor button.
To exit the menu screen
Press the MENU button.
∫ About the information display
Descriptions of the selected submenus and
items displayed in Steps 3 and 4, and
messages to confirm settings are displayed.
∫ About the operation icons
/ :
Select and then press the ENTER button
to switch the menu and thumbnail
display page.
:
Select and then press the ENTER button
to return to the previous screen in cases
such as menu setting, etc.
Language selection
You can select the language on the screen
display and the menu screen.
Basic
Using the menu screen
: [SETUP] # [LANGUAGE]
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 20 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
20
VQT4C37 (ENG)
1 Press the MENU button.
2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the
top menu A, then press the
ENTER button.
3 Select the submenu B using
3/4 and press 1 or press the
ENTER button.
4 Select the desired item using
3/4, and press the ENTER
button to set.
To get back to the previous screen
Press 2 of the cursor button.
To exit the menu screen
Press the MENU button.
∫ About the information display
Descriptions of the selected submenus and
items displayed in Steps 3 and 4, and
messages to confirm settings are displayed.
∫ About the operation icons
/ :
Select and then press the ENTER button
to switch the menu and thumbnail
display page.
:
Select and then press the ENTER button
to return to the previous screen in cases
such as menu setting, etc.
Language selection
You can select the language on the screen
display and the menu screen.
Basic
Using the menu screen
: [SETUP] # [LANGUAGE]
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 20 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
20
VQT4C37 (ENG)
1 Press the MENU button.
2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the
top menu A, then press the
ENTER button.
3 Select the submenu B using
3/4 and press 1 or press the
ENTER button.
4 Select the desired item using
3/4, and press the ENTER
button to set.
To get back to the previous screen
Press 2 of the cursor button.
To exit the menu screen
Press the MENU button.
∫ About the information display
Descriptions of the selected submenus and
items displayed in Steps 3 and 4, and
messages to confirm settings are displayed.
∫ About the operation icons
/ :
Select and then press the ENTER button
to switch the menu and thumbnail
display page.
:
Select and then press the ENTER button
to return to the previous screen in cases
such as menu setting, etc.
Language selection
You can select the language on the screen
display and the menu screen.
Basic
Using the menu screen
: [SETUP] # [LANGUAGE]
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 20 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
20
VQT4C37 (ENG)
1 Press the MENU button.
2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the
top menu A, then press the
ENTER button.
3 Select the submenu B using
3/4 and press 1 or press the
ENTER button.
4 Select the desired item using
3/4, and press the ENTER
button to set.
To get back to the previous screen
Press 2 of the cursor button.
To exit the menu screen
Press the MENU button.
∫ About the information display
Descriptions of the selected submenus and
items displayed in Steps 3 and 4, and
messages to confirm settings are displayed.
∫ About the operation icons
/ :
Select and then press the ENTER button
to switch the menu and thumbnail
display page.
:
Select and then press the ENTER button
to return to the previous screen in cases
such as menu setting, etc.
Language selection
You can select the language on the screen
display and the menu screen.
Basic
Using the menu screen
: [SETUP] # [LANGUAGE]
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 20 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
1 Pritisnite gumb MENU.
2 Pritisnite ▲/▼/◄/► da biste
odabrali glavni izbornik
i zatim pritisnite gumb ENTER.
Za povratak na prethodni zaslon
Pritisnite ◄ na kursorskom gumbu.
Za izlazak iz zaslona s izbornikom
Pritisnite gumb MENU.
■
■ Prikaz informacija na zaslonu
Prikazuje se opis odabranih podizbornika
i stavki prikazanih u koracima 3. i 4. te
poruke za potvrđivanje postavki.
■
■ Funkcijske ikone
Odaberite i pritisnite gumb ENTER za
prebacivanje prikaza između izbornika
i minijatura.
Odaberite i pritisnite gumb ENTER
za povratak na prethodni zaslon u
slučaju kad postavljate izbornik i sl.
3 Gumbima ▲/▼ odaberite
podizbornik i pritisnite ►
ili gumb ENTER.
4 Gumbima ▲/▼ odaberite
željene stavke i pritisnite
gumb ENTER za postavljanje.
Osnovne funkcije
Korištenje zaslona s izbornikom
20
VQT4C37 (ENG)
1 Press the MENU button.
2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the
top menu A, then press the
ENTER button.
3 Select the submenu B using
3/4 and press 1 or press the
ENTER button.
4 Select the desired item using
3/4, and press the ENTER
button to set.
To get back to the previous screen
Press 2 of the cursor button.
To exit the menu screen
Press the MENU button.
∫ About the information display
Descriptions of the selected submenus and
items displayed in Steps 3 and 4, and
messages to confirm settings are displayed.
∫ About the operation icons
/ :
Select and then press the ENTER button
to switch the menu and thumbnail
display page.
:
Select and then press the ENTER button
to return to the previous screen in cases
such as menu setting, etc.
Language selection
You can select the language on the screen
display and the menu screen.
Basic
Using the menu screen
: [SETUP] # [LANGUAGE]
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 20 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
20
VQT4C37 (ENG)
1 Press the MENU button.
2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the
top menu A, then press the
ENTER button.
3 Select the submenu B using
3/4 and press 1 or press the
ENTER button.
4 Select the desired item using
3/4, and press the ENTER
button to set.
To get back to the previous screen
Press 2 of the cursor button.
To exit the menu screen
Press the MENU button.
∫ About the information display
Descriptions of the selected submenus and
items displayed in Steps 3 and 4, and
messages to confirm settings are displayed.
∫ About the operation icons
/ :
Select and then press the ENTER button
to switch the menu and thumbnail
display page.
:
Select and then press the ENTER button
to return to the previous screen in cases
such as menu setting, etc.
Language selection
You can select the language on the screen
display and the menu screen.
Basic
Using the menu screen
: [SETUP] # [LANGUAGE]
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 20 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
20
VQT4C37 (ENG)
1 Press the MENU button.
2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the
top menu A, then press the
ENTER button.
3 Select the submenu B using
3/4 and press 1 or press the
ENTER button.
4 Select the desired item using
3/4, and press the ENTER
button to set.
To get back to the previous screen
Press 2 of the cursor button.
To exit the menu screen
Press the MENU button.
∫ About the information display
Descriptions of the selected submenus an
items displayed in Steps 3 and 4, and
messages to confirm settings are displaye
∫ About the operation icons
/ :
Select and then press the ENTER butto
to switch the menu and thumbnail
display page.
:
Select and then press the ENTER butto
to return to the previous screen in case
such as menu setting, etc.
Language selection
You can select the language on the scree
display and the menu screen.
Basic
Using the menu screen
: [SETUP] # [LANGUAGE]
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 20 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
20
VQT4C37 (ENG)
1 Press the MENU button.
2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the
top menu A, then press the
ENTER button.
3 Select the submenu B using
3/4 and press 1 or press the
ENTER button.
4 Select the desired item using
3/4, and press the ENTER
button to set.
To get back to the previous screen
Press 2 of the cursor button.
To exit the menu screen
Press the MENU button.
∫ About the information display
Descriptions of the selected submenus and
items displayed in Steps 3 and 4, and
messages to confirm settings are displayed.
∫ About the operation icons
/ :
Select and then press the ENTER button
to switch the menu and thumbnail
display page.
:
Select and then press the ENTER button
to return to the previous screen in cases
such as menu setting, etc.
Language selection
You can select the language on the screen
display and the menu screen.
Basic
Using the menu screen
: [SETUP] # [LANGUAGE]
HC-V10EP-VQT4C37_mst.book 20 ページ 2012年1月25日 水曜日 午後12時5分
Page: 27
- 28 -
≥ The items displayed differ depending on the position or settings of the mode switch.
Select the menu.
The screen display can be changed to [ON] (all information displayed) or [OFF] (a portion of
information displayed).
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 17.
It is possible to display and record the time at the travel destination by selecting your home
region and the travel destination.
1 Select [SET WORLD TIME] and press the ENTER button.
≥ If the clock is not set, adjust the clock to the current time. (l 17)
≥ When the [HOME] (your home region) is not set, the message appears. Press the ENTER
button and proceed to Step 3.
2 (Only when setting your home region)
Select [HOME] using 2/1and press the ENTER button.
3 (Only when setting your home region)
Select your home region using
2/1and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press 3 to set daylight saving time.
appears and the summer time
setting is turned on; the time
difference from GMT is set forward by
one hour. Press 3 again to return to
the normal time setting.
4 (Only when setting the region of your
travel destination)
Select [DESTINATION] using 2/1 and press the ENTER button.
≥ When the home region is set for the first time, the screen for selecting home/travel
destination appears after setting the home region successively. If the home region has
already been set once, execute the menu operation for Step 1.
Basic
Using the Setup Menu
: [SETUP] # desired setting
[DISPLAY] [ON]/[OFF]
[EXT. DISPLAY] [SIMPLE]/[DETAIL]/[OFF]
[CLOCK SET]
[SET WORLD TIME]


A The current time
B The time difference from GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time)
- 28 -
≥ The items displayed differ depending on the position or settings of the mode switch.
Select the menu.
The screen display can be changed to [ON] (all information displayed) or [OFF] (a portion of
information displayed).
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 17.
It is possible to display and record the time at the travel destination by selecting your home
region and the travel destination.
1 Select [SET WORLD TIME] and press the ENTER button.
≥ If the clock is not set, adjust the clock to the current time. (l 17)
≥ When the [HOME] (your home region) is not set, the message appears. Press the ENTER
button and proceed to Step 3.
2 (Only when setting your home region)
Select [HOME] using 2/1and press the ENTER button.
3 (Only when setting your home region)
Select your home region using
2/1and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press 3 to set daylight saving time.
appears and the summer time
setting is turned on; the time
difference from GMT is set forward by
one hour. Press 3 again to return to
the normal time setting.
4 (Only when setting the region of your
travel destination)
Select [DESTINATION] using 2/1 and press the ENTER button.
≥ When the home region is set for the first time, the screen for selecting home/travel
destination appears after setting the home region successively. If the home region has
already been set once, execute the menu operation for Step 1.
Basic
Using the Setup Menu
: [SETUP] # desired setting
[DISPLAY] [ON]/[OFF]
[EXT. DISPLAY] [SIMPLE]/[DETAIL]/[OFF]
[CLOCK SET]
[SET WORLD TIME]


A The current time
B The time difference from GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time)
- 28 -
≥ The items displayed differ depending on the position or settings of the mode switch.
Select the menu.
The screen display can be changed to [ON] (all information displayed) or [OFF] (a portion of
information displayed).
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 17.
It is possible to display and record the time at the travel destination by selecting your home
region and the travel destination.
1 Select [SET WORLD TIME] and press the ENTER button.
≥ If the clock is not set, adjust the clock to the current time. (l 17)
≥ When the [HOME] (your home region) is not set, the message appears. Press the ENTER
button and proceed to Step 3.
2 (Only when setting your home region)
Select [HOME] using 2/1and press the ENTER button.
3 (Only when setting your home region)
Select your home region using
2/1and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press 3 to set daylight saving time.
appears and the summer time
setting is turned on; the time
difference from GMT is set forward by
one hour. Press 3 again to return to
the normal time setting.
4 (Only when setting the region of your
travel destination)
Select [DESTINATION] using 2/1 and press the ENTER button.
≥ When the home region is set for the first time, the screen for selecting home/travel
destination appears after setting the home region successively. If the home region has
already been set once, execute the menu operation for Step 1.
Basic
Using the Setup Menu
: [SETUP] # desired setting
[DISPLAY] [ON]/[OFF]
[EXT. DISPLAY] [SIMPLE]/[DETAIL]/[OFF]
[CLOCK SET]
[SET WORLD TIME]


A The current time
B The time difference from GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time)
- 28 -
≥ The items displayed differ depending on the position or settings of the mode switch.
Select the menu.
The screen display can be changed to [ON] (all information displayed) or [OFF] (a portion of
information displayed).
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 17.
It is possible to display and record the time at the travel destination by selecting your home
region and the travel destination.
1 Select [SET WORLD TIME] and press the ENTER button.
≥ If the clock is not set, adjust the clock to the current time. (l 17)
≥ When the [HOME] (your home region) is not set, the message appears. Press the ENTER
button and proceed to Step 3.
2 (Only when setting your home region)
Select [HOME] using 2/1and press the ENTER button.
3 (Only when setting your home region)
Select your home region using
2/1and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press 3 to set daylight saving time.
appears and the summer time
setting is turned on; the time
difference from GMT is set forward by
one hour. Press 3 again to return to
the normal time setting.
4 (Only when setting the region of your
travel destination)
Select [DESTINATION] using 2/1 and press the ENTER button.
≥ When the home region is set for the first time, the screen for selecting home/travel
destination appears after setting the home region successively. If the home region has
already been set once, execute the menu operation for Step 1.
Basic
Using the Setup Menu
: [SETUP] # desired setting
[DISPLAY] [ON]/[OFF]
[EXT. DISPLAY] [SIMPLE]/[DETAIL]/[OFF]
[CLOCK SET]
[SET WORLD TIME]


A The current time
B The time difference from GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time)
- 28 -
1 Odaberite opciju [SET WORLD TIME] i pritisnite gumb ENTER.
●
●Ako sat nije postavljen, podesite ga na trenutačno vrijeme. (→ 17)
●
●Ako opcija [HOME] (Dom) nije postavljena, pojavljuje se poruka. Pritisnite gumb
ENTER i prijeđite na korak 3.
2 (Samo kada podešavate regiju u kojoj boravite)
Odaberite [HOME] pomoću ◄/► i pritisnite gumb ENTER.
3 (Samo kada podešavate regiju u kojoj
boravite) Odaberite domaću zonu
gumbima ◄/► i pritisnite gumb
ENTER.
●
●Pritisnite ▲ za podešavanje ljetnog
računanja vremena.
Pojavit će se simbol i uključit
će se postavka za ljetno računanje
vremena; odstupanje od GMT-a
pomaknut će se jedan sat unaprijed.
Ponovo pritisnite gumb ▲ za povratak
na izvorno vrijeme.
4 (Samo kada podešavate regiju odredišta putovanja)
Odaberite [DESTINATION] pomoću ◄/► i pritisnite gumb ENTER.
●
●Kada prvi put postavljate regiju u kojoj živite, nakon odabira regije u kojoj živite odmah će
se pojaviti zaslon za odabir regije u kojoj živite/regije odredišta putovanja. Ako je regija u
kojoj živite već postavljena, u izborniku izvršite postupak koji je opisan u 1. koraku.
[DISPLAY] [ON] / [OFF] (uklj.)/(isklj.)
Prikaz na zaslonu može se promijeniti na [ON] (prikazivat će se sve informacije) ili
na [OFF] (prikazivat će se samo dio informacija).
[EXT. DISPLAY] [SIMPLE]/[DETAIL]/[OFF]
Pogledajte str. 59.
[CLOCK SET] (Postavke sata)
Pogledajte str. 17.
[SET WORLD TIME]
(Postavke svjetskog vremena)
Moguće je prikazati i spremiti vrijeme na odredištu putovanja odabirom regije u kojoj
živite i odredišta putovanja.
●
●Prikazane stavke razlikuju se ovisno o položaju prekidača za odabir načina rada.
Odaberite izbornik.
[SETUP] (podešavanje) → željena postavka
Trenutačno vrijeme
Vremenska razlika s obzirom
na GMT (Greenwich Mean
Time)
Osnovne funkcije
Korištenja izbornika za podešavanje
- 28 -
≥ The items displayed differ depending on the position or settings of the mode sw
Select the menu.
The screen display can be changed to [ON] (all information displayed) or [OFF] (a port
information displayed).
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 17.
It is possible to display and record the time at the travel destination by selecting your h
region and the travel destination.
1 Select [SET WORLD TIME] and press the ENTER button.
≥ If the clock is not set, adjust the clock to the current time. (l 17)
≥ When the [HOME] (your home region) is not set, the message appears. Press the EN
button and proceed to Step 3.
2 (Only when setting your home region)
Select [HOME] using 2/1and press the ENTER button.
3 (Only when setting your home region)
Select your home region using
2/1and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press 3 to set daylight saving time.
appears and the summer time
setting is turned on; the time
difference from GMT is set forward by
one hour. Press 3 again to return to
the normal time setting.
4 (Only when setting the region of your
travel destination)
Select [DESTINATION] using 2/1 and press the ENTER button.
≥ When the home region is set for the first time, the screen for selecting home/travel
destination appears after setting the home region successively. If the home region ha
already been set once, execute the menu operation for Step 1.
Basic
Using the Setup Menu
: [SETUP] # desired setting
[DISPLAY] [ON]/[OFF]
[EXT. DISPLAY] [SIMPLE]/[DETAIL]/[OFF]
[CLOCK SET]
[SET WORLD TIME]
A The current time
B The time difference from GM
(Greenwich Mean Time)
Page: 28
- 29 -
5 (Only when setting the region of your
travel destination)
Select your travel destination
using 2/1 and press the
ENTER button.
≥ Press 3 to set daylight saving time.
appears and the summer
time setting is turned on. The travel
destination time and time difference
from the home region time are set
forward by one hour. Press 3 again
to return to the normal time setting.
≥ Close the setting by pressing the
MENU button. appears and the
time of the travel destination is indicated.
To return the display to the home setting
Set the home region using Step 1 to 3, and close the setting by pressing the MENU button.
≥ If you cannot find your travel destination in the area shown on the screen, set it by using
the time difference from your home region.
It is possible to change the date and time display mode.
It is possible to change the date format.
When about 5 minutes have passed without any operation, this unit automatically turns off to
save battery life.
≥ This unit will not automatically turn off even if [ECONOMY (BATT)] is set to [ON] in
following cases:
jUsing the AC adaptor*
jUsing the USB cable for PC etc.
jPRE-REC is used
jDuring playback of the slide show
* When [ECONOMY (AC)] is activated, this unit automatically turns off.
[DATE/TIME] [DATE]/[D/T]/[OFF]
[DATE FORMAT] [Y/M/D]/[M/D/Y]/[D/M/Y]
[ECONOMY (BATT)] [ON]/[OFF]


C The local time at the selected travel
destination
D The time difference between the
travel destination and the home
region
- 29 -
5 (Samo kada podešavate regiju
odredišta putovanja)
Odaberite odredište putovanja
pomoću ◄/► i pritisnite gumb
ENTER.
●
●Pritisnite ▲ za podešavanje ljetnog
računanja vremena.
Pojavit će se oznaka i uključit
će se postavka računanja ljetnog
vremena. Sat i vremenska razlika
u odnosu na regiju u kojoj živite
postavljeni su jedan sat unaprijed.
Ponovno pritisnite gumb ▲ za
povratak na izvorno vrijeme.
●
●Zatvorite postavke pritiskom na
gumb MENU. Pojavit će se oznaka i vrijeme odredišta putovanja.
Povratak na početne postavke
Odredite postavke regije u kojoj živite tako da slijedite korake od 1. do 3. i zatvorite
postavke pritiskom na gumb MENU.
●
●Ako ne možete pronaći svoje odredište na područjima prikazanima na zaslonu,
podesite prema vremenskoj razlici iz vaše vremenske zone.
●
●Uređaj se neće automatski isključiti čak i ako je [ECONOMY (BATT)] postavljen na
[ON] u sljedećim slučajevima:
-
- kada koristite prilagodnik za izmjenični napon*
-
- kada koristite USB kabel za računalo, itd.
-
- kada koristite funkciju PRE-REC
-
- tijekom reprodukcije prikaza u nizu
* Kada je postavka [ECONOMY (AC)] uključena, uređaj se automatski isključuje.
[DATE/TIME]
(Datum/vrijeme)
[DATE]/[D/T]/[OFF]
Možete promijeniti prikaz datuma i vremena.
[DATE FORMAT]
(Format datuma)
[G/M/D]/[M/D/G]/[D/M/G]
Možete promijeniti format datuma.
[ECONOMY (BATT)] [ON] / [OFF] (uklj.)/(isklj.)
Ako protekne 5 minuta bez ikakvih radnji, uređaj se isključuje da bi se produljilo
vrijeme trajanja baterije.
Lokalno vrijeme na odabranom
odredištu putovanja
Vremenska razlika između odredišta
putovanja i regije u kojoj živite
- 29 -
5 (Only when setting the region of your
travel destination)
Select your travel destination
using 2/1 and press the
ENTER button.
≥ Press 3 to set daylight saving time.
appears and the summer
time setting is turned on. The travel
destination time and time difference
from the home region time are set
forward by one hour. Press 3 again
to return to the normal time setting.
≥ Close the setting by pressing the
MENU button. appears and the
time of the travel destination is indicated.
To return the display to the home setting
Set the home region using Step 1 to 3, and close the setting by pressing the MENU button.
≥ If you cannot find your travel destination in the area shown on the screen, set it by using
the time difference from your home region.
It is possible to change the date and time display mode.
It is possible to change the date format.
When about 5 minutes have passed without any operation, this unit automatically turns off to
save battery life.
≥ This unit will not automatically turn off even if [ECONOMY (BATT)] is set to [ON] in
following cases:
jUsing the AC adaptor*
jUsing the USB cable for PC etc.
jPRE-REC is used
jDuring playback of the slide show
* When [ECONOMY (AC)] is activated, this unit automatically turns off.
[DATE/TIME] [DATE]/[D/T]/[OFF]
[DATE FORMAT] [Y/M/D]/[M/D/Y]/[D/M/Y]
[ECONOMY (BATT)] [ON]/[OFF]


C The local time at the selected travel
destination
D The time difference between the
travel destination and the home
region
- 29 -
5 (Only when setting the region of your
travel destination)
Select your travel destination
using 2/1 and press the
ENTER button.
≥ Press 3 to set daylight saving time.
appears and the summer
time setting is turned on. The travel
destination time and time difference
from the home region time are set
forward by one hour. Press 3 again
to return to the normal time setting.
≥ Close the setting by pressing the
MENU button. appears and the
time of the travel destination is indicated.
To return the display to the home setting
Set the home region using Step 1 to 3, and close the setting by pressing the MENU but
≥ If you cannot find your travel destination in the area shown on the screen, set it by us
the time difference from your home region.
It is possible to change the date and time display mode.
It is possible to change the date format.
When about 5 minutes have passed without any operation, this unit automatically turns
save battery life.
≥ This unit will not automatically turn off even if [ECONOMY (BATT)] is set to [ON] in
following cases:
jUsing the AC adaptor*
jUsing the USB cable for PC etc.
jPRE-REC is used
jDuring playback of the slide show
* When [ECONOMY (AC)] is activated, this unit automatically turns off.
[DATE/TIME] [DATE]/[D/T]/[OFF]
[DATE FORMAT] [Y/M/D]/[M/D/Y]/[D/M/Y]
[ECONOMY (BATT)] [ON]/[OFF]
C The local time at the selected trave
destination
D The time difference between the
travel destination and the home
region
- 28 -
It is possible to display and record the time at the travel destination by selecting your h
region and the travel destination.
1 Select [SET WORLD TIME] and press the ENTER button.
≥ If the clock is not set, adjust the clock to the current time. (l 17)
≥ When the [HOME] (your home region) is not set, the message appears. Press the EN
button and proceed to Step 3.
2 (Only when setting your home region)
Select [HOME] using 2/1and press the ENTER button.
3 (Only when setting your home region)
Select your home region using
2/1and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press 3 to set daylight saving time.
appears and the summer time
setting is turned on; the time
difference from GMT is set forward by
one hour. Press 3 again to return to
the normal time setting.
4 (Only when setting the region of your
travel destination)
Select [DESTINATION] using 2/1 and press the ENTER button.
≥ When the home region is set for the first time, the screen for selecting home/travel
destination appears after setting the home region successively. If the home region h
already been set once, execute the menu operation for Step 1.
A The current time
B The time difference from G
(Greenwich Mean Time)
Page: 29
- 30 -
When about 30 minutes have passed without any operation while connecting AC adaptor
with this unit, this unit automatically turns off.
≥ This unit will not automatically turn off even if the [ECONOMY (AC)] is set to [ON] in
following cases:
jUsing the USB cable for PC etc.
jPRE-REC is used
jDuring playback of the slide show
This unit is put into recording pause approx. 0.8 seconds after the LCD monitor is reopened.
≥ When in Quick Start Standby Mode about 60% of the power used in recording pause
mode is being consumed, so the recording time will be reduced.
≥ Quick Start will not work if there is no SD card inserted.
≥ The LCD monitor cannot be closed when using the USB cable, so please disconnect it
from the unit.
≥ Change the mode to .
1 Set [QUICK START] to [ON].
2 Close the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A flashes green and the unit
goes into Quick Start Standby Mode.
3 Open the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A lights red and the unit is put
into recording pause.
≥ Quick Start Standby Mode is cancelled if
jabout 5 minutes have elapsed
jmode is set to
≥ It may take some time for Automatic White Balance to adjust.
≥ In the Quick Start Mode, the zoom magnification becomes approx. 1k.
≥ When it has gone into Quick Start Standby Mode automatically with the [ECONOMY
(BATT)] (l 29)/[ECONOMY (AC)], close the LCD monitor once and open it again.
≥ Turn the unit off using the power button.
[ECONOMY (AC)] [ON]/[OFF]
[QUICK START] [ON]/[OFF]


- 30 -
[ECONOMY (AC)] [ON] / [OFF] (uklj.)/(isklj.)
Kada prođe približno 30 minuta bez ikakvih radnji prilikom spajanja prilagodnika za
izmjenični napon s ovim uređajem, uređaj se automatski isključuje.
●
●Uređaj se neće automatski isključiti čak i ako je funkcija [ECONOMY (AC)]
postavljena na [ON] u sljedećim slučajevima:
-
- kada koristite USB kabel za računalo, itd.
-
- kada koristite funkciju PRE-REC
-
- tijekom reprodukcije prikaza u nizu
[QUICK START]
(Brzi početak)
[ON] / [OFF] (uklj.)/(isklj.)
Ovaj će uređaj ući u pauzu snimanja oko 0,8 sekundi nakon što se LCD monitor
ponovno otvori.
●
●Kod stanja čekanja za brzi početak oko 60% snage troši na privremeno
zaustavljanje snimanja, stoga će vrijeme snimanja biti skraćeno.
●
●Vrijeme pokretanja neće biti kraće ako nije umetnuta SD kartica.
●
●LCD monitor ne može se zatvoriti tijekom korištenja USB kabela pa ga zato
iskopčajte iz uređaja.
●
●Promijenite način rada na .
1 Postavite [QUICK START] na [ON].
2 Zatvorite LCD monitor.
Pokazatelj statusa treperi zeleno, a uređaj
prelazi u stanje čekanja za brzi početak.
3 Otvorite LCD monitor.
Pokazatelj statusa svijetli crveno, a uređaj se
prebacuje na privremeno zaustavljanje snimanja.
●
●Stanje čekanja brzog početka poništava se ako:
-
- prođe otprilike 5 minuta
-
- je način rada postavljen na
●
●Može biti potrebno određeno vrijeme za podešavanje automatskog balansa bijele boje.
●
●Kod brzog pokretanja uređaja uvećanje zuma postaje približno 1x.
●
●Kada uređaj automatski prijeđe u stanje čekanja brzog početka u funkciji
[ECONOMY (BATT)] (→ 29)/[ECONOMY (AC)], zatvorite LCD monitor i ponovno ga
otvorite.
●
●Isključite uređaj pomoću gumba za uključivanje/isključivanje.
- 30 -
When about 30 minutes have passed without any operation while connecting AC adaptor
with this unit, this unit automatically turns off.
≥ This unit will not automatically turn off even if the [ECONOMY (AC)] is set to [ON] in
following cases:
jUsing the USB cable for PC etc.
jPRE-REC is used
jDuring playback of the slide show
This unit is put into recording pause approx. 0.8 seconds after the LCD monitor is reopened.
≥ When in Quick Start Standby Mode about 60% of the power used in recording pause
mode is being consumed, so the recording time will be reduced.
≥ Quick Start will not work if there is no SD card inserted.
≥ The LCD monitor cannot be closed when using the USB cable, so please disconnect it
from the unit.
≥ Change the mode to .
1 Set [QUICK START] to [ON].
2 Close the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A flashes green and the unit
goes into Quick Start Standby Mode.
3 Open the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A lights red and the unit is put
into recording pause.
≥ Quick Start Standby Mode is cancelled if
jabout 5 minutes have elapsed
jmode is set to
≥ It may take some time for Automatic White Balance to adjust.
≥ In the Quick Start Mode, the zoom magnification becomes approx. 1k.
≥ When it has gone into Quick Start Standby Mode automatically with the [ECONOMY
(BATT)] (l 29)/[ECONOMY (AC)], close the LCD monitor once and open it again.
≥ Turn the unit off using the power button.
[ECONOMY (AC)] [ON]/[OFF]
[QUICK START] [ON]/[OFF]


- 30 -
When about 30 minutes have passed without any operation while connecting AC adaptor
with this unit, this unit automatically turns off.
≥ This unit will not automatically turn off even if the [ECONOMY (AC)] is set to [ON] in
following cases:
jUsing the USB cable for PC etc.
jPRE-REC is used
jDuring playback of the slide show
This unit is put into recording pause approx. 0.8 seconds after the LCD monitor is reopened.
≥ When in Quick Start Standby Mode about 60% of the power used in recording pause
mode is being consumed, so the recording time will be reduced.
≥ Quick Start will not work if there is no SD card inserted.
≥ The LCD monitor cannot be closed when using the USB cable, so please disconnect it
from the unit.
≥ Change the mode to .
1 Set [QUICK START] to [ON].
2 Close the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A flashes green and the unit
goes into Quick Start Standby Mode.
3 Open the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A lights red and the unit is put
into recording pause.
≥ Quick Start Standby Mode is cancelled if
jabout 5 minutes have elapsed
jmode is set to
≥ It may take some time for Automatic White Balance to adjust.
≥ In the Quick Start Mode, the zoom magnification becomes approx. 1k.
≥ When it has gone into Quick Start Standby Mode automatically with the [ECONOMY
(BATT)] (l 29)/[ECONOMY (AC)], close the LCD monitor once and open it again.
≥ Turn the unit off using the power button.
[ECONOMY (AC)] [ON]/[OFF]
[QUICK START] [ON]/[OFF]


When about 30 minutes have passed without any operation while connecting AC adaptor
with this unit, this unit automatically turns off.
≥ This unit will not automatically turn off even if the [ECONOMY (AC)] is set to [ON] in
following cases:
jUsing the USB cable for PC etc.
jPRE-REC is used
jDuring playback of the slide show
This unit is put into recording pause approx. 0.8 seconds after the LCD monitor is reopened.
≥ When in Quick Start Standby Mode about 60% of the power used in recording pause
mode is being consumed, so the recording time will be reduced.
≥ Quick Start will not work if there is no SD card inserted.
≥ The LCD monitor cannot be closed when using the USB cable, so please disconnect it
from the unit.
≥ Change the mode to .
1 Set [QUICK START] to [ON].
2 Close the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A flashes green and the unit
goes into Quick Start Standby Mode.
3 Open the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A lights red and the unit is put
into recording pause.
≥ Quick Start Standby Mode is cancelled if
jabout 5 minutes have elapsed
jmode is set to
≥ It may take some time for Automatic White Balance to adjust.
≥ In the Quick Start Mode, the zoom magnification becomes approx. 1k.
≥ When it has gone into Quick Start Standby Mode automatically with the [ECONOMY
(BATT)] (l 29)/[ECONOMY (AC)], close the LCD monitor once and open it again.
≥ Turn the unit off using the power button.
[ECONOMY (AC)] [ON]/[OFF]
[QUICK START] [ON]/[OFF]


- 30 -
When about 30 minutes have passed without any operation while connecting AC adaptor
with this unit, this unit automatically turns off.
≥ This unit will not automatically turn off even if the [ECONOMY (AC)] is set to [ON] in
following cases:
jUsing the USB cable for PC etc.
jPRE-REC is used
jDuring playback of the slide show
This unit is put into recording pause approx. 0.8 seconds after the LCD monitor is reopened.
≥ When in Quick Start Standby Mode about 60% of the power used in recording pause
mode is being consumed, so the recording time will be reduced.
≥ Quick Start will not work if there is no SD card inserted.
≥ The LCD monitor cannot be closed when using the USB cable, so please disconnect it
from the unit.
≥ Change the mode to .
1 Set [QUICK START] to [ON].
2 Close the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A flashes green and the unit
goes into Quick Start Standby Mode.
3 Open the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A lights red and the unit is put
into recording pause.
≥ Quick Start Standby Mode is cancelled if
jabout 5 minutes have elapsed
jmode is set to
≥ It may take some time for Automatic White Balance to adjust.
≥ In the Quick Start Mode, the zoom magnification becomes approx. 1k.
≥ When it has gone into Quick Start Standby Mode automatically with the [ECONOMY
(BATT)] (l 29)/[ECONOMY (AC)], close the LCD monitor once and open it again.
≥ Turn the unit off using the power button.
[ECONOMY (AC)] [ON]/[OFF]
[QUICK START] [ON]/[OFF]


Page: 30
- 31 -
[ALERT SOUND] (Zvuk upozorenja) /[OFF]
Dodirivanje zaslona, početak i završetak snimanja te uključivanje/isključivanje
uređaja mogu se potvrditi ovim zvukom.
Po 2 kratka zvučna signala 4 puta
Kada dođe do pogreške. Provjerite rečenicu prikazanu na zaslonu. (→ 78)
[POWER LCD]
Zahvaljujući ovoj funkciji omogućeno je lakše gledanje LCD monitora u prostorima s
jakim osvjetljenjem, uključujući i na otvorenome.
●
●Ove postavke ne utječu na stvarno snimljene slike.
●
●Pri uporabi prilagodnika za izmjenični napon, LCD monitor automatski se postavlja
na .
●
●Kada je LCD monitor osvijetljen, raspoloživo vrijeme snimanja s baterijom bit će kraće.
[LCD SET]
(Postavljanje LCD monitora)
Podešava svjetlinu i gustoću boje LCD monitora.
●
●Ove postavke ne utječu na stvarno snimljene slike.
1 Odaberite opciju [LCD SET] i pritisnite gumb ENTER.
2 Gumbima ▲/▼ odaberite stavku i pritisnite gumb ENTER za postavljanje.
3 Pritisnite gumbe ◄/► da biste podesili i potom pritisnite gumb ENTER.
●
●Pritisnite gumb MENU da biste izašli iz zaslona s izbornikom.
[HDMI RESOLUTION]
(HDMI razlučivost)
[AUTO]/[720p]/[576p]
Pogledajte str. 59.
Funkcija [VIERA Link] [ON] / [OFF] (uklj.)/(isklj.)
Pogledajte str. 60.
[TV ASPECT] (Omjer slike TV-a) [16:9]/[4:3]
Pogledajte str. 59.
[INITIAL SET] (Početne postavke)
Postavite na [YES] (Da) za vraćanje postavki izbornika na zadane vrijednosti (samo
kada je način rada podešen na ).
●
●Postavke za [CLOCK SET] i [LANGUAGE] (Jezik) neće se promijeniti.
- 31 -
Starting and stopping of recording and unit on/off can be confirmed with this sound.
2 Beeps for 4 times
When an error occurs. Check the sentence displayed on the screen. (l 78)
This makes it easier to view the LCD monitor in bright places including outdoors.
≥ These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.
≥ When the AC adaptor is in use, the LCD monitor is set to automatically.
≥ When the LCD monitor is bright, the recordable time with the battery will be shorter.
It adjusts brightness and colour density on the LCD monitor.
≥ These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.
1 Select [LCD SET] and press the ENTER button.
2 Select the item using 3/4, and press the ENTER button to set.
3 Press 2/1 to adjust, and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button to exit the menu screen.
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 60.
Please refer to page 59.
Set to [YES] for changing the menu settings back to the default condition.
(Only when the mode is at the position)
≥ Settings for [CLOCK SET] and [LANGUAGE] will not be changed.
[ALERT SOUND] / /[OFF]
(Volume low)/ (Volume high)
[POWER LCD] / / /
(Makes even brighter)/ (Makes brighter)/ (Normal)/ (Makes less bright)
[LCD SET]
[BRIGHTNESS]: Brightness of the LCD monitor
[COLOUR]: Colour level of the LCD monitor
[HDMI RESOLUTION] [AUTO]/[720p]/[576p]
[VIERA Link] [ON]/[OFF]
[TV ASPECT] [16:9]/[4:3]
[INITIAL SET]
+2 +1 0 -1
+2 +1 0 -1
+1
(Mala glasnoća)/ (Velika glasnoća)
(Još svjetlije)/ (Svjetlije)/ (Normalno)/ (Manje svijetlo)
[BRIGHTNESS] (Svjetlina): Svjetlina LCD monitora
[COLOUR] (Boja):		 Razina boje LCD monitora
- 31 -
Starting and stopping of recording and unit on/off can be confirmed with this sound.
2 Beeps for 4 times
When an error occurs. Check the sentence displayed on the screen. (l 78)
This makes it easier to view the LCD monitor in bright places including outdoors.
≥ These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.
≥ When the AC adaptor is in use, the LCD monitor is set to automatically.
≥ When the LCD monitor is bright, the recordable time with the battery will be shorter.
It adjusts brightness and colour density on the LCD monitor.
≥ These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.
1 Select [LCD SET] and press the ENTER button.
2 Select the item using 3/4, and press the ENTER button to set.
3 Press 2/1 to adjust, and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button to exit the menu screen.
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 60.
Please refer to page 59.
Set to [YES] for changing the menu settings back to the default condition.
(Only when the mode is at the position)
≥ Settings for [CLOCK SET] and [LANGUAGE] will not be changed.
[ALERT SOUND] / /[OFF]
(Volume low)/ (Volume high)
[POWER LCD] / / /
(Makes even brighter)/ (Makes brighter)/ (Normal)/ (Makes less bright)
[LCD SET]
[BRIGHTNESS]: Brightness of the LCD monitor
[COLOUR]: Colour level of the LCD monitor
[HDMI RESOLUTION] [AUTO]/[720p]/[576p]
[VIERA Link] [ON]/[OFF]
[TV ASPECT] [16:9]/[4:3]
[INITIAL SET]
+2 +1 0 -1
+2 +1 0 -1
+1
- 31 -
Starting and stopping of recording and unit on/off can be confirmed with this sound.
2 Beeps for 4 times
When an error occurs. Check the sentence displayed on the screen. (l 78)
This makes it easier to view the LCD monitor in bright places including outdoors.
≥ These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.
≥ When the AC adaptor is in use, the LCD monitor is set to automatically.
≥ When the LCD monitor is bright, the recordable time with the battery will be shorter.
It adjusts brightness and colour density on the LCD monitor.
≥ These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.
1 Select [LCD SET] and press the ENTER button.
2 Select the item using 3/4, and press the ENTER button to set.
3 Press 2/1 to adjust, and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button to exit the menu screen.
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 60.
Please refer to page 59.
Set to [YES] for changing the menu settings back to the default condition.
(Only when the mode is at the position)
≥ Settings for [CLOCK SET] and [LANGUAGE] will not be changed.
[ALERT SOUND] / /[OFF]
(Volume low)/ (Volume high)
[POWER LCD] / / /
(Makes even brighter)/ (Makes brighter)/ (Normal)/ (Makes less bright)
[LCD SET]
[BRIGHTNESS]: Brightness of the LCD monitor
[COLOUR]: Colour level of the LCD monitor
[HDMI RESOLUTION] [AUTO]/[720p]/[576p]
[VIERA Link] [ON]/[OFF]
[TV ASPECT] [16:9]/[4:3]
[INITIAL SET]
+2 +1 0 -1
+2 +1 0 -1
+1
- 31 -
Starting and stopping of recording and unit on/off can be confirmed with this sound.
2 Beeps for 4 times
When an error occurs. Check the sentence displayed on the screen. (l 78)
This makes it easier to view the LCD monitor in bright places including outdoors.
≥ These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.
≥ When the AC adaptor is in use, the LCD monitor is set to automatically.
≥ When the LCD monitor is bright, the recordable time with the battery will be shorter.
It adjusts brightness and colour density on the LCD monitor.
≥ These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.
1 Select [LCD SET] and press the ENTER button.
2 Select the item using 3/4, and press the ENTER button to set.
3 Press 2/1 to adjust, and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button to exit the menu screen.
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 60.
Please refer to page 59.
Set to [YES] for changing the menu settings back to the default condition.
(Only when the mode is at the position)
≥ Settings for [CLOCK SET] and [LANGUAGE] will not be changed.
[ALERT SOUND] / /[OFF]
(Volume low)/ (Volume high)
[POWER LCD] / / /
(Makes even brighter)/ (Makes brighter)/ (Normal)/ (Makes less bright)
[LCD SET]
[BRIGHTNESS]: Brightness of the LCD monitor
[COLOUR]: Colour level of the LCD monitor
[HDMI RESOLUTION] [AUTO]/[720p]/[576p]
[VIERA Link] [ON]/[OFF]
[TV ASPECT] [16:9]/[4:3]
[INITIAL SET]
+2 +1 0 -1
+2 +1 0 -1
+1
- 31 -
Starting and stopping of recording and unit on/off can be confirmed with this sound.
2 Beeps for 4 times
When an error occurs. Check the sentence displayed on the screen. (l 78)
This makes it easier to view the LCD monitor in bright places including outdoors.
≥ These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.
≥ When the AC adaptor is in use, the LCD monitor is set to automatically.
≥ When the LCD monitor is bright, the recordable time with the battery will be shorter.
It adjusts brightness and colour density on the LCD monitor.
≥ These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.
1 Select [LCD SET] and press the ENTER button.
2 Select the item using 3/4, and press the ENTER button to set.
3 Press 2/1 to adjust, and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button to exit the menu screen.
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 60.
Please refer to page 59.
Set to [YES] for changing the menu settings back to the default condition.
(Only when the mode is at the position)
≥ Settings for [CLOCK SET] and [LANGUAGE] will not be changed.
[ALERT SOUND] / /[OFF]
(Volume low)/ (Volume high)
[POWER LCD] / / /
(Makes even brighter)/ (Makes brighter)/ (Normal)/ (Makes less bright)
[LCD SET]
[BRIGHTNESS]: Brightness of the LCD monitor
[COLOUR]: Colour level of the LCD monitor
[HDMI RESOLUTION] [AUTO]/[720p]/[576p]
[VIERA Link] [ON]/[OFF]
[TV ASPECT] [16:9]/[4:3]
[INITIAL SET]
+2 +1 0 -1
+2 +1 0 -1
+1
- 31 -
Starting and stopping of recording and unit on/off can be confirmed with this sound.
2 Beeps for 4 times
When an error occurs. Check the sentence displayed on the screen. (l 78)
This makes it easier to view the LCD monitor in bright places including outdoors.
≥ These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.
≥ When the AC adaptor is in use, the LCD monitor is set to automatically.
≥ When the LCD monitor is bright, the recordable time with the battery will be shorter.
It adjusts brightness and colour density on the LCD monitor.
≥ These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.
1 Select [LCD SET] and press the ENTER button.
2 Select the item using 3/4, and press the ENTER button to set.
3 Press 2/1 to adjust, and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button to exit the menu screen.
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 60.
Please refer to page 59.
Set to [YES] for changing the menu settings back to the default condition.
(Only when the mode is at the position)
≥ Settings for [CLOCK SET] and [LANGUAGE] will not be changed.
[ALERT SOUND] / /[OFF]
(Volume low)/ (Volume high)
[POWER LCD] / / /
(Makes even brighter)/ (Makes brighter)/ (Normal)/ (Makes less bright)
[LCD SET]
[BRIGHTNESS]: Brightness of the LCD monitor
[COLOUR]: Colour level of the LCD monitor
[HDMI RESOLUTION] [AUTO]/[720p]/[576p]
[VIERA Link] [ON]/[OFF]
[TV ASPECT] [16:9]/[4:3]
[INITIAL SET]
+2 +1 0 -1
+2 +1 0 -1
+1
- 31 -
Starting and stopping of recording and unit on/off can be confirmed with this sound.
2 Beeps for 4 times
When an error occurs. Check the sentence displayed on the screen. (l 78)
This makes it easier to view the LCD monitor in bright places including outdoors.
≥ These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.
≥ When the AC adaptor is in use, the LCD monitor is set to automatically.
≥ When the LCD monitor is bright, the recordable time with the battery will be shorter.
It adjusts brightness and colour density on the LCD monitor.
≥ These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.
1 Select [LCD SET] and press the ENTER button.
2 Select the item using 3/4, and press the ENTER button to set.
3 Press 2/1 to adjust, and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button to exit the menu screen.
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 60.
Please refer to page 59.
Set to [YES] for changing the menu settings back to the default condition.
(Only when the mode is at the position)
≥ Settings for [CLOCK SET] and [LANGUAGE] will not be changed.
[ALERT SOUND] / /[OFF]
(Volume low)/ (Volume high)
[POWER LCD] / / /
(Makes even brighter)/ (Makes brighter)/ (Normal)/ (Makes less bright)
[LCD SET]
[BRIGHTNESS]: Brightness of the LCD monitor
[COLOUR]: Colour level of the LCD monitor
[HDMI RESOLUTION] [AUTO]/[720p]/[576p]
[VIERA Link] [ON]/[OFF]
[TV ASPECT] [16:9]/[4:3]
[INITIAL SET]
+2 +1 0 -1
+2 +1 0 -1
+1
- 31 -
Starting and stopping of recording and unit on/off can be confirmed with this sound.
2 Beeps for 4 times
When an error occurs. Check the sentence displayed on the screen. (l 78)
This makes it easier to view the LCD monitor in bright places including outdoors.
≥ These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.
≥ When the AC adaptor is in use, the LCD monitor is set to automatically.
≥ When the LCD monitor is bright, the recordable time with the battery will be shorter.
It adjusts brightness and colour density on the LCD monitor.
≥ These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.
1 Select [LCD SET] and press the ENTER button.
2 Select the item using 3/4, and press the ENTER button to set.
3 Press 2/1 to adjust, and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press the MENU button to exit the menu screen.
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 60.
Please refer to page 59.
Set to [YES] for changing the menu settings back to the default condition.
(Only when the mode is at the position)
≥ Settings for [CLOCK SET] and [LANGUAGE] will not be changed.
[ALERT SOUND] / /[OFF]
(Volume low)/ (Volume high)
[POWER LCD] / / /
(Makes even brighter)/ (Makes brighter)/ (Normal)/ (Makes less bright)
[LCD SET]
[BRIGHTNESS]: Brightness of the LCD monitor
[COLOUR]: Colour level of the LCD monitor
[HDMI RESOLUTION] [AUTO]/[720p]/[576p]
[VIERA Link] [ON]/[OFF]
[TV ASPECT] [16:9]/[4:3]
[INITIAL SET]
+2 +1 0 -1
+2 +1 0 -1
+1
When about 30 minutes have passed without any operation while connecting AC adaptor
with this unit, this unit automatically turns off.
≥ This unit will not automatically turn off even if the [ECONOMY (AC)] is set to [ON] in
following cases:
jUsing the USB cable for PC etc.
jPRE-REC is used
jDuring playback of the slide show
This unit is put into recording pause approx. 0.8 seconds after the LCD monitor is reopened.
≥ When in Quick Start Standby Mode about 60% of the power used in recording pause
mode is being consumed, so the recording time will be reduced.
≥ Quick Start will not work if there is no SD card inserted.
≥ The LCD monitor cannot be closed when using the USB cable, so please disconnect it
from the unit.
≥ Change the mode to .
1 Set [QUICK START] to [ON].
2 Close the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A flashes green and the unit
goes into Quick Start Standby Mode.
3 Open the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A lights red and the unit is put
into recording pause.
[ECONOMY (AC)] [ON]/[OFF]
[QUICK START] [ON]/[OFF]


- 31 -
d unit on/off can be confirmed with this sound.
tence displayed on the screen. (l 78)
monitor in bright places including outdoors.
ages actually recorded.
LCD monitor is set to automatically.
e recordable time with the battery will be shorter.
ty on the LCD monitor.
ages actually recorded.
he ENTER button.
nd press the ENTER button to set.
ess the ENTER button.
menu screen.
ettings back to the default condition.
position)
NGUAGE] will not be changed.
/ /[OFF]
h)
/ / /
kes brighter)/ (Normal)/ (Makes less bright)
ness of the LCD monitor
r level of the LCD monitor
UTO]/[720p]/[576p]
N]/[OFF]
6:9]/[4:3]
2 +1 0 -1
0 -1
+1
Page: 31
- 32 -
[FORMAT CARD]
(Formatiranje kartice)
Upamtite da se kod formatiranja medija svi podaci na mediju brišu i ne mogu se
vratiti. Napravite sigurnosnu kopiju važnih podataka na računalu, disku i dr. (→ 63)
●
●Kada je formatiranje dovršeno, pritisnite gumb MENU za izlazak iz poruke.
●
●Kada SD karticu namjeravate odložiti/predati nekom drugome, izvršite fizičko
formatiranje SD kartice. (→ 86)
●
●Za vrijeme formatiranja ne isključujte uređaj i ne vadite SD karticu. Uređaj nemojte
izlagati vibracijama ili udarcima.
[CARD STATUS] (Status kartice)
Iskorišteni prostor i preostalo vrijeme snimanja na SD kartici može se provjeriti.
●
●Kada je sklopka za prebacivanje načina rada postavljena na , prikazuje se
preostalo vrijeme snimanja za odabrani način snimanja.
●
●Pritisnite gumb MENU da biste isključili prikaz poruke.
●
●SD kartica koristi određeni kapacitet za spremanje informacija i za sustav za
upravljanje datotekama, tako da je stvarni iskoristivi kapacitet nešto manji od
naznačene vrijednosti. Iskoristivi kapacitet u pravilu se računa kao 1 GB =
1.000.000.000 bajtova. Kapaciteti ovog uređaja, računala i softvera izraženi su
kao 1 GB = 1.024 x 1.024 x 1.024 = 1.073.741.824 bajtova. Stoga se naznačeni
kapacitet čini manjim.
[DEMO MODE] (Prikaz funkcija) [ON] / [OFF] (uklj.)/(isklj.)
Ova se stavka koristi za pokretanje prikaza funkcija uređaja
(samo kada je način rada podešen na ).
Ako je [DEMO MODE] prebačen na [ON] (Uklj.) i pritisnete MENU dok SD kartica
nije umetnuta u uređaj, a uređaj je priključen na prilagodnik, prikaz funkcija pokrenut
će se automatski.
Ako se izvrši bilo koja radnja, prikaz funkcija se prekida. Međutim, ako se tijekom
5 minuta ne izvrši neka radnja, prikaz funkcija se automatski ponovo pokreće.
Za zaustavljanje prikaza funkcija uređaja, postavite [DEMO MODE] na [OFF] ili
umetnite SD karticu.
[O.I.S. DEMO] (Prikaz funkcija
optičkog stabilizatora slike)
Ova se funkcija koristi za početak prikaza funkcija optičkog stabilizatora slike (samo
kada je način rada podešen na ).
Odaberite [O.I.S. DEMO] i pritisnite gumb ENTER za automatsko pokretanje prikaza
funkcija. Pritiskom na gumb MENU prikaz funkcija se poništava.
[LANGUAGE] (Jezik)
Možete odabrati jezik koji će se koristiti na zaslonu i na zaslonskom izborniku.
Za formatiranje medija koristite ovaj uređaj.
Nemojte formatirati SD karticu pomoću drugih uređaja, poput računala.
Karticu možda neće biti moguće koristiti na ovom uređaju.
- 30 -
When about 30 minutes have passed without any operation while c
with this unit, this unit automatically turns off.
≥ This unit will not automatically turn off even if the [ECONOMY (A
following cases:
jUsing the USB cable for PC etc.
jPRE-REC is used
jDuring playback of the slide show
This unit is put into recording pause approx. 0.8 seconds after the L
≥ When in Quick Start Standby Mode about 60% of the power u
mode is being consumed, so the recording time will be redu
≥ Quick Start will not work if there is no SD card inserted.
≥ The LCD monitor cannot be closed when using the USB cable, s
from the unit.
≥ Change the mode to .
1 Set [QUICK START] to [ON].
2 Close the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A flashes green and the unit
goes into Quick Start Standby Mode.
3 Open the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A lights red and the unit is put
into recording pause.
≥ Quick Start Standby Mode is cancelled if
jabout 5 minutes have elapsed
jmode is set to
≥ It may take some time for Automatic White Balance to adjust.
≥ In the Quick Start Mode, the zoom magnification becomes appro
≥ When it has gone into Quick Start Standby Mode automatically w
(BATT)] (l 29)/[ECONOMY (AC)], close the LCD monitor once a
≥ Turn the unit off using the power button.
[ECONOMY (AC)] [ON]/[OFF]
[QUICK START] [ON]/[OFF]
When about 30 minutes have passed without any operation while connecting AC adaptor
with this unit, this unit automatically turns off.
≥ This unit will not automatically turn off even if the [ECONOMY (AC)] is set to [ON] in
following cases:
jUsing the USB cable for PC etc.
jPRE-REC is used
jDuring playback of the slide show
This unit is put into recording pause approx. 0.8 seconds after the LCD monitor is reopened.
≥ When in Quick Start Standby Mode about 60% of the power used in recording pause
mode is being consumed, so the recording time will be reduced.
≥ Quick Start will not work if there is no SD card inserted.
≥ The LCD monitor cannot be closed when using the USB cable, so please disconnect it
from the unit.
≥ Change the mode to .
1 Set [QUICK START] to [ON].
2 Close the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A flashes green and the unit
goes into Quick Start Standby Mode.
3 Open the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A lights red and the unit is put
into recording pause.
≥ Quick Start Standby Mode is cancelled if
jabout 5 minutes have elapsed
jmode is set to
≥ It may take some time for Automatic White Balance to adjust.
≥ In the Quick Start Mode, the zoom magnification becomes approx. 1k.
≥ When it has gone into Quick Start Standby Mode automatically with the [ECONOMY
(BATT)] (l 29)/[ECONOMY (AC)], close the LCD monitor once and open it again.
≥ Turn the unit off using the power button.
[ECONOMY (AC)] [ON]/[OFF]
[QUICK START] [ON]/[OFF]


When about 30 minutes have passed without any operation while connecting AC adaptor
with this unit, this unit automatically turns off.
≥ This unit will not automatically turn off even if the [ECONOMY (AC)] is set to [ON] in
following cases:
jUsing the USB cable for PC etc.
jPRE-REC is used
jDuring playback of the slide show
This unit is put into recording pause approx. 0.8 seconds after the LCD monitor is reopened.
≥ When in Quick Start Standby Mode about 60% of the power used in recording pause
mode is being consumed, so the recording time will be reduced.
≥ Quick Start will not work if there is no SD card inserted.
≥ The LCD monitor cannot be closed when using the USB cable, so please disconnect it
from the unit.
≥ Change the mode to .
1 Set [QUICK START] to [ON].
2 Close the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A flashes green and the unit
goes into Quick Start Standby Mode.
3 Open the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A lights red and the unit is put
into recording pause.
[ECONOMY (AC)] [ON]/[OFF]
[QUICK START] [ON]/[OFF]


Page: 32
- 33 -
¬ Change the mode to .
A Zoom bar
≥ The zoom speed varies depending on the range over which the zoom lever is moved.
≥ Maximum zoom magnification can be set with [D.ZOOM]. (l 40)
∫ About Zoom bar
The zoom bar is displayed during the zoom operation.
≥ If you take your finger off the zoom lever during zoom operation, the operation sound may
be recorded. When returning the zoom lever to the original position, move it quietly.
≥ When the zoom magnification is 70k, the subjects are focused at about 1.5 m or more.
≥ When the zoom magnification is 1k, this unit can focus on a subject approx. 2 cm away
from the lens.
Advanced (Recording)
Using the Zoom
Zoom lever
T side:
Close-up recording (zoom in)
W side:
Wide-angle recording (zoom out)
6 W
T
6 W
T

ヸ ヵ
ヷヰロ
T
W
 
B Optical Zoom
C Digital zoom (Blue)
- 33 -
¬ Change the mode to .
A Zoom bar
≥ The zoom speed varies depending on the range over which the zoom lever is moved.
≥ Maximum zoom magnification can be set with [D.ZOOM]. (l 40)
∫ About Zoom bar
The zoom bar is displayed during the zoom operation.
≥ If you take your finger off the zoom lever during zoom operation, the operation sound may
be recorded. When returning the zoom lever to the original position, move it quietly.
≥ When the zoom magnification is 70k, the subjects are focused at about 1.5 m or more.
≥ When the zoom magnification is 1k, this unit can focus on a subject approx. 2 cm away
from the lens.
Advanced (Recording)
Using the Zoom
Zoom lever
T side:
Close-up recording (zoom in)
W side:
Wide-angle recording (zoom out)
6 W
T
6 W
T

ヸ ヵ
ヷヰロ
T
W
 
B Optical Zoom
C Digital zoom (Blue)
- 33 -
¬ Change the mode to .
A Zoom bar
≥ The zoom speed varies depending on the range over which the zoom lever is moved.
≥ Maximum zoom magnification can be set with [D.ZOOM]. (l 40)
∫ About Zoom bar
The zoom bar is displayed during the zoom operation.
≥ If you take your finger off the zoom lever during zoom operation, the operation sound may
be recorded. When returning the zoom lever to the original position, move it quietly.
≥ When the zoom magnification is 70k, the subjects are focused at about 1.5 m or more.
≥ When the zoom magnification is 1k, this unit can focus on a subject approx. 2 cm away
from the lens.
Advanced (Recording)
Using the Zoom
Zoom lever
T side:
Close-up recording (zoom in)
W side:
Wide-angle recording (zoom out)
6 W
T
6 W
T

ヸ ヵ
ヷヰロ
T
W
 
B Optical Zoom
C Digital zoom (Blue)
- 33 -
¬ Change the mode to .
A Zoom bar
≥ The zoom speed varies depending on the range over which the zoom lever is moved.
≥ Maximum zoom magnification can be set with [D.ZOOM]. (l 40)
∫ About Zoom bar
The zoom bar is displayed during the zoom operation.
≥ If you take your finger off the zoom lever during zoom operation, the operation sound may
be recorded. When returning the zoom lever to the original position, move it quietly.
≥ When the zoom magnification is 70k, the subjects are focused at about 1.5 m or more.
≥ When the zoom magnification is 1k, this unit can focus on a subject approx. 2 cm away
from the lens.
Advanced (Recording)
Using the Zoom
Zoom lever
T side:
Close-up recording (zoom in)
W side:
Wide-angle recording (zoom out)
6 W
T
6 W
T

ヸ ヵ
ヷヰロ
T
W
 
B Optical Zoom
C Digital zoom (Blue)
- 33 -
◊ Promijenite način rada na .
Traka zuma
●
●Brzina zumiranja razlikuje se ovisno o rasponu pomicanja ručice zuma.
●
●Maksimalno uvećanje zumiranja može se podesiti pomoću opcije [D.ZOOM]. (→ 40)
■
■ Traka zuma
Traka zuma prikazuje se za vrijeme rada zuma.
Optički zum
Digitalni zum (plavo)
●
●Ako tijekom zumiranja uklonite prst s ručice zuma, može doći do snimanja zvukova
rukovanja zumom. Kada ručicu zuma vraćate u u izvorni položaj, pomičite je polako.
●
●Kada uvećanje zuma iznosi 70x, objekti snimanja fokusirani su na približno 1,5 m ili
više.
●
●Kada uvećanje zuma iznosi 1x, uređaj se može fokusirati na objekt udaljen oko 2 cm
od objektiva.
Napredne funkcije (Snimanje)
Korištenje zuma
- 30 -
jDuring playback of the slide show
This unit is put into recording pause approx. 0.8 seconds after the LCD monitor is reopened.
≥ When in Quick Start Standby Mode about 60% of the power used in recording pause
mode is being consumed, so the recording time will be reduced.
≥ Quick Start will not work if there is no SD card inserted.
≥ The LCD monitor cannot be closed when using the USB cable, so please disconnect it
from the unit.
≥ Change the mode to .
1 Set [QUICK START] to [ON].
2 Close the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A flashes green and the unit
goes into Quick Start Standby Mode.
3 Open the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A lights red and the unit is put
into recording pause.
≥ Quick Start Standby Mode is cancelled if
jabout 5 minutes have elapsed
jmode is set to
≥ It may take some time for Automatic White Balance to adjust.
≥ In the Quick Start Mode, the zoom magnification becomes approx. 1k.
≥ When it has gone into Quick Start Standby Mode automatically with the [ECONOMY
(BATT)] (l 29)/[ECONOMY (AC)], close the LCD monitor once and open it again.
≥ Turn the unit off using the power button.
[QUICK START] [ON]/[OFF]


Ručica zuma
Strana T:
Snimanje izbliza (približavanje)
Strana W:
Širokokutno snimanje (udaljavanje)
Page: 33
- 34 -
Optical image stabilizer can stabilize the image without decreasing the image quality as
much.
¬ Change the mode to .
≥ Stabilization may not be possible under strong shaking conditions.
Advanced (Recording)
Optical image stabilizer function
Optical image stabilizer button
Press the button to turn optical image stabilizer on/off.
(On) # setting cancelled
≥ When you wish to record as you walk, we recommend
turnning the optical image stabilizer on.
≥ When recording with a tripod, we recommend that you set
the optical image stabilizer off.
ヰハリハヴハ
- 34 -
Optical image stabilizer can stabilize the image without decreasing the image quality as
much.
¬ Change the mode to .
≥ Stabilization may not be possible under strong shaking conditions.
Advanced (Recording)
Optical image stabilizer function
Optical image stabilizer button
Press the button to turn optical image stabilizer on/off.
(On) # setting cancelled
≥ When you wish to record as you walk, we recommend
turnning the optical image stabilizer on.
≥ When recording with a tripod, we recommend that you set
the optical image stabilizer off.
ヰハリハヴハ
- 34 -
Optički stabilizator slike može stabilizirati sliku bez značajnog smanjenja njezine
kvalitete.
◊ Promijenite način rada na .
●
●Stabilizacija možda neće biti moguća ako se uređaj jako trese.
Gumb optičkog stabilizatora slike
Pritisnite gumb za uključenje/isključenje optičkog
stabilizatora slike.
(uključeno) → odustajanje od podešavanja
●
●Ako želite snimati dok se krećete, preporučujemo da
uključite funkciju optičkog stabilizatora slike.
●
●Ako snimate pomoću tronošca, preporučujemo da
funkciju optičkog stabilizatora isključite.
Napredne funkcije (Snimanje)
Funkcija optičkog stabilizatora slike
- 30 -
jUsing the USB cable for PC etc.
jPRE-REC is used
jDuring playback of the slide show
This unit is put into recording pause approx. 0.8 seconds after the LCD monitor is reopened.
≥ When in Quick Start Standby Mode about 60% of the power used in recording pause
mode is being consumed, so the recording time will be reduced.
≥ Quick Start will not work if there is no SD card inserted.
≥ The LCD monitor cannot be closed when using the USB cable, so please disconnect it
from the unit.
≥ Change the mode to .
1 Set [QUICK START] to [ON].
2 Close the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A flashes green and the unit
goes into Quick Start Standby Mode.
3 Open the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A lights red and the unit is put
into recording pause.
≥ Quick Start Standby Mode is cancelled if
jabout 5 minutes have elapsed
jmode is set to
≥ It may take some time for Automatic White Balance to adjust.
≥ In the Quick Start Mode, the zoom magnification becomes approx. 1k.
≥ When it has gone into Quick Start Standby Mode automatically with the [ECONOMY
(BATT)] (l 29)/[ECONOMY (AC)], close the LCD monitor once and open it again.
≥ Turn the unit off using the power button.
[QUICK START] [ON]/[OFF]


- 34 -
Optical image stabilizer can stabilize the image without decreasing the image quality as
much.
¬ Change the mode to .
≥ Stabilization may not be possible under strong shaking conditions.
Advanced (Recording)
Optical image stabilizer function
Optical image stabilizer button
Press the button to turn optical image stabilizer on/off.
(On) # setting cancelled
≥ When you wish to record as you walk, we recommend
turnning the optical image stabilizer on.
≥ When recording with a tripod, we recommend that you set
the optical image stabilizer off.
ヰハリハヴハ
Page: 34
- 35 -
Select the operation icons to add different effects to the images to be recorded.
¬ Change the mode to .
1 Press the ENTER button to
display the operation icons on
the screen.
≥ The indication changes each time you
press 4 of the cursor button.
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-
display the operation icon.
2 (e.g. Backlight Compensation)
Select an operation icon.
≥ Select the operation icon again to cancel
the function.
≥ Refer to the respective pages for
cancelling the following functions.
jHelp Mode (l 36)
jGuidelines (l 36)
Operation icons
*1 It is not displayed during recording.
*2 It is not displayed in the Intelligent Auto
Mode.
≥ If you turn off the unit or change the mode
to , Backlight Compensation,
PRE-REC and Colour Night View
functions are cancelled.
≥ If you turn off the unit, the Fade function is
cancelled.
≥ It is possible to set from the menu.
(Except for the Help Mode and PRE-REC)
Advanced (Recording)
Recording functions of operation icons
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
Fade
Backlight Compensation
Help Mode*1
Guidelines
PRE-REC*1
Soft Skin Mode*1,2
Intelligent Contrast Control*2
Colour Night View*1,2
- 35 -
Select the operation icons to add different effects to the images to be recorded.
¬ Change the mode to .
1 Press the ENTER button to
display the operation icons on
the screen.
≥ The indication changes each time you
press 4 of the cursor button.
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-
display the operation icon.
2 (e.g. Backlight Compensation)
Select an operation icon.
≥ Select the operation icon again to cancel
the function.
≥ Refer to the respective pages for
cancelling the following functions.
jHelp Mode (l 36)
jGuidelines (l 36)
Operation icons
*1 It is not displayed during recording.
*2 It is not displayed in the Intelligent Auto
Mode.
≥ If you turn off the unit or change the mode
to , Backlight Compensation,
PRE-REC and Colour Night View
functions are cancelled.
≥ If you turn off the unit, the Fade function is
cancelled.
≥ It is possible to set from the menu.
(Except for the Help Mode and PRE-REC)
Advanced (Recording)
Recording functions of operation icons
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
Fade
Backlight Compensation
Help Mode*1
Guidelines
PRE-REC*1
Soft Skin Mode*1,2
Intelligent Contrast Control*2
Colour Night View*1,2
- 35 -
Select the operation icons to add different effects to the images to be recorded.
¬ Change the mode to .
1 Press the ENTER button to
display the operation icons on
the screen.
≥ The indication changes each time you
press 4 of the cursor button.
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-
display the operation icon.
2 (e.g. Backlight Compensation)
Select an operation icon.
≥ Select the operation icon again to cancel
the function.
≥ Refer to the respective pages for
cancelling the following functions.
jHelp Mode (l 36)
jGuidelines (l 36)
Operation icons
*1 It is not displayed during recording.
*2 It is not displayed in the Intelligent Auto
Mode.
≥ If you turn off the unit or change the mode
to , Backlight Compensation,
PRE-REC and Colour Night View
functions are cancelled.
≥ If you turn off the unit, the Fade function is
cancelled.
≥ It is possible to set from the menu.
(Except for the Help Mode and PRE-REC)
Advanced (Recording)
Recording functions of operation icons
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
Fade
Backlight Compensation
Help Mode*1
Guidelines
PRE-REC*1
Soft Skin Mode*1,2
Intelligent Contrast Control*2
Colour Night View*1,2
- 35 -
Select the operation icons to add different effects to the images to be recorded.
¬ Change the mode to .
1 Press the ENTER button to
display the operation icons on
the screen.
≥ The indication changes each time you
press 4 of the cursor button.
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-
display the operation icon.
2 (e.g. Backlight Compensation)
Select an operation icon.
≥ Select the operation icon again to cancel
the function.
≥ Refer to the respective pages for
cancelling the following functions.
jHelp Mode (l 36)
jGuidelines (l 36)
Operation icons
*1 It is not displayed during recording.
*2 It is not displayed in the Intelligent Auto
Mode.
≥ If you turn off the unit or change the mode
to , Backlight Compensation,
PRE-REC and Colour Night View
functions are cancelled.
≥ If you turn off the unit, the Fade function is
cancelled.
≥ It is possible to set from the menu.
(Except for the Help Mode and PRE-REC)
Advanced (Recording)
Recording functions of operation icons
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
Fade
Backlight Compensation
Help Mode*1
Guidelines
PRE-REC*1
Soft Skin Mode*1,2
Intelligent Contrast Control*2
Colour Night View*1,2
- 35 -
Odaberite funkcijske ikone za dodavanje različitih efekata slikama koje želite snimiti.
◊ Promijenite način rada na .
1 Pritisnite gumb ENTER za
prikaz funkcijskih ikona na
zaslonu.
●
●Prikaz se mijenja svaki puta kada
pritisnete ▼ na kursorskom gumbu.
●
●Pritisnite gumb ENTER za uključenje/
isključenje prikaza funkcijske ikone.
Funkcijske ikone
Funkcija Fade (Pojavljivanje i nestajanje slike)
Kompenzacija pozadinskog osvjetljenja
Pomoć*1
Linije usmjerenosti kompozicije
PRE-REC*1
Blagi oblik*1,2
Inteligentna kontrola kontrasta*2
Noćno snimanje u boji*1,2
*1 Ne prikazuje se tijekom snimanja.
*2 Ne prikazuje se u inteligentnom automatskom načinu rada.
●
●Ako isključite uređaj ili način rada promijenite na , funkcije kompenzacija
pozadinskog osvjetljenja, PRE-REC i noćno snimanje u boji poništavaju se.
●
●Ako isključite uređaj, funkcija pojavljivanja i nestajanja slike je poništena.
●
●Postavljanje je moguće i iz izbornika (osim za načine rada Pomoć i PRE-REC).
●
●Ponovo odaberite funkcijsku ikonu da
biste poništili funkciju.
●
●Detalje o poništavanju sljedećih funkcija
potražite na odgovarajućim stranicama.
-
- Pomoć (→ 36)
-
- Smjernice (→ 36)
2 (npr.kompenzacija pozadinskog
osvjetljenja)
Odaberite funkcijsku ikonu.
Napredne funkcije (Snimanje)
Funkcije snimanja funkcijskih ikona
- 35 -
Select the operation icons to add different effects to the images to be recorded.
¬ Change the mode to .
1 Press the ENTER button to
display the operation icons on
the screen.
≥ The indication changes each time you
press 4 of the cursor button.
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-
display the operation icon.
2 (e.g. Backlight Compensation)
Select an operation icon.
≥ Select the operation icon again to cancel
the function.
≥ Refer to the respective pages for
cancelling the following functions.
jHelp Mode (l 36)
jGuidelines (l 36)
Operation icons
*1 It is not displayed during recording.
*2 It is not displayed in the Intelligent Auto
Mode.
≥ If you turn off the unit or change the mode
to , Backlight Compensation,
PRE-REC and Colour Night View
functions are cancelled.
≥ If you turn off the unit, the Fade function is
cancelled.
≥ It is possible to set from the menu.
(Except for the Help Mode and PRE-REC)
Advanced (Recording)
Recording functions of operation icons
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
Fade
Backlight Compensation
Help Mode*1
Guidelines
PRE-REC*1
Soft Skin Mode*1,2
Intelligent Contrast Control*2
Colour Night View*1,2
- 35 -
Select the operation icons to add different effects to the images to be recorded.
¬ Change the mode to .
1 Press the ENTER button to
display the operation icons on
the screen.
≥ The indication changes each time you
press 4 of the cursor button.
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-
display the operation icon.
2 (e.g. Backlight Compensation)
Select an operation icon.
≥ Select the operation icon again to cancel
the function.
≥ Refer to the respective pages for
cancelling the following functions.
jHelp Mode (l 36)
jGuidelines (l 36)
Operation icons
*1 It is not displayed during recording.
*2 It is not displayed in the Intelligent Auto
Mode.
≥ If you turn off the unit or change the mode
to , Backlight Compensation,
PRE-REC and Colour Night View
functions are cancelled.
≥ If you turn off the unit, the Fade function is
cancelled.
≥ It is possible to set from the menu.
(Except for the Help Mode and PRE-REC)
Advanced (Recording)
Recording functions of operation icons
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
Fade
Backlight Compensation
Help Mode*1
Guidelines
PRE-REC*1
Soft Skin Mode*1,2
Intelligent Contrast Control*2
Colour Night View*1,2
- 35 -
Select the operation icons to add different effects to the images to be recorded.
¬ Change the mode to .
1 Press the ENTER button to
display the operation icons on
the screen.
≥ The indication changes each time you
press 4 of the cursor button.
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-
display the operation icon.
2 (e.g. Backlight Compensation)
Select an operation icon.
≥ Select the operation icon again to cancel
the function.
≥ Refer to the respective pages for
cancelling the following functions.
jHelp Mode (l 36)
jGuidelines (l 36)
Operation icons
*1 It is not displayed during recording.
*2 It is not displayed in the Intelligent Auto
Mode.
≥ If you turn off the unit or change the mode
to , Backlight Compensation,
PRE-REC and Colour Night View
functions are cancelled.
≥ If you turn off the unit, the Fade function is
cancelled.
≥ It is possible to set from the menu.
(Except for the Help Mode and PRE-REC)
Advanced (Recording)
Recording functions of operation icons
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
Fade
Backlight Compensation
Help Mode*1
Guidelines
PRE-REC*1
Soft Skin Mode*1,2
Intelligent Contrast Control*2
Colour Night View*1,2
- 35 -
Select the operation icons to add different effects to the images to be recorded.
¬ Change the mode to .
1 Press the ENTER button to
display the operation icons on
the screen.
≥ The indication changes each time you
press 4 of the cursor button.
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-
display the operation icon.
2 (e.g. Backlight Compensation)
Select an operation icon.
≥ Select the operation icon again to cancel
the function.
≥ Refer to the respective pages for
cancelling the following functions.
jHelp Mode (l 36)
jGuidelines (l 36)
Operation icons
*1 It is not displayed during recording.
*2 It is not displayed in the Intelligent Auto
Mode.
≥ If you turn off the unit or change the mode
to , Backlight Compensation,
PRE-REC and Colour Night View
functions are cancelled.
≥ If you turn off the unit, the Fade function is
cancelled.
≥ It is possible to set from the menu.
(Except for the Help Mode and PRE-REC)
Advanced (Recording)
Recording functions of operation icons
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
Fade
Backlight Compensation
Help Mode*1
Guidelines
PRE-REC*1
Soft Skin Mode*1,2
Intelligent Contrast Control*2
Colour Night View*1,2
- 35 -
Select the operation icons to add different effects to the images to be recorded.
¬ Change the mode to .
1 Press the ENTER button to
display the operation icons on
the screen.
≥ The indication changes each time you
press 4 of the cursor button.
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-
display the operation icon.
2 (e.g. Backlight Compensation)
Select an operation icon.
≥ Select the operation icon again to cancel
the function.
≥ Refer to the respective pages for
cancelling the following functions.
jHelp Mode (l 36)
jGuidelines (l 36)
Operation icons
*1 It is not displayed during recording.
*2 It is not displayed in the Intelligent Auto
Mode.
≥ If you turn off the unit or change the mode
to , Backlight Compensation,
PRE-REC and Colour Night View
functions are cancelled.
≥ If you turn off the unit, the Fade function is
cancelled.
≥ It is possible to set from the menu.
(Except for the Help Mode and PRE-REC)
Advanced (Recording)
Recording functions of operation icons
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
Fade
Backlight Compensation
Help Mode*1
Guidelines
PRE-REC*1
Soft Skin Mode*1,2
Intelligent Contrast Control*2
Colour Night View*1,2
- 35 -
Select the operation icons to add different effects to the images to be recorded.
¬ Change the mode to .
1 Press the ENTER button to
display the operation icons on
the screen.
≥ The indication changes each time you
press 4 of the cursor button.
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-
display the operation icon.
2 (e.g. Backlight Compensation)
Select an operation icon.
≥ Select the operation icon again to cancel
the function.
≥ Refer to the respective pages for
cancelling the following functions.
jHelp Mode (l 36)
jGuidelines (l 36)
Operation icons
*1 It is not displayed during recording.
*2 It is not displayed in the Intelligent Auto
Mode.
≥ If you turn off the unit or change the mode
to , Backlight Compensation,
PRE-REC and Colour Night View
functions are cancelled.
≥ If you turn off the unit, the Fade function is
cancelled.
≥ It is possible to set from the menu.
(Except for the Help Mode and PRE-REC)
Advanced (Recording)
Recording functions of operation icons
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
Fade
Backlight Compensation
Help Mode*1
Guidelines
PRE-REC*1
Soft Skin Mode*1,2
Intelligent Contrast Control*2
Colour Night View*1,2
- 35 -
Select the operation icons to add different effects to the images to be recorded.
¬ Change the mode to .
1 Press the ENTER button to
display the operation icons on
the screen.
≥ The indication changes each time you
press 4 of the cursor button.
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-
display the operation icon.
2 (e.g. Backlight Compensation)
Select an operation icon.
≥ Select the operation icon again to cancel
the function.
≥ Refer to the respective pages for
cancelling the following functions.
jHelp Mode (l 36)
jGuidelines (l 36)
Operation icons
*1 It is not displayed during recording.
*2 It is not displayed in the Intelligent Auto
Mode.
≥ If you turn off the unit or change the mode
to , Backlight Compensation,
PRE-REC and Colour Night View
functions are cancelled.
≥ If you turn off the unit, the Fade function is
cancelled.
≥ It is possible to set from the menu.
(Except for the Help Mode and PRE-REC)
Advanced (Recording)
Recording functions of operation icons
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
Fade
Backlight Compensation
Help Mode*1
Guidelines
PRE-REC*1
Soft Skin Mode*1,2
Intelligent Contrast Control*2
Colour Night View*1,2
- 35 -
Select the operation icons to add different effects to the images to be recorded.
¬ Change the mode to .
1 Press the ENTER button to
display the operation icons on
the screen.
≥ The indication changes each time you
press 4 of the cursor button.
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-
display the operation icon.
2 (e.g. Backlight Compensation)
Select an operation icon.
≥ Select the operation icon again to cancel
the function.
≥ Refer to the respective pages for
cancelling the following functions.
jHelp Mode (l 36)
jGuidelines (l 36)
Operation icons
*1 It is not displayed during recording.
*2 It is not displayed in the Intelligent Auto
Mode.
≥ If you turn off the unit or change the mode
to , Backlight Compensation,
PRE-REC and Colour Night View
functions are cancelled.
≥ If you turn off the unit, the Fade function is
cancelled.
≥ It is possible to set from the menu.
(Except for the Help Mode and PRE-REC)
Advanced (Recording)
Recording functions of operation icons
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
1/2 ワユヹヵ
Fade
Backlight Compensation
Help Mode*1
Guidelines
PRE-REC*1
Soft Skin Mode*1,2
Intelligent Contrast Control*2
Colour Night View*1,2
- 30 -
jPRE-REC is used
jDuring playback of the slide show
This unit is put into recording pause approx. 0.8 seconds after the LCD monitor is reopened.
≥ When in Quick Start Standby Mode about 60% of the power used in recording pause
mode is being consumed, so the recording time will be reduced.
≥ Quick Start will not work if there is no SD card inserted.
≥ The LCD monitor cannot be closed when using the USB cable, so please disconnect it
from the unit.
≥ Change the mode to .
1 Set [QUICK START] to [ON].
2 Close the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A flashes green and the unit
goes into Quick Start Standby Mode.
3 Open the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A lights red and the unit is put
into recording pause.
≥ Quick Start Standby Mode is cancelled if
jabout 5 minutes have elapsed
jmode is set to
≥ It may take some time for Automatic White Balance to adjust.
≥ In the Quick Start Mode, the zoom magnification becomes approx. 1k.
≥ When it has gone into Quick Start Standby Mode automatically with the [ECONOMY
(BATT)] (l 29)/[ECONOMY (AC)], close the LCD monitor once and open it again.
≥ Turn the unit off using the power button.
[QUICK START] [ON]/[OFF]


When about 30 minutes have passed without any operation while connectin
with this unit, this unit automatically turns off.
≥ This unit will not automatically turn off even if the [ECONOMY (AC)] is se
following cases:
jUsing the USB cable for PC etc.
jPRE-REC is used
jDuring playback of the slide show
This unit is put into recording pause approx. 0.8 seconds after the LCD mon
≥ When in Quick Start Standby Mode about 60% of the power used in r
mode is being consumed, so the recording time will be reduced.
≥ Quick Start will not work if there is no SD card inserted.
≥ The LCD monitor cannot be closed when using the USB cable, so please
from the unit.
≥ Change the mode to .
1 Set [QUICK START] to [ON].
2 Close the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A flashes green and the unit
goes into Quick Start Standby Mode.
3 Open the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A lights red and the unit is put
into recording pause.
≥ Quick Start Standby Mode is cancelled if
jabout 5 minutes have elapsed
jmode is set to
≥ It may take some time for Automatic White Balance to adjust.
≥ In the Quick Start Mode, the zoom magnification becomes approx. 1k.
≥ When it has gone into Quick Start Standby Mode automatically with the [E
(BATT)] (l 29)/[ECONOMY (AC)], close the LCD monitor once and open
≥ Turn the unit off using the power button.
[ECONOMY (AC)] [ON]/[OFF]
[QUICK START] [ON]/[OFF]
Page: 35
- 36 -
When you start recording, the image/audio gradually
appears. (Fade in)
When you pause recording, the image/audio gradually
disappears. (Fade out)
≥ The Fade setting is cancelled when the recording stops.
∫ To select the colour for Fade in/out
≥ The thumbnails of scenes recorded using fade in become black (or white).
≥ If the recordable time runs out when you start recording, the recording fades out and stops
automatically.
This makes the image brighter to prevent darkening of a backlit subject.
Select the desired icon using the cursor
button to display an explanation on the
screen.
To exit the Help Mode
Press the MENU button or select [END].
≥ You cannot record or set functions while in Help Mode.
You can check if the image is level while recording. The function can also be used to
estimate the balance of the composition.
It will switch every time the icon is selected.
# # #Setting cancelled
≥ The guidelines do not appear on the images actually recorded.
Fade
:
[RECORD SETUP] # [FADE COLOUR] #
[WHITE] or [BLACK]
Backlight Compensation
Help Mode
Guidelines
(Fade in)
(Fade out)
- 36 -
When you start recording, the image/audio gradually
appears. (Fade in)
When you pause recording, the image/audio gradually
disappears. (Fade out)
≥ The Fade setting is cancelled when the recording stops.
∫ To select the colour for Fade in/out
≥ The thumbnails of scenes recorded using fade in become black (or white).
≥ If the recordable time runs out when you start recording, the recording fades out and stops
automatically.
This makes the image brighter to prevent darkening of a backlit subject.
Select the desired icon using the cursor
button to display an explanation on the
screen.
To exit the Help Mode
Press the MENU button or select [END].
≥ You cannot record or set functions while in Help Mode.
You can check if the image is level while recording. The function can also be used to
estimate the balance of the composition.
It will switch every time the icon is selected.
# # #Setting cancelled
≥ The guidelines do not appear on the images actually recorded.
Fade
:
[RECORD SETUP] # [FADE COLOUR] #
[WHITE] or [BLACK]
Backlight Compensation
Help Mode
Guidelines
(Fade in)
(Fade out)
- 36 -
When you start recording, the image/audio gradually
appears. (Fade in)
When you pause recording, the image/audio gradually
disappears. (Fade out)
≥ The Fade setting is cancelled when the recording stops.
∫ To select the colour for Fade in/out
≥ The thumbnails of scenes recorded using fade in become black (or white).
≥ If the recordable time runs out when you start recording, the recording fades out and stops
automatically.
This makes the image brighter to prevent darkening of a backlit subject.
Select the desired icon using the cursor
button to display an explanation on the
screen.
To exit the Help Mode
Press the MENU button or select [END].
≥ You cannot record or set functions while in Help Mode.
You can check if the image is level while recording. The function can also be used to
estimate the balance of the composition.
It will switch every time the icon is selected.
# # #Setting cancelled
≥ The guidelines do not appear on the images actually recorded.
Fade
:
[RECORD SETUP] # [FADE COLOUR] #
[WHITE] or [BLACK]
Backlight Compensation
Help Mode
Guidelines
(Fade in)
(Fade out)
- 36 -
When you start recording, the image/audio gradually
appears. (Fade in)
When you pause recording, the image/audio gradually
disappears. (Fade out)
≥ The Fade setting is cancelled when the recording stops.
∫ To select the colour for Fade in/out
≥ The thumbnails of scenes recorded using fade in become black (or white).
≥ If the recordable time runs out when you start recording, the recording fades out and stops
automatically.
This makes the image brighter to prevent darkening of a backlit subject.
Select the desired icon using the cursor
button to display an explanation on the
screen.
To exit the Help Mode
Press the MENU button or select [END].
≥ You cannot record or set functions while in Help Mode.
You can check if the image is level while recording. The function can also be used to
estimate the balance of the composition.
It will switch every time the icon is selected.
# # #Setting cancelled
≥ The guidelines do not appear on the images actually recorded.
Fade
:
[RECORD SETUP] # [FADE COLOUR] #
[WHITE] or [BLACK]
Backlight Compensation
Help Mode
Guidelines
(Fade in)
(Fade out)
- 36 -
When you start recording, the image/audio gradually
appears. (Fade in)
When you pause recording, the image/audio gradually
disappears. (Fade out)
≥ The Fade setting is cancelled when the recording stops.
∫ To select the colour for Fade in/out
≥ The thumbnails of scenes recorded using fade in become black (or white).
≥ If the recordable time runs out when you start recording, the recording fades out and stops
automatically.
This makes the image brighter to prevent darkening of a backlit subject.
Select the desired icon using the cursor
button to display an explanation on the
screen.
To exit the Help Mode
Press the MENU button or select [END].
≥ You cannot record or set functions while in Help Mode.
You can check if the image is level while recording. The function can also be used to
estimate the balance of the composition.
It will switch every time the icon is selected.
# # #Setting cancelled
≥ The guidelines do not appear on the images actually recorded.
Fade
:
[RECORD SETUP] # [FADE COLOUR] #
[WHITE] or [BLACK]
Backlight Compensation
Help Mode
Guidelines
(Fade in)
(Fade out)
- 36 -
When you start recording, the image/audio gradually
appears. (Fade in)
When you pause recording, the image/audio gradually
disappears. (Fade out)
≥ The Fade setting is cancelled when the recording stops.
∫ To select the colour for Fade in/out
≥ The thumbnails of scenes recorded using fade in become black (or white).
≥ If the recordable time runs out when you start recording, the recording fades out and stops
automatically.
This makes the image brighter to prevent darkening of a backlit subject.
Select the desired icon using the cursor
button to display an explanation on the
screen.
To exit the Help Mode
Press the MENU button or select [END].
≥ You cannot record or set functions while in Help Mode.
You can check if the image is level while recording. The function can also be used to
estimate the balance of the composition.
It will switch every time the icon is selected.
# # #Setting cancelled
≥ The guidelines do not appear on the images actually recorded.
Fade
:
[RECORD SETUP] # [FADE COLOUR] #
[WHITE] or [BLACK]
Backlight Compensation
Help Mode
Guidelines
(Fade in)
(Fade out)
- 36 -
When you start recording, the image/audio gradually
appears. (Fade in)
When you pause recording, the image/audio gradually
disappears. (Fade out)
≥ The Fade setting is cancelled when the recording stops.
∫ To select the colour for Fade in/out
≥ The thumbnails of scenes recorded using fade in become black (or white).
≥ If the recordable time runs out when you start recording, the recording fades out and stops
automatically.
This makes the image brighter to prevent darkening of a backlit subject.
Select the desired icon using the cursor
button to display an explanation on the
screen.
To exit the Help Mode
Press the MENU button or select [END].
≥ You cannot record or set functions while in Help Mode.
You can check if the image is level while recording. The function can also be used to
estimate the balance of the composition.
It will switch every time the icon is selected.
# # #Setting cancelled
≥ The guidelines do not appear on the images actually recorded.
Fade
:
[RECORD SETUP] # [FADE COLOUR] #
[WHITE] or [BLACK]
Backlight Compensation
Help Mode
Guidelines
(Fade in)
(Fade out)
- 36 -
When you start recording, the image/audio gradually
appears. (Fade in)
When you pause recording, the image/audio gradually
disappears. (Fade out)
≥ The Fade setting is cancelled when the recording stops.
∫ To select the colour for Fade in/out
≥ The thumbnails of scenes recorded using fade in become black (or white).
≥ If the recordable time runs out when you start recording, the recording fades out and stops
automatically.
This makes the image brighter to prevent darkening of a backlit subject.
Select the desired icon using the cursor
button to display an explanation on the
screen.
To exit the Help Mode
Press the MENU button or select [END].
≥ You cannot record or set functions while in Help Mode.
You can check if the image is level while recording. The function can also be used to
estimate the balance of the composition.
It will switch every time the icon is selected.
# # #Setting cancelled
≥ The guidelines do not appear on the images actually recorded.
Fade
:
[RECORD SETUP] # [FADE COLOUR] #
[WHITE] or [BLACK]
Backlight Compensation
Help Mode
Guidelines
(Fade in)
(Fade out)
- 36 -
Kada započnete sa snimanjem, slika/zvuk se
postepeno pojavljuju. (Efekt Fade in)
Kada pauzirate snimanje, slika/zvuk postepeno
nestaju. (Efekt Fade out)
●
●Postavka funkcije fade prekida se kada se snimanje
zaustavi.
■
■ Odabir boje kod pojavljivanja/nestajanja slike
[RECORD SETUP] (Postavke snimanja) →
[FADE COLOUR] (Pojavljivanje/nestajanje
boje) → [WHITE] (Bijela) ili [BLACK] (Crna)
(Efekt Fade out)
(Efekt Fade in)
●
●Minijature scena snimljenih pomoću efekta fade in postaju crne (ili bijele).
●
●Ako raspoloživo vrijeme snimanja istekne kada počnete snimati, snimka nestaje i
automatski se zaustavlja.
Ova funkcija čini sliku svjetlijom kako bi se spriječilo zatamnjenje objekta s
pozadinskim osvjetljenjem.
Za prikaz objašnjenja na zaslonu, odaberite
željenu ikonu pomoću kursorskog gumba.
Izlaz iz načina za pomoć
Pritisnite gumb MENU ili odaberite [END] (Kraj).
●
●Tijekom prikaza pomoćnih informacija snimanje ili podešavanje opcija nije dostupno.
Tijekom snimanja možete provjeriti je li slika pod nagibom. Funkcija se može
koristiti i za ocjenu ravnoteže kompozicije.
Promijeniti će se svaki puta kad odaberete ikonu.
Postavka je poništena
●
●Linije usmjerenosti kompozicije ne pojavljuju se na stvarnim fotografijama.
Funkcija Fade (Pojavljivanje i nestajanje slike)
Kompenzacija pozadinskog osvjetljenja
Pomoć
Linije usmjerenosti kompozicije
Page: 36
This allows recording of the pictures and sound to start approximately 3 seconds
before the recording start/stop button is pressed.
≥ appears on the screen.
≥ Aim the unit at the subject beforehand.
≥ There is no beep sound.
≥ PRE-REC is cancelled in the following cases.
jIf you change the mode
jIf you remove the SD card
jIf you press the MENU button
jIf you turn the unit off
jIf you start recording
jAfter 3 hours have passed
≥ After setting PRE-REC, if recording starts in less than 3 seconds, motion pictures taken
3 seconds before pressing the recording start/stop button cannot be recorded.
≥ Images displayed on the thumbnail in Playback Mode will differ from the motion pictures
displayed at the start of playback.
This makes skin colours appear softer for a more attractive appearance.
This is more effective if you record a person closely from the torso up.
≥ If the background or anything else in the scene has colours similar to the skin colour, they
will also be smoothed.
≥ If the brightness is insufficient, the effect may not be clear.
≥ If you record a person in the distance, the face may not be recorded clearly. In this case,
cancel Soft Skin Mode or zoom in on the face (close-up) to record.
PRE-REC
This prevents you from missing a shot.
Soft Skin Mode
PRE-REC
- 37 -
This allows recording of the pictures and sound to start approximately 3 seconds
before the recording start/stop button is pressed.
≥ appears on the screen.
≥ Aim the unit at the subject beforehand.
≥ There is no beep sound.
≥ PRE-REC is cancelled in the following cases.
jIf you change the mode
jIf you remove the SD card
jIf you press the MENU button
jIf you turn the unit off
jIf you start recording
jAfter 3 hours have passed
≥ After setting PRE-REC, if recording starts in less than 3 seconds, motion pictures taken
3 seconds before pressing the recording start/stop button cannot be recorded.
≥ Images displayed on the thumbnail in Playback Mode will differ from the motion pictures
displayed at the start of playback.
This makes skin colours appear softer for a more attractive appearance.
This is more effective if you record a person closely from the torso up.
≥ If the background or anything else in the scene has colours similar to the skin colour, they
will also be smoothed.
≥ If the brightness is insufficient, the effect may not be clear.
≥ If you record a person in the distance, the face may not be recorded clearly. In this case,
cancel Soft Skin Mode or zoom in on the face (close-up) to record.
PRE-REC
This prevents you from missing a shot.
Soft Skin Mode
PRE-REC
- 37 -
This allows recording of the pictures and sound to start approximately 3 seconds
before the recording start/stop button is pressed.
≥ appears on the screen.
≥ Aim the unit at the subject beforehand.
≥ There is no beep sound.
≥ PRE-REC is cancelled in the following cases.
jIf you change the mode
jIf you remove the SD card
jIf you press the MENU button
jIf you turn the unit off
jIf you start recording
jAfter 3 hours have passed
≥ After setting PRE-REC, if recording starts in less than 3 seconds, motion pictures taken
3 seconds before pressing the recording start/stop button cannot be recorded.
≥ Images displayed on the thumbnail in Playback Mode will differ from the motion pictures
displayed at the start of playback.
This makes skin colours appear softer for a more attractive appearance.
This is more effective if you record a person closely from the torso up.
≥ If the background or anything else in the scene has colours similar to the skin colour, they
will also be smoothed.
≥ If the brightness is insufficient, the effect may not be clear.
≥ If you record a person in the distance, the face may not be recorded clearly. In this case,
cancel Soft Skin Mode or zoom in on the face (close-up) to record.
PRE-REC
This prevents you from missing a shot.
Soft Skin Mode
PRE-REC
- 37 -
This allows recording of the pictures and sound to start approximately 3 seconds
before the recording start/stop button is pressed.
≥ appears on the screen.
≥ Aim the unit at the subject beforehand.
≥ There is no beep sound.
≥ PRE-REC is cancelled in the following cases.
jIf you change the mode
jIf you remove the SD card
jIf you press the MENU button
jIf you turn the unit off
jIf you start recording
jAfter 3 hours have passed
≥ After setting PRE-REC, if recording starts in less than 3 seconds, motion pictures taken
3 seconds before pressing the recording start/stop button cannot be recorded.
≥ Images displayed on the thumbnail in Playback Mode will differ from the motion pictures
displayed at the start of playback.
This makes skin colours appear softer for a more attractive appearance.
This is more effective if you record a person closely from the torso up.
≥ If the background or anything else in the scene has colours similar to the skin colour, they
will also be smoothed.
≥ If the brightness is insufficient, the effect may not be clear.
≥ If you record a person in the distance, the face may not be recorded clearly. In this case,
cancel Soft Skin Mode or zoom in on the face (close-up) to record.
PRE-REC
This prevents you from missing a shot.
Soft Skin Mode
PRE-REC
- 37 -
This allows recording of the pictures and sound to start approximately 3 seconds
before the recording start/stop button is pressed.
≥ appears on the screen.
≥ Aim the unit at the subject beforehand.
≥ There is no beep sound.
≥ PRE-REC is cancelled in the following cases.
jIf you change the mode
jIf you remove the SD card
jIf you press the MENU button
jIf you turn the unit off
jIf you start recording
jAfter 3 hours have passed
≥ After setting PRE-REC, if recording starts in less than 3 seconds, motion pictures taken
3 seconds before pressing the recording start/stop button cannot be recorded.
≥ Images displayed on the thumbnail in Playback Mode will differ from the motion pictures
displayed at the start of playback.
This makes skin colours appear softer for a more attractive appearance.
This is more effective if you record a person closely from the torso up.
≥ If the background or anything else in the scene has colours similar to the skin colour, they
will also be smoothed.
≥ If the brightness is insufficient, the effect may not be clear.
≥ If you record a person in the distance, the face may not be recorded clearly. In this case,
cancel Soft Skin Mode or zoom in on the face (close-up) to record.
PRE-REC
This prevents you from missing a shot.
Soft Skin Mode
PRE-REC
- 37 -
To vam omogućuje da započnete snimanje slike i zvuka otprilike 3 sekunde prije
pritiskanja tipke za pokretanje/zaustavljanje snimanja.
●
● se pojavljuje na zaslonu.
●
●Prije toga usmjerite uređaj prema objektu.
●
●Nema zvučnog signala.
●
●Funkcija PRE-REC poništava se u sljedećim slučajevima.
-
- Ako promijenite način rada
-
- Ako izvadite SD karticu
-
- Ako pritisnete gumb MENU
-
- Ako isključite uređaj
-
- Ako započnete snimanje
-
- Nakon što prođu 3 sata
●
●Ako počnete snimati manje od 3 sekunde nakon postavljanja funkcije PRE-REC,
videozapisi snimljeni 3 sekunde prije pritiska gumba za pokretanje/zaustavljanje
snimanja neće biti zabilježeni.
●
●Slike prikazane na minijaturama kod reprodukcije se razlikuju od videozapisa
prikazanih na početku reprodukcije.
Ova funkcija čini boju kože blažom radi boljeg efekta.
Ova je funkcija učinkovitija ako osobu snimate iz blizine, od torza prema gore.
●
●Ako pozadina ili bilo što drugo u kadru ima boju sličnu boji kože, te će površine
također biti zaglađene.
●
●Ako nema dovoljno svjetla, fotografija možda neće biti jasna.
●
●Ako snimate osobu u daljini, lice možda neće biti jasno snimljeno. U tom slučaju,
poništite funkciju blagog oblika ili zumirajte lice koje snimate (snimanje izbliza).
Funkcija PRE-REC
Sprečava situaciju u kojoj bi vam mogla promaknuti
prilika da snimite fotografiju za fotografijom.
Blagi oblik
Page: 37
- 38 -
This brightens parts that are in shadow and difficult to see and suppresses white
saturation in bright parts at the same time. Both bright and dark parts can be recorded
clearly.
≥ If there are extremely dark or bright parts or the brightness is insufficient, the effect may not
be clear.
This function allows you to record colour images in very low light situations.
(Minimum required illumination: approx. 1 lx)
≥ Recorded scene is seen as if frames were missed.
≥ If set in a bright place, the screen may become washed out for a while.
≥ Bright dots that are usually invisible may be seen, but this is not a malfunction.
≥ Using a tripod is recommended.
≥ In darker areas, Auto Focus may focus a bit slower. This is normal.
Intelligent Contrast Control
Colour Night View
- 38 -
This brightens parts that are in shadow and difficult to see and suppresses white
saturation in bright parts at the same time. Both bright and dark parts can be recorded
clearly.
≥ If there are extremely dark or bright parts or the brightness is insufficient, the effect may not
be clear.
This function allows you to record colour images in very low light situations.
(Minimum required illumination: approx. 1 lx)
≥ Recorded scene is seen as if frames were missed.
≥ If set in a bright place, the screen may become washed out for a while.
≥ Bright dots that are usually invisible may be seen, but this is not a malfunction.
≥ Using a tripod is recommended.
≥ In darker areas, Auto Focus may focus a bit slower. This is normal.
Intelligent Contrast Control
Colour Night View
- 38 -
Ova funkcija osvjetljava dijelove koji su u sjeni te ih je teško vidjeti, dok
istovremeno smanjuje zasićenost svijetlih dijelova slike. Na taj način se i svijetli
i tamni dijelovi slike mogu jasno snimiti.
●
●Ako su dijelovi slike izrazito tamni ili svijetli ili nema dovoljno svijetla, slika možda
neće biti jasna.
Ova funkcija omogućuje snimanje slika u boji u uvjetima vrlo slabog
osvjetljenja. (Minimalni zahtjevi osvjetljenja: otprilike 1 lx)
●
●Snimljena scena izgleda kao da nedostaju kadrovi.
●
●Ako se funkcija postavi u svijetlom prostoru, zaslon može s vremenom izblijedjeti.
●
●Do izražaja mogu doći svijetle točke koje se inače ne vide, ali to ne predstavlja kvar.
●
●Preporučujemo korištenje stativa.
●
●U tamnim prostorima funkcija automatskog fokusiranja može biti nešto sporija. To je
uobičajena pojava.
Noćno snimanje u boji
Inteligentno podešavanje kontrasta
Page: 38
- 39 -
≥ Change the mode to .
When you record images in different situations, this mode automatically sets optimum shutter
speeds and apertures.
≥ (Sunset/Low light)
jThe shutter speed is 1/25 or more.
≥ (Sunset/Fireworks/Scenery/Night scenery)
jImage may get blurry when close object is recorded.
≥ (Sports)
jDuring normal playback, the image movement may not look smooth.
jColour and screen brightness may change under indoor lighting.
jIf the brightness is insufficient, the Sports Mode does not function. The display flashes.
≥ (Portrait)
jColour and screen brightness may change under indoor lighting.
≥ (Fireworks)
jThe shutter speed is 1/25.
jImage may get washed out when recorded in bright surrounding.
≥ (Night scenery)
jUsing a tripod is recommended.
Advanced (Recording)
Recording functions of menus
[SCENE MODE]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [SCENE MODE] # desired setting
[OFF]: Cancel the setting
5Sports: To make fast moving scenes less shaky with slow playback
and pause of playback
Portrait: To make people stand out against the background
Spotlight: Improved quality when subject is brightly illuminated.
Snow: Improved image quality when shooting in snowy locations.
Beach: To make blue in the sea or sky vibrant
Sunset: To make red in the sunrise or sunset vibrant
Fireworks: To capture the fireworks in the night sky beautifully
Scenery: For spatial scenery
Night scenery: To capture the evening or night scenery beautifully.
Low light: For dark scenes, such as at dusk
- 39 -
≥ Change the mode to .
When you record images in different situations, this mode automatically sets optimum shutter
speeds and apertures.
≥ (Sunset/Low light)
jThe shutter speed is 1/25 or more.
≥ (Sunset/Fireworks/Scenery/Night scenery)
jImage may get blurry when close object is recorded.
≥ (Sports)
jDuring normal playback, the image movement may not look smooth.
jColour and screen brightness may change under indoor lighting.
jIf the brightness is insufficient, the Sports Mode does not function. The display flashes.
≥ (Portrait)
jColour and screen brightness may change under indoor lighting.
≥ (Fireworks)
jThe shutter speed is 1/25.
jImage may get washed out when recorded in bright surrounding.
≥ (Night scenery)
jUsing a tripod is recommended.
Advanced (Recording)
Recording functions of menus
[SCENE MODE]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [SCENE MODE] # desired setting
[OFF]: Cancel the setting
5Sports: To make fast moving scenes less shaky with slow playback
and pause of playback
Portrait: To make people stand out against the background
Spotlight: Improved quality when subject is brightly illuminated.
Snow: Improved image quality when shooting in snowy locations.
Beach: To make blue in the sea or sky vibrant
Sunset: To make red in the sunrise or sunset vibrant
Fireworks: To capture the fireworks in the night sky beautifully
Scenery: For spatial scenery
Night scenery: To capture the evening or night scenery beautifully.
Low light: For dark scenes, such as at dusk
- 39 -
≥ Change the mode to .
When you record images in different situations, this mode automatically sets optimum shutter
speeds and apertures.
≥ (Sunset/Low light)
jThe shutter speed is 1/25 or more.
≥ (Sunset/Fireworks/Scenery/Night scenery)
jImage may get blurry when close object is recorded.
≥ (Sports)
jDuring normal playback, the image movement may not look smooth.
jColour and screen brightness may change under indoor lighting.
jIf the brightness is insufficient, the Sports Mode does not function. The display flashes.
≥ (Portrait)
jColour and screen brightness may change under indoor lighting.
≥ (Fireworks)
jThe shutter speed is 1/25.
jImage may get washed out when recorded in bright surrounding.
≥ (Night scenery)
jUsing a tripod is recommended.
Advanced (Recording)
Recording functions of menus
[SCENE MODE]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [SCENE MODE] # desired setting
[OFF]: Cancel the setting
5Sports: To make fast moving scenes less shaky with slow playback
and pause of playback
Portrait: To make people stand out against the background
Spotlight: Improved quality when subject is brightly illuminated.
Snow: Improved image quality when shooting in snowy locations.
Beach: To make blue in the sea or sky vibrant
Sunset: To make red in the sunrise or sunset vibrant
Fireworks: To capture the fireworks in the night sky beautifully
Scenery: For spatial scenery
Night scenery: To capture the evening or night scenery beautifully.
Low light: For dark scenes, such as at dusk
- 39 -
●
●Promijenite način rada na .
Kada snimate slike u različitim situacijama, ovaj način rada automatski postavlja
optimalne brzine zatvarača i otvore blendi.
- 28 -
≥ The items displayed differ depending on the position or settings of the mode switch.
Select the menu.
The screen display can be changed to [ON] (all information displayed) or [OFF] (a portion of
information displayed).
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 17.
It is possible to display and record the time at the travel destination by selecting your home
region and the travel destination.
1 Select [SET WORLD TIME] and press the ENTER button.
≥ If the clock is not set, adjust the clock to the current time. (l 17)
≥ When the [HOME] (your home region) is not set, the message appears. Press the ENTER
button and proceed to Step 3.
2 (Only when setting your home region)
Select [HOME] using 2/1and press the ENTER button.
3 (Only when setting your home region)
Select your home region using
2/1and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press 3 to set daylight saving time.
appears and the summer time
setting is turned on; the time
difference from GMT is set forward by
one hour. Press 3 again to return to
the normal time setting.
4 (Only when setting the region of your
travel destination)
Select [DESTINATION] using 2/1 and press the ENTER button.
≥ When the home region is set for the first time, the screen for selecting home/travel
destination appears after setting the home region successively. If the home region has
already been set once, execute the menu operation for Step 1.
Basic
Using the Setup Menu
: [SETUP] # desired setting
[DISPLAY] [ON]/[OFF]
[EXT. DISPLAY] [SIMPLE]/[DETAIL]/[OFF]
[CLOCK SET]
[SET WORLD TIME]


A The current time
B The time difference from GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time)
[RECORD SETUP] (Postavke snimanja) → [SCENE MODE] (Scenski
način rada) → željena postavka
[SCENE MODE] (Scenski način rada)
Poništavanje postavke.
Sport: Za snimanje brzih scena s manje vibracija, sa sporom
reprodukcijom i pauzom kod reprodukcije
Portret: Kako bi se ljudi istaknuli u odnosu na pozadinu
Reflektor: Poboljšana kvaliteta kada je objekt snimanja jako osvijetljen.
Snijeg: Poboljšana kvaliteta slike prilikom snimanja na snijegu.
Plaža: Za postizanje plave boje mora ili neba.
Zalazak sunca: Za postizanje crvene boje izlaska ili zalaska sunca.
Vatromet: Za slikanje vatrometa na noćnome nebu
Krajolik: Za prostorno snimanje
Noćni krajolik: Za lijepo snimanje noćnog ili večernjeg krajolika
Nedovoljno svjetla: Za tamne kadrove, kao npr. sumrak
[OFF]:
- 30 -
jDuring playback of the slide show
This unit is put into recording pause approx. 0.8 seconds after the LCD monitor is reopened.
≥ When in Quick Start Standby Mode about 60% of the power used in recording pause
mode is being consumed, so the recording time will be reduced.
≥ Quick Start will not work if there is no SD card inserted.
≥ The LCD monitor cannot be closed when using the USB cable, so please disconnect it
from the unit.
≥ Change the mode to .
1 Set [QUICK START] to [ON].
2 Close the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A flashes green and the unit
goes into Quick Start Standby Mode.
3 Open the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A lights red and the unit is put
into recording pause.
≥ Quick Start Standby Mode is cancelled if
jabout 5 minutes have elapsed
jmode is set to
≥ It may take some time for Automatic White Balance to adjust.
≥ In the Quick Start Mode, the zoom magnification becomes approx. 1k.
≥ When it has gone into Quick Start Standby Mode automatically with the [ECONOMY
(BATT)] (l 29)/[ECONOMY (AC)], close the LCD monitor once and open it again.
≥ Turn the unit off using the power button.
[QUICK START] [ON]/[OFF]


●
●(Zalazak sunca/Nedovoljno svjetla)
-
- Brzina zatvarača je 1/25 ili više.
●
●(Zalazak sunca/Vatromet/Krajolik/Noćni krajolik)
-
- Slika može izgledati zamućeno kada se snimaju objekti izbliza.
●
●(Sport)
-
- Za vrijeme uobičajene reprodukcije kretanje slike neće biti bez zastajanja.
-
- Boja i svjetlina zaslona mogu pod unutarnjom rasvjetom izgledati drukčije.
-
- Ako nema dovoljno svijetla, način rada sport neće raditi. Oznaka treperi.
●
●(Portret)
-
- Boja i svjetlina zaslona mogu pod unutarnjom rasvjetom izgledati drukčije.
●
●(Vatromet)
-
- Brzina zatvarača je 1/25.
-
- Slika može izgledati blijedo kada se snima u svijetloj okolini.
●
●(Noćni krajolik)
-
- Preporučujemo korištenje stativa.
Napredne funkcije (Snimanje)
Funkcije snimanja u izbornicima
- 39 -
≥ Change the mode to .
When you record images in different situations, this mode automatically sets optimum shutter
speeds and apertures.
≥ (Sunset/Low light)
jThe shutter speed is 1/25 or more.
≥ (Sunset/Fireworks/Scenery/Night scenery)
jImage may get blurry when close object is recorded.
≥ (Sports)
jDuring normal playback, the image movement may not look smooth.
jColour and screen brightness may change under indoor lighting.
jIf the brightness is insufficient, the Sports Mode does not function. The display flashes.
≥ (Portrait)
jColour and screen brightness may change under indoor lighting.
≥ (Fireworks)
jThe shutter speed is 1/25.
jImage may get washed out when recorded in bright surrounding.
≥ (Night scenery)
jUsing a tripod is recommended.
Advanced (Recording)
Recording functions of menus
[SCENE MODE]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [SCENE MODE] # desired setting
[OFF]: Cancel the setting
5Sports: To make fast moving scenes less shaky with slow playback
and pause of playback
Portrait: To make people stand out against the background
Spotlight: Improved quality when subject is brightly illuminated.
Snow: Improved image quality when shooting in snowy locations.
Beach: To make blue in the sea or sky vibrant
Sunset: To make red in the sunrise or sunset vibrant
Fireworks: To capture the fireworks in the night sky beautifully
Scenery: For spatial scenery
Night scenery: To capture the evening or night scenery beautifully.
Low light: For dark scenes, such as at dusk
Page: 39
- 40 -
Set the maximum zoom ratio.
≥ The larger the digital zoom magnification, the more the image quality is degraded.
Switch the picture quality and recording format of the motion pictures to be recorded.
*1 Recording will have higher quality in the order of [1280k720/50p] and [640k480/50p].
*2 [iFrame] is a format suitable for Mac (iMovie’11). It is recommended for when using a
Mac.
∫ About still picture recording size
The still picture recording size varies depending on the recording mode.
≥ Recordable time using the battery (l 12)
≥ This function’s default setting is [1280k720/50p] mode.
≥ Please refer to page 88 about approximate recordable time.
≥ Black bars will be displayed on the left and right in [640k480/50p] mode.
[D.ZOOM]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [D.ZOOM] # desired setting
[100k]: Digital zoom (Up to 100k)
[3500k]: Digital zoom (Up to 3500k)
[OFF]: Optical zoom only (Up to 70k)
[REC MODE]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [REC MODE] # desired setting
[1280k720/50p]/
[640k480/50p]*1
: Set the recording mode to MP4.
[iFrame]*2
: Set the recording mode to iFrame.
Recording mode Aspect ratio Picture size
[1280k720/50p]/
[iFrame]
16:9 1280k720
[640k480/50p] 4:3 640k480
0.9M
0.3M
- 40 -
Set the maximum zoom ratio.
≥ The larger the digital zoom magnification, the more the image quality is degraded.
Switch the picture quality and recording format of the motion pictures to be recorded.
*1 Recording will have higher quality in the order of [1280k720/50p] and [640k480/50p].
*2 [iFrame] is a format suitable for Mac (iMovie’11). It is recommended for when using a
Mac.
∫ About still picture recording size
The still picture recording size varies depending on the recording mode.
≥ Recordable time using the battery (l 12)
≥ This function’s default setting is [1280k720/50p] mode.
≥ Please refer to page 88 about approximate recordable time.
≥ Black bars will be displayed on the left and right in [640k480/50p] mode.
[D.ZOOM]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [D.ZOOM] # desired setting
[100k]: Digital zoom (Up to 100k)
[3500k]: Digital zoom (Up to 3500k)
[OFF]: Optical zoom only (Up to 70k)
[REC MODE]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [REC MODE] # desired setting
[1280k720/50p]/
[640k480/50p]*1
: Set the recording mode to MP4.
[iFrame]*2
: Set the recording mode to iFrame.
Recording mode Aspect ratio Picture size
[1280k720/50p]/
[iFrame]
16:9 1280k720
[640k480/50p] 4:3 640k480
0.9M
0.3M
- 40 -
≥ The items displayed differ depending on the position or settings of the mode switch.
Select the menu.
The screen display can be changed to [ON] (all information displayed) or [OFF] (a portion of
information displayed).
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 17.
It is possible to display and record the time at the travel destination by selecting your home
region and the travel destination.
1 Select [SET WORLD TIME] and press the ENTER button.
≥ If the clock is not set, adjust the clock to the current time. (l 17)
≥ When the [HOME] (your home region) is not set, the message appears. Press the ENTER
button and proceed to Step 3.
2 (Only when setting your home region)
Select [HOME] using 2/1and press the ENTER button.
3 (Only when setting your home region)
Select your home region using
2/1and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press 3 to set daylight saving time.
appears and the summer time
setting is turned on; the time
difference from GMT is set forward by
one hour. Press 3 again to return to
the normal time setting.
4 (Only when setting the region of your
travel destination)
Select [DESTINATION] using 2/1 and press the ENTER button.
≥ When the home region is set for the first time, the screen for selecting home/travel
Basic
Using the Setup Menu
: [SETUP] # desired setting
[DISPLAY] [ON]/[OFF]
[EXT. DISPLAY] [SIMPLE]/[DETAIL]/[OFF]
[CLOCK SET]
[SET WORLD TIME]


A The current time
B The time difference from GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time)
- 28 -
≥ The items displayed differ depending on the position or settings of the mode switch.
Select the menu.
The screen display can be changed to [ON] (all information displayed) or [OFF] (a portion of
information displayed).
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 17.
It is possible to display and record the time at the travel destination by selecting your home
region and the travel destination.
1 Select [SET WORLD TIME] and press the ENTER button.
≥ If the clock is not set, adjust the clock to the current time. (l 17)
≥ When the [HOME] (your home region) is not set, the message appears. Press the ENTER
button and proceed to Step 3.
2 (Only when setting your home region)
Select [HOME] using 2/1and press the ENTER button.
3 (Only when setting your home region)
Select your home region using
2/1and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press 3 to set daylight saving time.
appears and the summer time
setting is turned on; the time
difference from GMT is set forward by
one hour. Press 3 again to return to
the normal time setting.
4 (Only when setting the region of your
travel destination)
Select [DESTINATION] using 2/1 and press the ENTER button.
≥ When the home region is set for the first time, the screen for selecting home/travel
destination appears after setting the home region successively. If the home region has
already been set once, execute the menu operation for Step 1.
Basic
Using the Setup Menu
: [SETUP] # desired setting
[DISPLAY] [ON]/[OFF]
[EXT. DISPLAY] [SIMPLE]/[DETAIL]/[OFF]
[CLOCK SET]
[SET WORLD TIME]


A The current time
B The time difference from GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time)
[RECORD SETUP] (Postavke snimanja) → [REC MODE] (Način snimanja)
→ željena postavka
[RECORD SETUP] (Postavke snimanja) → [D.ZOOM] (Digitalni zum) →
željena postavka
Podešavanje maksimalnog omjera zumiranja.
●
●Što je uvećanje zuma veće, to je kvaliteta fotografije lošija.
Promijenite kvalitetu slike i format snimanja videozapisa koje ćete snimati.
*1 Slike će biti više kvalitete u redoslijedu od [1280x720/50p] i [640x480/50p].
*2 [iFrame] je format prikladan za Mac (iMovie’11). Njegova se uporaba preporučuje
prilikom korištenja Maca.
■
■ Veličina snimanja fotografija
Veličina snimanja fotografije razlikuje se ovisno o načinu snimanja.
●
●Raspoloživo vrijeme snimanja uz korištenje baterije (→ 12)
●
●Zadana postavka ove funkcije je [1280x720/50p] način rada.
●
●Detalje o približnom vremenu snimanja pronađite na 88. stranici.
●
●Crne crte prikazuju se slijeva i zdesna u načinu [640x480/50p].
Način snimanja Format slike Veličina fotografije
[1280x720/50p]/
[iFrame]
16:9 1280x720
[640x480/50p] 4:3 640x480
[100x]:		 Digitalni zum (do 100 x).
[3500x]: Digitalni zum (do 3500 x).
[OFF]:		 Samo optički zum (do 70 x)
[1280x720/50p]/
[640 x480/50p]*1
:		 Postavite način snimanja na MP4.
[iFrame]*2
:		 Postavite na iFrame format snimanja.
[D.ZOOM] (digitalni zum)
[REC MODE] (Način snimanja)
- 40 -
Set the maximum zoom ratio.
≥ The larger the digital zoom magnification, the more the image quality is degraded.
Switch the picture quality and recording format of the motion pictures to be recorded.
*1 Recording will have higher quality in the order of [1280k720/50p] and [640k480/50p].
*2 [iFrame] is a format suitable for Mac (iMovie’11). It is recommended for when using a
Mac.
∫ About still picture recording size
The still picture recording size varies depending on the recording mode.
≥ Recordable time using the battery (l 12)
≥ This function’s default setting is [1280k720/50p] mode.
≥ Please refer to page 88 about approximate recordable time.
≥ Black bars will be displayed on the left and right in [640k480/50p] mode.
[D.ZOOM]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [D.ZOOM] # desired setting
[100k]: Digital zoom (Up to 100k)
[3500k]: Digital zoom (Up to 3500k)
[OFF]: Optical zoom only (Up to 70k)
[REC MODE]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [REC MODE] # desired setting
[1280k720/50p]/
[640k480/50p]*1
: Set the recording mode to MP4.
[iFrame]*2
: Set the recording mode to iFrame.
Recording mode Aspect ratio Picture size
[1280k720/50p]/
[iFrame]
16:9 1280k720
[640k480/50p] 4:3 640k480
0.9M
0.3M
- 40 -
Set the maximum zoom ratio.
≥ The larger the digital zoom magnification, the more the image quality is degraded.
Switch the picture quality and recording format of the motion pictures to be recorded.
*1 Recording will have higher quality in the order of [1280k720/50p] and [640k480/50p].
*2 [iFrame] is a format suitable for Mac (iMovie’11). It is recommended for when using a
Mac.
∫ About still picture recording size
The still picture recording size varies depending on the recording mode.
≥ Recordable time using the battery (l 12)
≥ This function’s default setting is [1280k720/50p] mode.
≥ Please refer to page 88 about approximate recordable time.
≥ Black bars will be displayed on the left and right in [640k480/50p] mode.
[D.ZOOM]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [D.ZOOM] # desired setting
[100k]: Digital zoom (Up to 100k)
[3500k]: Digital zoom (Up to 3500k)
[OFF]: Optical zoom only (Up to 70k)
[REC MODE]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [REC MODE] # desired setting
[1280k720/50p]/
[640k480/50p]*1
: Set the recording mode to MP4.
[iFrame]*2
: Set the recording mode to iFrame.
Recording mode Aspect ratio Picture size
[1280k720/50p]/
[iFrame]
16:9 1280k720
[640k480/50p] 4:3 640k480
0.9M
0.3M
Page: 40
- 41 -
Detected faces appear with frames.
≥ Up to 15 frames are indicated. Larger faces and faces nearer to the centre of the screen
take preference over others.
∫ Prioritised face framing
Prioritised face framing is displayed as orange frames. Focus and adjustment of brightness
will be performed against the prioritised face framing.
≥ Prioritised face framing is only displayed with Portrait Mode in the Intelligent Auto Mode.
≥ The white frame is for face detection only.
If the unit continues to be tilted upside down from the normal horizontal position while
recording motion pictures, it is automatically put into recording pause.
≥ The AGS function may activate and cause the unit to pause the recording if you are
recording a subject right above or right below you.
You can record bright pictures even in dark places by slowing the shutter speed.
≥ Switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
≥ The shutter speed is set to 1/25 or more depending on the surrounding brightness.
≥ When the shutter speed becomes 1/25, the screen may be seen as if frames are missed
and afterimages may appear.
[FACE FRAMING]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [FACE FRAMING] # desired setting
[PRIMARY]:
Only the prioritised face framing is displayed.
[ALL]:
All face detection framings are displayed.
[OFF]:
Cancel the setting.
[AGS]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [AGS] # [ON]
[AUTO SLOW SHTR]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [AUTO SLOW SHTR] # [ON]
- 41 -
Detected faces appear with frames.
≥ Up to 15 frames are indicated. Larger faces and faces nearer to the centre of the screen
take preference over others.
∫ Prioritised face framing
Prioritised face framing is displayed as orange frames. Focus and adjustment of brightness
will be performed against the prioritised face framing.
≥ Prioritised face framing is only displayed with Portrait Mode in the Intelligent Auto Mode.
≥ The white frame is for face detection only.
If the unit continues to be tilted upside down from the normal horizontal position while
recording motion pictures, it is automatically put into recording pause.
≥ The AGS function may activate and cause the unit to pause the recording if you are
recording a subject right above or right below you.
You can record bright pictures even in dark places by slowing the shutter speed.
≥ Switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
≥ The shutter speed is set to 1/25 or more depending on the surrounding brightness.
≥ When the shutter speed becomes 1/25, the screen may be seen as if frames are missed
and afterimages may appear.
[FACE FRAMING]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [FACE FRAMING] # desired setting
[PRIMARY]:
Only the prioritised face framing is displayed.
[ALL]:
All face detection framings are displayed.
[OFF]:
Cancel the setting.
[AGS]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [AGS] # [ON]
[AUTO SLOW SHTR]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [AUTO SLOW SHTR] # [ON]
- 41 -
Detected faces appear with frames.
≥ Up to 15 frames are indicated. Larger faces and faces nearer to the centre of the screen
take preference over others.
∫ Prioritised face framing
Prioritised face framing is displayed as orange frames. Focus and adjustment of brightness
will be performed against the prioritised face framing.
≥ Prioritised face framing is only displayed with Portrait Mode in the Intelligent Auto Mode.
≥ The white frame is for face detection only.
If the unit continues to be tilted upside down from the normal horizontal position while
recording motion pictures, it is automatically put into recording pause.
≥ The AGS function may activate and cause the unit to pause the recording if you are
recording a subject right above or right below you.
You can record bright pictures even in dark places by slowing the shutter speed.
≥ Switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
≥ The shutter speed is set to 1/25 or more depending on the surrounding brightness.
≥ When the shutter speed becomes 1/25, the screen may be seen as if frames are missed
and afterimages may appear.
[FACE FRAMING]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [FACE FRAMING] # desired setting
[PRIMARY]:
Only the prioritised face framing is displayed.
[ALL]:
All face detection framings are displayed.
[OFF]:
Cancel the setting.
[AGS]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [AGS] # [ON]
[AUTO SLOW SHTR]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [AUTO SLOW SHTR] # [ON]
≥ Up to 15 frames are indicated. Larger faces and faces nearer to the centre of the screen
take preference over others.
∫ Prioritised face framing
Prioritised face framing is displayed as orange frames. Focus and adjustment of brightness
will be performed against the prioritised face framing.
≥ Prioritised face framing is only displayed with Portrait Mode in the Intelligent Auto Mode.
≥ The white frame is for face detection only.
If the unit continues to be tilted upside down from the normal horizontal position while
recording motion pictures, it is automatically put into recording pause.
≥ The AGS function may activate and cause the unit to pause the recording if you are
recording a subject right above or right below you.
You can record bright pictures even in dark places by slowing the shutter speed.
≥ Switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
≥ The shutter speed is set to 1/25 or more depending on the surrounding brightness.
≥ When the shutter speed becomes 1/25, the screen may be seen as if frames are missed
and afterimages may appear.
All face detection framings are displayed.
[OFF]:
Cancel the setting.
[AGS]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [AGS] # [ON]
[AUTO SLOW SHTR]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [AUTO SLOW SHTR] # [ON]
- 41 -
Detected faces appear with frames.
≥ Up to 15 frames are indicated. Larger faces and faces nearer to the centre of the screen
take preference over others.
∫ Prioritised face framing
Prioritised face framing is displayed as orange frames. Focus and adjustment of brightness
will be performed against the prioritised face framing.
≥ Prioritised face framing is only displayed with Portrait Mode in the Intelligent Auto Mode.
≥ The white frame is for face detection only.
If the unit continues to be tilted upside down from the normal horizontal position while
recording motion pictures, it is automatically put into recording pause.
≥ The AGS function may activate and cause the unit to pause the recording if you are
recording a subject right above or right below you.
You can record bright pictures even in dark places by slowing the shutter speed.
≥ Switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
≥ The shutter speed is set to 1/25 or more depending on the surrounding brightness.
≥ When the shutter speed becomes 1/25, the screen may be seen as if frames are missed
and afterimages may appear.
[FACE FRAMING]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [FACE FRAMING] # desired setting
[PRIMARY]:
Only the prioritised face framing is displayed.
[ALL]:
All face detection framings are displayed.
[OFF]:
Cancel the setting.
[AGS]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [AGS] # [ON]
[AUTO SLOW SHTR]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [AUTO SLOW SHTR] # [ON]
- 41 -
Ako se uređaj tijekom snimanja videozapisa iz normalnog vodoravnog položaja okrene
prema dolje, uređaj automatski pauzira snimanje.
●
●Funkcija AGS može se aktivirati i privremeno zaustaviti snimanje ako snimate objekt
koji se nalazi točno iznad ili točno ispod vas.
Smanjivanjem brzine zatvarača možete snimati svijetle slike, čak i na tamnim mjestima.
●
●Prijeđite na ručni način rada. (→ 44)
●
●Brzina zatvarača podešena je na 1/25 ili više ovisno o svjetlini okoline.
●
●Ako je brzina zatvarača 1/25, zaslon može izgledati kao da kadrovi nedostaju, a
mogu se pojaviti i zaostale slike.
- 28 -
≥ The items displayed differ depending on the position or settings of the mode switch.
Select the menu.
The screen display can be changed to [ON] (all information displayed) or [OFF] (a portion of
information displayed).
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 17.
It is possible to display and record the time at the travel destination by selecting your home
region and the travel destination.
1 Select [SET WORLD TIME] and press the ENTER button.
≥ If the clock is not set, adjust the clock to the current time. (l 17)
≥ When the [HOME] (your home region) is not set, the message appears. Press the ENTER
button and proceed to Step 3.
2 (Only when setting your home region)
Select [HOME] using 2/1and press the ENTER button.
3 (Only when setting your home region)
Select your home region using
2/1and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press 3 to set daylight saving time.
appears and the summer time
setting is turned on; the time
difference from GMT is set forward by
one hour. Press 3 again to return to
the normal time setting.
4 (Only when setting the region of your
travel destination)
Select [DESTINATION] using 2/1 and press the ENTER button.
≥ When the home region is set for the first time, the screen for selecting home/travel
destination appears after setting the home region successively. If the home region has
already been set once, execute the menu operation for Step 1.
Basic
Using the Setup Menu
: [SETUP] # desired setting
[DISPLAY] [ON]/[OFF]
[EXT. DISPLAY] [SIMPLE]/[DETAIL]/[OFF]
[CLOCK SET]
[SET WORLD TIME]


A The current time
B The time difference from GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time)
≥ The items displayed differ depending on the position or settings of the mode switch.
Select the menu.
The screen display can be changed to [ON] (all information displayed) or [OFF] (a portion of
information displayed).
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 17.
It is possible to display and record the time at the travel destination by selecting your home
region and the travel destination.
1 Select [SET WORLD TIME] and press the ENTER button.
≥ If the clock is not set, adjust the clock to the current time. (l 17)
≥ When the [HOME] (your home region) is not set, the message appears. Press the ENTER
button and proceed to Step 3.
2 (Only when setting your home region)
Select [HOME] using 2/1and press the ENTER button.
3 (Only when setting your home region)
Select your home region using
Basic
Using the Setup Menu
: [SETUP] # desired setting
[DISPLAY] [ON]/[OFF]
[EXT. DISPLAY] [SIMPLE]/[DETAIL]/[OFF]
[CLOCK SET]
[SET WORLD TIME]

≥ The items displayed differ depending on the position or settings of the mode switch.
Select the menu.
The screen display can be changed to [ON] (all information displayed) or [OFF] (a portion of
information displayed).
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 17.
Basic
Using the Setup Menu
: [SETUP] # desired setting
[DISPLAY] [ON]/[OFF]
[EXT. DISPLAY] [SIMPLE]/[DETAIL]/[OFF]
[CLOCK SET]
[SET WORLD TIME]
[RECORD SETUP] (Postavke snimanja) → [FACE FRAMING]
(Uokvirivanje lica) → željena postavka
[RECORD SETUP] (Postavke snimanja) → [AGS] → [ON] (Uključeno)
[RECORD SETUP] (Postavke snimanja) → [AUTO SLOW SHTR]
(Automatsko usporavanje brzine zatvarača)→ [ON] (Uklj)
Prepoznata lica pojavljuju se s okvirima.
●
●Može se označiti do 15 okvira. Veća lica i lica koja se nalaze bliže središtu zaslona
imaju prioritet u odnosu na ostala.
■
■ Prioritet kod uokviravanja lica
Prioriteti uokvirivanja lica prikazani su kao narančasti okviri. Izoštravanje i
podešavanje svjetline izvodi se prema prioritetnom okviru lica.
●
●Prioritetno uokviravanje lica prikazano je samo u načinu rada Portret u inteligentnom
automatskom načinu rada.
●
●Bijeli okvir služi samo za prepoznavanje lica.
[FACE FRAMING] (Uokvirivanje lica)
[PRIMARY] (Primarno):
Prikazan je samo prioritetni okvir lica.
[ALL] (Svi):
Prikazani su svi okviri lica.
[OFF] (Isključeno):
Poništavanje postavke.
[AGS]
[AUTO SLOW SHTR] (Automatsko usporavanje
brzine zatvarača)
Page: 41
- 42 -
This is for reducing the wind noise coming into the built-in microphones.
≥ Switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
≥ This function’s default setting is [OFF].
≥ When switching to Intelligent Auto Mode, [WIND CUT] is set to [OFF], and the setting
cannot be changed.
≥ You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.
When recording, the input level from the built-in microphones can be adjusted.
≥ Switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
1 Select the menu.
2 (When [SETr ]/[SET] is selected)
Press 2/1 to adjust.
≥ Adjust the microphone input level so that the
last 2 bars of the gain value are not red.
(Otherwise, the sound is distorted.) Select a
lower setting for microphone input level.
3 Press the ENTER button to determine
the microphone input level and then
press the MENU button.
≥ (Microphone input level meter)
appears on the screen.
≥ In Intelligent Auto Mode this setting is set to [AUTO] and cannot be changed.
≥ The microphone input level meter shows the larger of the inputs from the 2 built-in
microphones.
≥ You cannot record with the audio completely muted.
[WIND CUT]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [WIND CUT] # [ON]
[MIC LEVEL]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [MIC LEVEL] # desired setting
[AUTO]: AGC is activated, and the recording level is adjusted
automatically.
[SETr ]: The desired recording level can be set.
AGC is activated, reducing noise.
[SET]: The desired recording level can be set.
You will be able to record natural-sounding audio.
A Left
B Right
C Microphone input level
- 42 -
This is for reducing the wind noise coming into the built-in microphones.
≥ Switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
≥ This function’s default setting is [OFF].
≥ When switching to Intelligent Auto Mode, [WIND CUT] is set to [OFF], and the setting
cannot be changed.
≥ You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.
When recording, the input level from the built-in microphones can be adjusted.
≥ Switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
1 Select the menu.
2 (When [SETr ]/[SET] is selected)
Press 2/1 to adjust.
≥ Adjust the microphone input level so that the
last 2 bars of the gain value are not red.
(Otherwise, the sound is distorted.) Select a
lower setting for microphone input level.
3 Press the ENTER button to determine
the microphone input level and then
press the MENU button.
≥ (Microphone input level meter)
appears on the screen.
≥ In Intelligent Auto Mode this setting is set to [AUTO] and cannot be changed.
≥ The microphone input level meter shows the larger of the inputs from the 2 built-in
microphones.
≥ You cannot record with the audio completely muted.
[WIND CUT]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [WIND CUT] # [ON]
[MIC LEVEL]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [MIC LEVEL] # desired setting
[AUTO]: AGC is activated, and the recording level is adjusted
automatically.
[SETr ]: The desired recording level can be set.
AGC is activated, reducing noise.
[SET]: The desired recording level can be set.
You will be able to record natural-sounding audio.
A Left
B Right
C Microphone input level
- 42 -
This is for reducing the wind noise coming into the built-in microphones.
≥ Switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
≥ This function’s default setting is [OFF].
≥ When switching to Intelligent Auto Mode, [WIND CUT] is set to [OFF], and the setting
cannot be changed.
≥ You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.
When recording, the input level from the built-in microphones can be adjusted.
≥ Switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
1 Select the menu.
2 (When [SETr ]/[SET] is selected)
Press 2/1 to adjust.
≥ Adjust the microphone input level so that the
last 2 bars of the gain value are not red.
(Otherwise, the sound is distorted.) Select a
lower setting for microphone input level.
3 Press the ENTER button to determine
the microphone input level and then
press the MENU button.
≥ (Microphone input level meter)
appears on the screen.
≥ In Intelligent Auto Mode this setting is set to [AUTO] and cannot be changed.
≥ The microphone input level meter shows the larger of the inputs from the 2 built-in
microphones.
≥ You cannot record with the audio completely muted.
[WIND CUT]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [WIND CUT] # [ON]
[MIC LEVEL]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [MIC LEVEL] # desired setting
[AUTO]: AGC is activated, and the recording level is adjusted
automatically.
[SETr ]: The desired recording level can be set.
AGC is activated, reducing noise.
[SET]: The desired recording level can be set.
You will be able to record natural-sounding audio.
A Left
B Right
C Microphone input level
- 42 -
This is for reducing the wind noise coming into the built-in microphones.
≥ Switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
≥ This function’s default setting is [OFF].
≥ When switching to Intelligent Auto Mode, [WIND CUT] is set to [OFF], and the setting
cannot be changed.
≥ You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.
When recording, the input level from the built-in microphones can be adjusted.
≥ Switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
1 Select the menu.
2 (When [SETr ]/[SET] is selected)
Press 2/1 to adjust.
≥ Adjust the microphone input level so that the
last 2 bars of the gain value are not red.
(Otherwise, the sound is distorted.) Select a
lower setting for microphone input level.
3 Press the ENTER button to determine
the microphone input level and then
press the MENU button.
≥ (Microphone input level meter)
appears on the screen.
≥ In Intelligent Auto Mode this setting is set to [AUTO] and cannot be changed.
≥ The microphone input level meter shows the larger of the inputs from the 2 built-in
microphones.
≥ You cannot record with the audio completely muted.
[WIND CUT]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [WIND CUT] # [ON]
[MIC LEVEL]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [MIC LEVEL] # desired setting
[AUTO]: AGC is activated, and the recording level is adjusted
automatically.
[SETr ]: The desired recording level can be set.
AGC is activated, reducing noise.
[SET]: The desired recording level can be set.
You will be able to record natural-sounding audio.
A Left
B Right
C Microphone input level
- 42 -
- 28 -
≥ The items displayed differ depending on the position or settings of the mode switch.
Select the menu.
The screen display can be changed to [ON] (all information displayed) or [OFF] (a portion of
information displayed).
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 17.
It is possible to display and record the time at the travel destination by selecting your home
region and the travel destination.
1 Select [SET WORLD TIME] and press the ENTER button.
≥ If the clock is not set, adjust the clock to the current time. (l 17)
≥ When the [HOME] (your home region) is not set, the message appears. Press the ENTER
button and proceed to Step 3.
2 (Only when setting your home region)
Select [HOME] using 2/1and press the ENTER button.
3 (Only when setting your home region)
Select your home region using
2/1and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press 3 to set daylight saving time.
appears and the summer time
setting is turned on; the time
difference from GMT is set forward by
one hour. Press 3 again to return to
the normal time setting.
4 (Only when setting the region of your
travel destination)
Select [DESTINATION] using 2/1 and press the ENTER button.
≥ When the home region is set for the first time, the screen for selecting home/travel
destination appears after setting the home region successively. If the home region has
already been set once, execute the menu operation for Step 1.
Basic
Using the Setup Menu
: [SETUP] # desired setting
[DISPLAY] [ON]/[OFF]
[EXT. DISPLAY] [SIMPLE]/[DETAIL]/[OFF]
[CLOCK SET]
[SET WORLD TIME]


A The current time
B The time difference from GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time)
≥ The items displayed differ depending on the position or settings of the mode switch.
Select the menu.
The screen display can be changed to [ON] (all information displayed) or [OFF] (a portion of
information displayed).
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 17.
It is possible to display and record the time at the travel destination by selecting your home
region and the travel destination.
1 Select [SET WORLD TIME] and press the ENTER button.
≥ If the clock is not set, adjust the clock to the current time. (l 17)
≥ When the [HOME] (your home region) is not set, the message appears. Press the ENTER
button and proceed to Step 3.
2 (Only when setting your home region)
Select [HOME] using 2/1and press the ENTER button.
3 (Only when setting your home region)
Select your home region using
2/1and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press 3 to set daylight saving time.
appears and the summer time
setting is turned on; the time
difference from GMT is set forward by
one hour. Press 3 again to return to
the normal time setting.
4 (Only when setting the region of your
travel destination)
Basic
Using the Setup Menu
: [SETUP] # desired setting
[DISPLAY] [ON]/[OFF]
[EXT. DISPLAY] [SIMPLE]/[DETAIL]/[OFF]
[CLOCK SET]
[SET WORLD TIME]


A The current time
B The time difference from GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time)
Ova funkcija koristi se za smanjenje zvuka vjetra koji ulazi u ugrađene mikrofone.
●
●Prijeđite na ručni način rada. (→ 44)
Kod snimanja je moguće prilagoditi ulaznu razinu signala ugrađenih mikrofona.
●
●Prijeđite na ručni način rada. (→ 44)
1 Odaberite izbornik.
●
●Zadana postavka ove funkcije je [OFF].
●
●Prilikom prebacivanja na inteligentni automatski način rada funkcija [WIND CUT]
postavljena je na [OFF] i nije ju moguće promijeniti.
●
●Ovisno o uvjetima snimanja, možda nećete vidjeti potpuni učinak.
2 (Kada se odabere [SET+ /[SET])
Za podešavanje pritisnite ◄/►.
●
●Podesite ulaznu razinu signala mikrofona,
tako da posljednje 2 razine signala nisu
crvene (u protivnome će zvuk biti izobličen).
Odaberite nižu postavku za ulaznu razinu
signala mikrofona.
3 Pritisnite gumb ENTER da biste odredili
ulaznu razinu signala mikrofona i
potom pritisnite gumb MENU.
●
●Na zaslonu se pojavljuje □□□■■■■■ (mjerač
ulazne razine mikrofona).
●
●U inteligentnom automatskom načinu rada postavka je podešena na [AUTO]
(Automatski) i ne može se promijeniti.
●
●Mjerač ulazne razine mikrofona pokazivat će onaj ulaz koji je veći iz 2 ugrađena
mikrofona.
●
●Snimanje s potpuno utišanim zvukom nije moguće.
[WIND CUT] (Smanjenje šuma vjetra)
[MIC LEVEL] (Razina mikrofona)
[RECORD SETUP] (Postavke snimanja)→ [WIND CUT] (Smanjenje šuma
vjetra) → [ON] (Uklj)
[RECORD SETUP] (Postavke snimanja) → [MIC LEVEL] (Razina
mikrofona) → željena postavka
[AUTO] (Automatski): Aktivirana je funkcija AGC, a razina snimanja
automatski se podešava.
[SET+ ]: Može se postaviti tražena razina snimanja.
		 AGC funkcija je aktivirana i smanjuje smetnje.
[SET]:		 Može se postaviti tražena razina snimanja.
		 Omogućeno je snimanje prirodnog zvuka.
- 42 -
This is for reducing the wind noise coming into the built-in microphones.
≥ Switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
≥ This function’s default setting is [OFF].
≥ When switching to Intelligent Auto Mode, [WIND CUT] is set to [OFF], and the setting
cannot be changed.
≥ You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.
When recording, the input level from the built-in microphones can be adjusted.
≥ Switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
1 Select the menu.
2 (When [SETr ]/[SET] is selected)
Press 2/1 to adjust.
≥ Adjust the microphone input level so that the
last 2 bars of the gain value are not red.
(Otherwise, the sound is distorted.) Select a
lower setting for microphone input level.
3 Press the ENTER button to determine
the microphone input level and then
press the MENU button.
≥ (Microphone input level meter)
appears on the screen.
≥ In Intelligent Auto Mode this setting is set to [AUTO] and cannot be changed.
≥ The microphone input level meter shows the larger of the inputs from the 2 built-in
microphones.
≥ You cannot record with the audio completely muted.
[WIND CUT]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [WIND CUT] # [ON]
[MIC LEVEL]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [MIC LEVEL] # desired setting
[AUTO]: AGC is activated, and the recording level is adjusted
automatically.
[SETr ]: The desired recording level can be set.
AGC is activated, reducing noise.
[SET]: The desired recording level can be set.
You will be able to record natural-sounding audio.
A Left
B Right
C Microphone input level
- 42 -
This is for reducing the wind noise coming into the built-in microphones.
≥ Switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
≥ This function’s default setting is [OFF].
≥ When switching to Intelligent Auto Mode, [WIND CUT] is set to [OFF], and the setting
cannot be changed.
≥ You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.
When recording, the input level from the built-in microphones can be adjusted.
≥ Switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
1 Select the menu.
2 (When [SETr ]/[SET] is selected)
Press 2/1 to adjust.
≥ Adjust the microphone input level so that the
last 2 bars of the gain value are not red.
(Otherwise, the sound is distorted.) Select a
lower setting for microphone input level.
3 Press the ENTER button to determine
the microphone input level and then
press the MENU button.
≥ (Microphone input level meter)
appears on the screen.
≥ In Intelligent Auto Mode this setting is set to [AUTO] and cannot be changed.
≥ The microphone input level meter shows the larger of the inputs from the 2 built-in
microphones.
≥ You cannot record with the audio completely muted.
[WIND CUT]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [WIND CUT] # [ON]
[MIC LEVEL]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [MIC LEVEL] # desired setting
[AUTO]: AGC is activated, and the recording level is adjusted
automatically.
[SETr ]: The desired recording level can be set.
AGC is activated, reducing noise.
[SET]: The desired recording level can be set.
You will be able to record natural-sounding audio.
A Left
B Right
C Microphone input level
Lijevo
Desno
Ulazna razina mikrofona
Page: 42
- 43 -
Selecting the picture quality.
You can add a shutter sound when recording still pictures.
[QUALITY]
: [PICTURE] # [QUALITY] # desired setting
: Still pictures with a high picture quality are recorded.
: Priority is given to the number of still pictures recorded. Still pictures are recorded
in normal picture quality.
[SHTR SOUND]
: [PICTURE] # [SHTR SOUND] # desired setting
: Volume low
: Volume high
[OFF]: Cancel the setting.
- 43 -
Selecting the picture quality.
You can add a shutter sound when recording still pictures.
[QUALITY]
: [PICTURE] # [QUALITY] # desired setting
: Still pictures with a high picture quality are recorded.
: Priority is given to the number of still pictures recorded. Still pictures are recorded
in normal picture quality.
[SHTR SOUND]
: [PICTURE] # [SHTR SOUND] # desired setting
: Volume low
: Volume high
[OFF]: Cancel the setting.
- 43 -
Selecting the picture quality.
You can add a shutter sound when recording still pictures.
[QUALITY]
: [PICTURE] # [QUALITY] # desired setting
: Still pictures with a high picture quality are recorded.
: Priority is given to the number of still pictures recorded. Still pictures are recorded
in normal picture quality.
[SHTR SOUND]
: [PICTURE] # [SHTR SOUND] # desired setting
: Volume low
: Volume high
[OFF]: Cancel the setting.
- 43 -
Odabir kvalitete slike.
Kod snimanja fotografija možete dodati zvuk zatvarača.
[QUALITY] (Kvaliteta)
Snimaju se fotografije visoke kvalitete.
Prioritet je dan broju snimljenih fotografija. Fotografije su snimljene u
normalnoj kvaliteti slike.
Niska razina glasnoće
Visoka razina glasnoće
Poništavanje postavke.
[SHTR SOUND] (Zvuk zatvarača)
- 28 -
≥ The items displayed differ depending on the position or settings of the mode switch.
Select the menu.
The screen display can be changed to [ON] (all information displayed) or [OFF] (a portion of
information displayed).
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 17.
It is possible to display and record the time at the travel destination by selecting your home
region and the travel destination.
1 Select [SET WORLD TIME] and press the ENTER button.
≥ If the clock is not set, adjust the clock to the current time. (l 17)
≥ When the [HOME] (your home region) is not set, the message appears. Press the ENTER
button and proceed to Step 3.
2 (Only when setting your home region)
Select [HOME] using 2/1and press the ENTER button.
3 (Only when setting your home region)
Select your home region using
2/1and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press 3 to set daylight saving time.
appears and the summer time
setting is turned on; the time
difference from GMT is set forward by
one hour. Press 3 again to return to
the normal time setting.
4 (Only when setting the region of your
travel destination)
Select [DESTINATION] using 2/1 and press the ENTER button.
≥ When the home region is set for the first time, the screen for selecting home/travel
destination appears after setting the home region successively. If the home region has
already been set once, execute the menu operation for Step 1.
Basic
Using the Setup Menu
: [SETUP] # desired setting
[DISPLAY] [ON]/[OFF]
[EXT. DISPLAY] [SIMPLE]/[DETAIL]/[OFF]
[CLOCK SET]
[SET WORLD TIME]


A The current time
B The time difference from GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time)
≥ The items displayed differ depending on the position or settings of the mode switch.
Select the menu.
The screen display can be changed to [ON] (all information displayed) or [OFF] (a portion of
information displayed).
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 17.
It is possible to display and record the time at the travel destination by selecting your home
region and the travel destination.
1 Select [SET WORLD TIME] and press the ENTER button.
≥ If the clock is not set, adjust the clock to the current time. (l 17)
≥ When the [HOME] (your home region) is not set, the message appears. Press the ENTER
button and proceed to Step 3.
2 (Only when setting your home region)
Select [HOME] using 2/1and press the ENTER button.
3 (Only when setting your home region)
Select your home region using
2/1and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press 3 to set daylight saving time.
appears and the summer time
setting is turned on; the time
difference from GMT is set forward by
one hour. Press 3 again to return to
the normal time setting.
4 (Only when setting the region of your
travel destination)
Select [DESTINATION] using 2/1 and press the ENTER button.
≥ When the home region is set for the first time, the screen for selecting home/travel
Basic
Using the Setup Menu
: [SETUP] # desired setting
[DISPLAY] [ON]/[OFF]
[EXT. DISPLAY] [SIMPLE]/[DETAIL]/[OFF]
[CLOCK SET]
[SET WORLD TIME]


A The current time
B The time difference from GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time)
[PICTURE] (Slika) → [QUALITY] (Kvaliteta) → željena postavka
[PICTURE] (Fotografija) → [SHTR SOUND] (Zvuk zatvarača) → željena
postavka
Page: 43
- 44 -
¬ Change the mode to .
Press the iA/MANUAL button to switch to Manual Mode.
≥ appears on the screen.
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-display the manual icon.
≥ The page changes with each press of 4.
White Balance
Automatic White Balance function may not reproduce natural colours depending on the
scenes or lighting conditions. If so, you can adjust the White Balance manually.
≥ Press the iA/MANUAL button to switch to Manual Mode.
1 Select [WB] using the cursor button.
2 Press 2/1 to select White Balance
Mode.
≥ Select the optimal mode by confirming the colour
on the screen.
Advanced (Recording)
Manual recording
MNL
4/5NEXT
4/5NEXT 5/5NEXT
5/5NEXT
/MANUAL
White Balance
Manual Shutter Speed (l 46)
Iris Adjustment (l 46)
Focus (l 47)
BACK
BACK
- 44 -
¬ Change the mode to .
Press the iA/MANUAL button to switch to Manual Mode.
≥ appears on the screen.
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-display the manual icon.
≥ The page changes with each press of 4.
White Balance
Automatic White Balance function may not reproduce natural colours depending on the
scenes or lighting conditions. If so, you can adjust the White Balance manually.
≥ Press the iA/MANUAL button to switch to Manual Mode.
1 Select [WB] using the cursor button.
2 Press 2/1 to select White Balance
Mode.
≥ Select the optimal mode by confirming the colour
on the screen.
Advanced (Recording)
Manual recording
MNL
4/5NEXT
4/5NEXT 5/5NEXT
5/5NEXT
/MANUAL
White Balance
Manual Shutter Speed (l 46)
Iris Adjustment (l 46)
Focus (l 47)
BACK
BACK
- 44 -
¬ Change the mode to .
Press the iA/MANUAL button to switch to Manual Mode.
≥ appears on the screen.
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-display the manual icon.
≥ The page changes with each press of 4.
White Balance
Automatic White Balance function may not reproduce natural colours depending on the
scenes or lighting conditions. If so, you can adjust the White Balance manually.
≥ Press the iA/MANUAL button to switch to Manual Mode.
1 Select [WB] using the cursor button.
2 Press 2/1 to select White Balance
Mode.
≥ Select the optimal mode by confirming the colour
on the screen.
Advanced (Recording)
Manual recording
MNL
4/5NEXT
4/5NEXT 5/5NEXT
5/5NEXT
/MANUAL
White Balance
Manual Shutter Speed (l 46)
Iris Adjustment (l 46)
Focus (l 47)
BACK
BACK
- 44 -
¬ Change the mode to .
Press the iA/MANUAL button to switch to Manual Mode.
≥ appears on the screen.
≥ Press the ENTER button to display/not-display the manual icon.
≥ The page changes with each press of 4.
White Balance
Automatic White Balance function may not reproduce natural colours depending on the
scenes or lighting conditions. If so, you can adjust the White Balance manually.
≥ Press the iA/MANUAL button to switch to Manual Mode.
1 Select [WB] using the cursor button.
2 Press 2/1 to select White Balance
Mode.
≥ Select the optimal mode by confirming the colour
on the screen.
Advanced (Recording)
Manual recording
MNL
4/5NEXT
4/5NEXT 5/5NEXT
5/5NEXT
/MANUAL
White Balance
Manual Shutter Speed (l 46)
Iris Adjustment (l 46)
Focus (l 47)
BACK
BACK
- 44 -
◊ Promijenite način rada na .
Pritisnite tipku iA/MANUAL za prebacivanje na ručni način rada.
●
● se pojavljuje na zaslonu.
●
●Pritisnite gumb ENTER da biste prikazali/sakrili ikonu za ručno podešavanje.
●
●Stranice se mijenjaju svakim pritiskom na ▼.
Balans bijele boje
Funkcija automatskog balansa bijele boje može dovesti do reproduciranja neprirodnih
boja, ovisno o scenama ili uvjetima osvjetljenja. U tom slučaju, ručno podesite balans
bijele boje.
●
●Pritisnite tipku iA/MANUAL za prebacivanje
na ručni način rada.
1 Kursorskim gumbom odaberite
[WB].
2 Pritisnite ◄/► za odabir postavke
balansa bijele boje.
●
●Odaberite optimalnu postavku tako da
potvrdite boju na zaslonu.
- 30 -
jDuring playback of the slide show
This unit is put into recording pause approx. 0.8 seconds after the LCD monitor is reopened.
≥ When in Quick Start Standby Mode about 60% of the power used in recording pause
mode is being consumed, so the recording time will be reduced.
≥ Quick Start will not work if there is no SD card inserted.
≥ The LCD monitor cannot be closed when using the USB cable, so please disconnect it
from the unit.
≥ Change the mode to .
1 Set [QUICK START] to [ON].
2 Close the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A flashes green and the unit
goes into Quick Start Standby Mode.
3 Open the LCD monitor.
The status indicator A lights red and the unit is put
into recording pause.
≥ Quick Start Standby Mode is cancelled if
jabout 5 minutes have elapsed
jmode is set to
≥ It may take some time for Automatic White Balance to adjust.
≥ In the Quick Start Mode, the zoom magnification becomes approx. 1k.
≥ When it has gone into Quick Start Standby Mode automatically with the [ECONOMY
(BATT)] (l 29)/[ECONOMY (AC)], close the LCD monitor once and open it again.
≥ Turn the unit off using the power button.
[QUICK START] [ON]/[OFF]


Napredne funkcije (Snimanje)
Funkcije snimanja u izbornicima
Balans bijele boje
Brzina zatvarača (ručno) (→ 46)
Podešavanje irisa (→ 46)
Fokusiranje (→ 47)
Page: 44
- 45 -
≥ To return to auto setting, select or press the iA/MANUAL button.
∫ To set the White Balance manually
1 Press 2/1 to select , and fill the screen
with a white subject.
2 Press 3 to set.
≥ When the display stops flashing and then lights
constantly, the setting is complete.
≥ If the display continues flashing, the White
Balance cannot be set. In this case, use other White
Balance Modes.
≥ If you turn on the unit with the lens cover closed, the Auto White Balance will not be
performed correctly. Always open the lens cover before turning on the unit.
≥ When the display flashes, the Manual White Balance previously adjusted is stored.
Whenever recording conditions change, re-set the White Balance.
≥ When setting both the White Balance and the iris/gain, set the White Balance first.
≥ is not displayed on the screen when is being set.
Icon Mode/Recording conditions
Auto White Balance adjustment
Sunny mode: Outdoors under a clear sky
Cloudy mode: Outdoors under cloudy sky
Indoor mode 1: Incandescent light, video lights like in the studio, etc.
Indoor mode 2: Colour fluorescent lamps, sodium lamps in gymnasiums etc.
Manual adjustment mode:
≥ Mercury-vapor lamps, sodium lamps, some fluorescent lights
≥ Lights used for wedding receptions at hotels, stage spotlights in theaters
≥ Sunrise, sunset, etc.
AWB
AWB
BACK
BACK
AWB AWB
- 45 -
Ikona Način rada/uvjeti snimanja
Automatsko podešavanje balansa bijele boje
Sunčano: Na otvorenom, pod vedrim nebom
Oblačno: Na otvorenom, pod oblačnim nebom
U zatvorenome, način rada 1: Svjetlo žarulja sa žarnom niti, video
svjetla, npr. u studijima itd.
U zatvorenome, način rada 2: Obojene fluorescentne cijevi, natrijeve
žarulje u dvoranama itd.
Ručno podešavanje:
●
●Živine žarulje, natrijeve žarulje, određene fluorescentne cijevi
●
●Svjetla koje se koriste za vjenčanja u hotelima, reflektori u kazalištima
●
●Izlazak/zalazak sunca itd.
- 45 -
≥ To return to auto setting, select or press the iA/MANUAL button.
∫ To set the White Balance manually
1 Press 2/1 to select , and fill the screen
with a white subject.
2 Press 3 to set.
≥ When the display stops flashing and then lights
constantly, the setting is complete.
≥ If the display continues flashing, the White
Balance cannot be set. In this case, use other White
Balance Modes.
≥ If you turn on the unit with the lens cover closed, the Auto White Balance will not be
performed correctly. Always open the lens cover before turning on the unit.
≥ When the display flashes, the Manual White Balance previously adjusted is stored.
Whenever recording conditions change, re-set the White Balance.
≥ When setting both the White Balance and the iris/gain, set the White Balance first.
≥ is not displayed on the screen when is being set.
Icon Mode/Recording conditions
Auto White Balance adjustment
Sunny mode: Outdoors under a clear sky
Cloudy mode: Outdoors under cloudy sky
Indoor mode 1: Incandescent light, video lights like in the studio, etc.
Indoor mode 2: Colour fluorescent lamps, sodium lamps in gymnasiums etc.
Manual adjustment mode:
≥ Mercury-vapor lamps, sodium lamps, some fluorescent lights
≥ Lights used for wedding receptions at hotels, stage spotlights in theaters
≥ Sunrise, sunset, etc.
AWB
AWB
BACK
BACK
AWB AWB
- 45 -
≥ To return to auto setting, select or press the iA/MANUAL button.
∫ To set the White Balance manually
1 Press 2/1 to select , and fill the screen
with a white subject.
2 Press 3 to set.
≥ When the display stops flashing and then lights
constantly, the setting is complete.
≥ If the display continues flashing, the White
Balance cannot be set. In this case, use other White
Balance Modes.
≥ If you turn on the unit with the lens cover closed, the Auto White Balance will not be
performed correctly. Always open the lens cover before turning on the unit.
≥ When the display flashes, the Manual White Balance previously adjusted is stored.
Whenever recording conditions change, re-set the White Balance.
≥ When setting both the White Balance and the iris/gain, set the White Balance first.
≥ is not displayed on the screen when is being set.
Icon Mode/Recording conditions
Auto White Balance adjustment
Sunny mode: Outdoors under a clear sky
Cloudy mode: Outdoors under cloudy sky
Indoor mode 1: Incandescent light, video lights like in the studio, etc.
Indoor mode 2: Colour fluorescent lamps, sodium lamps in gymnasiums etc.
Manual adjustment mode:
≥ Mercury-vapor lamps, sodium lamps, some fluorescent lights
≥ Lights used for wedding receptions at hotels, stage spotlights in theaters
≥ Sunrise, sunset, etc.
AWB
AWB
BACK
BACK
AWB AWB
- 45 -
≥ To return to auto setting, select or press the iA/MANUAL button.
∫ To set the White Balance manually
1 Press 2/1 to select , and fill the screen
with a white subject.
2 Press 3 to set.
≥ When the display stops flashing and then lights
constantly, the setting is complete.
≥ If the display continues flashing, the White
Balance cannot be set. In this case, use other White
Balance Modes.
≥ If you turn on the unit with the lens cover closed, the Auto White Balance will not be
performed correctly. Always open the lens cover before turning on the unit.
≥ When the display flashes, the Manual White Balance previously adjusted is stored.
Whenever recording conditions change, re-set the White Balance.
≥ When setting both the White Balance and the iris/gain, set the White Balance first.
≥ is not displayed on the screen when is being set.
Icon Mode/Recording conditions
Auto White Balance adjustment
Sunny mode: Outdoors under a clear sky
Cloudy mode: Outdoors under cloudy sky
Indoor mode 1: Incandescent light, video lights like in the studio, etc.
Indoor mode 2: Colour fluorescent lamps, sodium lamps in gymnasiums etc.
Manual adjustment mode:
≥ Mercury-vapor lamps, sodium lamps, some fluorescent lights
≥ Lights used for wedding receptions at hotels, stage spotlights in theaters
≥ Sunrise, sunset, etc.
AWB
AWB
BACK
BACK
AWB AWB
- 45 -
≥ To return to auto setting, select or press the iA/MANUAL button.
∫ To set the White Balance manually
1 Press 2/1 to select , and fill the screen
with a white subject.
2 Press 3 to set.
≥ When the display stops flashing and then lights
constantly, the setting is complete.
≥ If the display continues flashing, the White
Balance cannot be set. In this case, use other White
Balance Modes.
≥ If you turn on the unit with the lens cover closed, the Auto White Balance will not be
performed correctly. Always open the lens cover before turning on the unit.
≥ When the display flashes, the Manual White Balance previously adjusted is stored.
Whenever recording conditions change, re-set the White Balance.
≥ When setting both the White Balance and the iris/gain, set the White Balance first.
≥ is not displayed on the screen when is being set.
Icon Mode/Recording conditions
Auto White Balance adjustment
Sunny mode: Outdoors under a clear sky
Cloudy mode: Outdoors under cloudy sky
Indoor mode 1: Incandescent light, video lights like in the studio, etc.
Indoor mode 2: Colour fluorescent lamps, sodium lamps in gymnasiums etc.
Manual adjustment mode:
≥ Mercury-vapor lamps, sodium lamps, some fluorescent lights
≥ Lights used for wedding receptions at hotels, stage spotlights in theaters
≥ Sunrise, sunset, etc.
AWB
AWB
BACK
BACK
AWB AWB
- 45 -
≥ To return to auto setting, select or press the iA/MANUAL button.
∫ To set the White Balance manually
1 Press 2/1 to select , and fill the screen
with a white subject.
2 Press 3 to set.
≥ When the display stops flashing and then lights
constantly, the setting is complete.
≥ If the display continues flashing, the White
Balance cannot be set. In this case, use other White
Balance Modes.
≥ If you turn on the unit with the lens cover closed, the Auto White Balance will not be
performed correctly. Always open the lens cover before turning on the unit.
≥ When the display flashes, the Manual White Balance previously adjusted is stored.
Whenever recording conditions change, re-set the White Balance.
≥ When setting both the White Balance and the iris/gain, set the White Balance first.
≥ is not displayed on the screen when is being set.
Icon Mode/Recording conditions
Auto White Balance adjustment
Sunny mode: Outdoors under a clear sky
Cloudy mode: Outdoors under cloudy sky
Indoor mode 1: Incandescent light, video lights like in the studio, etc.
Indoor mode 2: Colour fluorescent lamps, sodium lamps in gymnasiums etc.
Manual adjustment mode:
≥ Mercury-vapor lamps, sodium lamps, some fluorescent lights
≥ Lights used for wedding receptions at hotels, stage spotlights in theaters
≥ Sunrise, sunset, etc.
AWB
AWB
BACK
BACK
AWB AWB
- 45 -
≥ To return to auto setting, select or press the iA/MANUAL button.
∫ To set the White Balance manually
1 Press 2/1 to select , and fill the screen
with a white subject.
2 Press 3 to set.
≥ When the display stops flashing and then lights
constantly, the setting is complete.
≥ If the display continues flashing, the White
Balance cannot be set. In this case, use other White
Balance Modes.
≥ If you turn on the unit with the lens cover closed, the Auto White Balance will not be
performed correctly. Always open the lens cover before turning on the unit.
≥ When the display flashes, the Manual White Balance previously adjusted is stored.
Whenever recording conditions change, re-set the White Balance.
≥ When setting both the White Balance and the iris/gain, set the White Balance first.
≥ is not displayed on the screen when is being set.
Icon Mode/Recording conditions
Auto White Balance adjustment
Sunny mode: Outdoors under a clear sky
Cloudy mode: Outdoors under cloudy sky
Indoor mode 1: Incandescent light, video lights like in the studio, etc.
Indoor mode 2: Colour fluorescent lamps, sodium lamps in gymnasiums etc.
Manual adjustment mode:
≥ Mercury-vapor lamps, sodium lamps, some fluorescent lights
≥ Lights used for wedding receptions at hotels, stage spotlights in theaters
≥ Sunrise, sunset, etc.
AWB
AWB
BACK
BACK
AWB AWB
●
●Za povratak na automatske postavke, odaberite ili pritisnite gumb iA/
MANUAL.
■ Ručno podešavanje balansa bijele boje
1 Pomoću ◄/► odaberite i popunite
zaslon nekim bijelim predmetom.
2 Pritisnite ▲ za podešavanje.
●
●Kada prestane treperiti i počne neprekidno
svijetliti, podešavanje je dovršeno.
●
●Ako na zaslonu i dalje treperi , nije moguće
postaviti balans bijele boje. U tom slučaju koristite
druge postavke za balans bijele boje.
●
●Ako uređaj uključite dok je poklopac objektiva zatvoren, automatsko podešavanje
balansa bijele boje neće biti pravilno izvedeno. Uvijek otvorite poklopac objektiva
prije uključivanja uređaja.
●
●Ako oznaka treperi, prethodno ručno podešena postavka balansa bijele boje je
pohranjena. Svaki put kada se uvjeti snimanja promijene, ponovno postavite balans
bijele boje.
●
●Kada istovremeno podešavate balans bijele boje i iris/jakost, najprije postavite
balans bijele boje.
●
● se ne prikazuje na zaslonu kada se postavlja .
- 45 -
≥ To return to auto setting, select or press the iA/MANUAL button.
∫ To set the White Balance manually
1 Press 2/1 to select , and fill the screen
with a white subject.
2 Press 3 to set.
≥ When the display stops flashing and then lights
constantly, the setting is complete.
≥ If the display continues flashing, the White
Balance cannot be set. In this case, use other White
Balance Modes.
≥ If you turn on the unit with the lens cover closed, the Auto White Balance will not be
performed correctly. Always open the lens cover before turning on the unit.
≥ When the display flashes, the Manual White Balance previously adjusted is stored.
Whenever recording conditions change, re-set the White Balance.
≥ When setting both the White Balance and the iris/gain, set the White Balance first.
≥ is not displayed on the screen when is being set.
Icon Mode/Recording conditions
Auto White Balance adjustment
Sunny mode: Outdoors under a clear sky
Cloudy mode: Outdoors under cloudy sky
Indoor mode 1: Incandescent light, video lights like in the studio, etc.
Indoor mode 2: Colour fluorescent lamps, sodium lamps in gymnasiums etc.
Manual adjustment mode:
≥ Mercury-vapor lamps, sodium lamps, some fluorescent lights
≥ Lights used for wedding receptions at hotels, stage spotlights in theaters
≥ Sunrise, sunset, etc.
AWB
AWB
BACK
BACK
AWB AWB
To return to auto setting, select or press the iA/MANUAL button.
∫ To set the White Balance manually
Press 2/1 to select , and fill the screen
with a white subject.
Press 3 to set.
When the display stops flashing and then lights
constantly, the setting is complete.
If the display continues flashing, the White
Balance cannot be set. In this case, use other White
Balance Modes.
If you turn on the unit with the lens cover closed, the Auto White Balance will not be
performed correctly. Always open the lens cover before turning on the unit.
When the display flashes, the Manual White Balance previously adjusted is stored.
Whenever recording conditions change, re-set the White Balance.
When setting both the White Balance and the iris/gain, set the White Balance first.
is not displayed on the screen when is being set.
Icon Mode/Recording conditions
Auto White Balance adjustment
Sunny mode: Outdoors under a clear sky
Cloudy mode: Outdoors under cloudy sky
Indoor mode 1: Incandescent light, video lights like in the studio, etc.
Indoor mode 2: Colour fluorescent lamps, sodium lamps in gymnasiums etc.
Manual adjustment mode:
≥ Mercury-vapor lamps, sodium lamps, some fluorescent lights
≥ Lights used for wedding receptions at hotels, stage spotlights in theaters
≥ Sunrise, sunset, etc.
AWB
AWB
BACK
BACK
AWB AWB
≥ To return to auto setting, select or press the iA/MANUAL button.
∫ To set the White Balance manually
1 Press 2/1 to select , and fill the screen
with a white subject.
2 Press 3 to set.
≥ When the display stops flashing and then lights
constantly, the setting is complete.
≥ If the display continues flashing, the White
Balance cannot be set. In this case, use other White
Balance Modes.
≥ If you turn on the unit with the lens cover closed, the Auto White Balance will not be
performed correctly. Always open the lens cover before turning on the unit.
≥ When the display flashes, the Manual White Balance previously adjusted is stored.
Whenever recording conditions change, re-set the White Balance.
≥ When setting both the White Balance and the iris/gain, set the White Balance first.
≥ is not displayed on the screen when is being set.
Icon Mode/Recording conditions
Auto White Balance adjustment
Sunny mode: Outdoors under a clear sky
Cloudy mode: Outdoors under cloudy sky
Indoor mode 1: Incandescent light, video lights like in the studio, etc.
Indoor mode 2: Colour fluorescent lamps, sodium lamps in gymnasiums etc.
Manual adjustment mode:
≥ Mercury-vapor lamps, sodium lamps, some fluorescent lights
≥ Lights used for wedding receptions at hotels, stage spotlights in theaters
≥ Sunrise, sunset, etc.
AWB
AWB
BACK
BACK
AWB AWB
≥ To return to auto setting, select or press the iA/MANUAL button.
∫ To set the White Balance manually
1 Press 2/1 to select , and fill the screen
with a white subject.
2 Press 3 to set.
≥ When the display stops flashing and then lights
constantly, the setting is complete.
≥ If the display continues flashing, the White
Balance cannot be set. In this case, use other White
Balance Modes.
≥ If you turn on the unit with the lens cover closed, the Auto White Balance will not be
performed correctly. Always open the lens cover before turning on the unit.
≥ When the display flashes, the Manual White Balance previously adjusted is stored.
Whenever recording conditions change, re-set the White Balance.
≥ When setting both the White Balance and the iris/gain, set the White Balance first.
≥ is not displayed on the screen when is being set.
Icon Mode/Recording conditions
Auto White Balance adjustment
Sunny mode: Outdoors under a clear sky
Cloudy mode: Outdoors under cloudy sky
Indoor mode 1: Incandescent light, video lights like in the studio, etc.
Indoor mode 2: Colour fluorescent lamps, sodium lamps in gymnasiums etc.
Manual adjustment mode:
≥ Mercury-vapor lamps, sodium lamps, some fluorescent lights
≥ Lights used for wedding receptions at hotels, stage spotlights in theaters
≥ Sunrise, sunset, etc.
AWB
AWB
BACK
BACK
AWB AWB
- 45 -
≥ To return to auto setting, select or press the iA/MANUAL button.
∫ To set the White Balance manually
1 Press 2/1 to select , and fill the screen
with a white subject.
2 Press 3 to set.
≥ When the display stops flashing and then lights
constantly, the setting is complete.
≥ If the display continues flashing, the White
Balance cannot be set. In this case, use other White
Balance Modes.
≥ If you turn on the unit with the lens cover closed, the Auto White Balance will not be
performed correctly. Always open the lens cover before turning on the unit.
≥ When the display flashes, the Manual White Balance previously adjusted is stored.
Whenever recording conditions change, re-set the White Balance.
≥ When setting both the White Balance and the iris/gain, set the White Balance first.
≥ is not displayed on the screen when is being set.
Icon Mode/Recording conditions
Auto White Balance adjustment
Sunny mode: Outdoors under a clear sky
Cloudy mode: Outdoors under cloudy sky
Indoor mode 1: Incandescent light, video lights like in the studio, etc.
Indoor mode 2: Colour fluorescent lamps, sodium lamps in gymnasiums et
Manual adjustment mode:
≥ Mercury-vapor lamps, sodium lamps, some fluorescent lights
≥ Lights used for wedding receptions at hotels, stage spotlights in theaters
≥ Sunrise, sunset, etc.
AWB
AWB
BACK
BACK
AWB AWB
auto setting, select or press the iA/MANUAL button.
he White Balance manually
1 to select , and fill the screen
te subject.
o set.
display stops flashing and then lights
e setting is complete.
splay continues flashing, the White
not be set. In this case, use other White
des.
n the unit with the lens cover closed, the Auto White Balance will not be
orrectly. Always open the lens cover before turning on the unit.
display flashes, the Manual White Balance previously adjusted is stored.
cording conditions change, re-set the White Balance.
g both the White Balance and the iris/gain, set the White Balance first.
Mode/Recording conditions
Auto White Balance adjustment
unny mode: Outdoors under a clear sky
Cloudy mode: Outdoors under cloudy sky
ndoor mode 1: Incandescent light, video lights like in the studio, etc.
ndoor mode 2: Colour fluorescent lamps, sodium lamps in gymnasiums etc.
Manual adjustment mode:
Mercury-vapor lamps, sodium lamps, some fluorescent lights
Lights used for wedding receptions at hotels, stage spotlights in theaters
Sunrise, sunset, etc.
AWB
BACK
BACK
≥ To return to auto setting, select or press the iA/MANUAL button.
∫ To set the White Balance manually
1 Press 2/1 to select , and fill the screen
with a white subject.
2 Press 3 to set.
≥ When the display stops flashing and then lights
constantly, the setting is complete.
≥ If the display continues flashing, the White
Balance cannot be set. In this case, use other White
Balance Modes.
≥ If you turn on the unit with the lens cover closed, the Auto White Balance will not
performed correctly. Always open the lens cover before turning on the unit.
≥ When the display flashes, the Manual White Balance previously adjusted is s
Whenever recording conditions change, re-set the White Balance.
≥ When setting both the White Balance and the iris/gain, set the White Balance firs
Icon Mode/Recording conditions
Auto White Balance adjustment
Sunny mode: Outdoors under a clear sky
Cloudy mode: Outdoors under cloudy sky
Indoor mode 1: Incandescent light, video lights like in the studio, etc.
Indoor mode 2: Colour fluorescent lamps, sodium lamps in gymnasiu
Manual adjustment mode:
≥ Mercury-vapor lamps, sodium lamps, some fluorescent lights
≥ Lights used for wedding receptions at hotels, stage spotlights in the
≥ Sunrise, sunset, etc.
AWB
AWB
Page: 45
- 46 -
Manual shutter speed/iris adjustment
Shutter Speed:
Adjust it when recording fast-moving subjects.
Iris:
Adjust it when the screen is too bright or too dark.
≥ Press the iA/MANUAL button to switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
1 Select [SHTR] or [IRIS] using the cursor button.
2 Press 2/1 to adjust settings.
A : Shutter speed:
1/50 to 1/8000
≥ If [AUTO SLOW SHTR] is set to [ON], the
shutter speed will be set between 1/25 and
1/8000.
≥ The shutter speed closer to 1/8000 is faster.
B : Iris/Gain value:
CLOSE !# (F16 to F2.0) !# OPEN !# (0dB to 18dB)
≥ Value closer to CLOSE darken the image.
≥ Value closer to 18dB brighten the image.
≥ When the iris value is adjusted to brighter than OPEN, it changes to the gain value.
≥ To return to auto setting, press the iA/MANUAL button.
≥ When setting both the shutter speed and the iris/gain value, set the shutter speed and then
set the iris/gain value.
Manual shutter speed adjustment
≥ You may see a band of light around an object that is shining very bright, or highly reflective.
≥ During normal playback, image movement may not look smooth.
≥ If you record an extremely bright object or record under indoor lighting, colour and screen
brightness may change or a horizontal line may appear on the screen. In this case, record
in the Intelligent Auto Mode or set the shutter speed to 1/100 in areas where the power
supply frequency is 50 Hz, or 1/125 in areas of 60 Hz.
Manual iris/gain adjustment
≥ If the gain value is increased, the noise on the screen increases.
≥ Depending on the zoom magnification, there are iris values that are not displayed.
ᧂ
OPEN
1/100


BACK
BACK
IRIS
IRIS
IRIS
IRIS
- 46 -
Manual shutter speed/iris adjustment
Shutter Speed:
Adjust it when recording fast-moving subjects.
Iris:
Adjust it when the screen is too bright or too dark.
≥ Press the iA/MANUAL button to switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
1 Select [SHTR] or [IRIS] using the cursor button.
2 Press 2/1 to adjust settings.
A : Shutter speed:
1/50 to 1/8000
≥ If [AUTO SLOW SHTR] is set to [ON], the
shutter speed will be set between 1/25 and
1/8000.
≥ The shutter speed closer to 1/8000 is faster.
B : Iris/Gain value:
CLOSE !# (F16 to F2.0) !# OPEN !# (0dB to 18dB)
≥ Value closer to CLOSE darken the image.
≥ Value closer to 18dB brighten the image.
≥ When the iris value is adjusted to brighter than OPEN, it changes to the gain value.
≥ To return to auto setting, press the iA/MANUAL button.
≥ When setting both the shutter speed and the iris/gain value, set the shutter speed and then
set the iris/gain value.
Manual shutter speed adjustment
≥ You may see a band of light around an object that is shining very bright, or highly reflective.
≥ During normal playback, image movement may not look smooth.
≥ If you record an extremely bright object or record under indoor lighting, colour and screen
brightness may change or a horizontal line may appear on the screen. In this case, record
in the Intelligent Auto Mode or set the shutter speed to 1/100 in areas where the power
supply frequency is 50 Hz, or 1/125 in areas of 60 Hz.
Manual iris/gain adjustment
≥ If the gain value is increased, the noise on the screen increases.
≥ Depending on the zoom magnification, there are iris values that are not displayed.
ᧂ
OPEN
1/100


BACK
BACK
IRIS
IRIS
IRIS
IRIS
- 46 -
Manual shutter speed/iris adjustment
Shutter Speed:
Adjust it when recording fast-moving subjects.
Iris:
Adjust it when the screen is too bright or too dark.
≥ Press the iA/MANUAL button to switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
1 Select [SHTR] or [IRIS] using the cursor button.
2 Press 2/1 to adjust settings.
A : Shutter speed:
1/50 to 1/8000
≥ If [AUTO SLOW SHTR] is set to [ON], the
shutter speed will be set between 1/25 and
1/8000.
≥ The shutter speed closer to 1/8000 is faster.
B : Iris/Gain value:
CLOSE !# (F16 to F2.0) !# OPEN !# (0dB to 18dB)
≥ Value closer to CLOSE darken the image.
≥ Value closer to 18dB brighten the image.
≥ When the iris value is adjusted to brighter than OPEN, it changes to the gain value.
≥ To return to auto setting, press the iA/MANUAL button.
≥ When setting both the shutter speed and the iris/gain value, set the shutter speed and then
set the iris/gain value.
Manual shutter speed adjustment
≥ You may see a band of light around an object that is shining very bright, or highly reflective.
≥ During normal playback, image movement may not look smooth.
≥ If you record an extremely bright object or record under indoor lighting, colour and screen
brightness may change or a horizontal line may appear on the screen. In this case, record
in the Intelligent Auto Mode or set the shutter speed to 1/100 in areas where the power
supply frequency is 50 Hz, or 1/125 in areas of 60 Hz.
Manual iris/gain adjustment
≥ If the gain value is increased, the noise on the screen increases.
≥ Depending on the zoom magnification, there are iris values that are not displayed.
ᧂ
OPEN
1/100


BACK
BACK
IRIS
IRIS
IRIS
IRIS
- 46 -
Ručno podešavanje brzine zatvarača/podešavanje irisa
Brzina zatvarača:
Podesite brzinu zatvarača kod snimanja objekata koji se brzo kreću.
Iris:
Podesite iris (zaslon koji određuje količinu svjetla na foto senzoru) ako je zaslon
presvijetao ili pretaman.
●
●Pritisnite tipku iA/MANUAL za prebacivanje na ručni način rada. (→ 44)
1 Kursorskim gumbom odaberite [SHTR] ili [IRIS].
2 Pritisnite ◄/► za podešavanje.
Brzina zatvarača:
1/50 do 1/8000
●
●Ako je funkcija [AUTO SLOW SHTR]
(Automatsko usporavanje brzine zatvarača)
postavljena na [ON] (Uklj.), brzina zatvarača
bit će između 1/25 i 1/8000.
●
●Brzina zatvarača bliža 1/8000 je brža.
Iris/Jakost:
CLOSE ↔ (F16 do F2.0) ↔ OPEN ↔ (0dB do 18dB)
●
●Vrijednost bliža CLOSE zatamnjuje sliku.
●
●Vrijednost bliža 18 dB posvjetljuje sliku.
●
●Kada je vrijednost irisa podešena na vrijednost svjetliju od OPEN, ona se mijenja na
vrijednost razine signala.
●
●Za povratak na automatske postavke pritisnite gumb iA/MANUAL.
●
●Kada istovremeno podešavate brzinu zatvarača i iris/jakost, prvo postavite brzinu
zatvarača, a nakon toga iris/jakost.
Ručno podešavanje brzine zatvarača
●
●Oko objekata koji izrazito sjaje ili jako odbijaju svjetlost može se vidjeti traka svjetla.
●
●Za vrijeme normalne reprodukcije kretanje slike neće biti bez zastajanja.
●
●Ako snimate izrazito blještavi objekt ili snimate pod unutarnjom rasvjetom, može
doći do promjene u boji i svjetlini ili se na zaslonu može pojaviti vodoravna crta. U
tom slučaju, snimajte u inteligentnom automatskom načinu rada ili postavite brzinu
zatvarača na 1/100 na područjima na kojima je frekvencija napajanja 50 Hz, ili 1/125
na područjima na kojima iznosi 60 Hz.
Ručno podešavanje jakosti/irisa
●
●Ako se poveća jakost, povećavaju se smetnje na zaslonu.
●
●Ovisno o uvećanju zuma, određene vrijednosti irisa neće biti prikazane.
Page: 46
- 47 -
Recording with Manual Focus
If auto focusing is difficult due to the conditions, then use Manual Focus.
≥ Press the iA/MANUAL button to switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
1 Press 4 to switch the manual icon.
2 Select [MF] using the cursor button to change to Manual Focus.
≥ MF appears on the screen.
3 Press 2/1 to adjust the focus.
≥ To restore Auto Focus, select [AF] or press the iA/MANUAL button.
: To focus on a close subject
: To focus on a faraway subject
MF
MF
5/5NEXT
5/5NEXT
MF
MF
- 47 -
Recording with Manual Focus
If auto focusing is difficult due to the conditions, then use Manual Focus.
≥ Press the iA/MANUAL button to switch to Manual Mode. (l 44)
1 Press 4 to switch the manual icon.
2 Select [MF] using the cursor button to change to Manual Focus.
≥ MF appears on the screen.
3 Press 2/1 to adjust the focus.
≥ To restore Auto Focus, select [AF] or press the iA/MANUAL button.
: To focus on a close subject
: To focus on a faraway subject
MF
MF
5/5NEXT
5/5NEXT
MF
MF
- 47 -
Snimanje pomoću ručnog fokusa
Ako je automatsko fokusiranje zbog uvjeta snimanja otežano, koristite ručni fokus.
●
●Pritisnite tipku iA/MANUAL za prebacivanje na ručni način rada. (→ 44)
1 Pritisnite ▼ za prebacivanje na ikonu ručnog podešavanja.
2 Kursorskim gumbom odaberite [MF] da biste prešli na ručni fokus.
●
●Na zaslonu se pojavljuje MF.
3 Izoštrite pomoću ◄/►.
Za fokusiranje objekta koji je blizu
Za fokusiranje objekta koji je daleko
●
●Za povratak na automatsko fokusiranje odaberite [AF] ili pritisnite gumb iA/MANUAL.
Page: 47
- 48 -
Motion picture playback using operation icon
For details on the basic playback operations, refer to page 24.
Advanced (Playback)
Playback Operations
Playback
operation
Cursor button/
Playback display
Operating steps
Fast
forward/
rewind
playback
During Playback
Press 1 of the cursor button during
playback to fast forward.
(Press 2 to rewind.)
≥ Press again to speed up fast forward/rewind
(the screen display will change from 5 to
).
≥ Normal playback is restored when you press 3.
Slow-
motion
playback
During Pause
With the playback paused, press and hold 1
of the cursor button.
(Press and hold 2 for slow rewind playback)
Slow-motion playback will continue over the
period that the button is pressed.
≥ Normal playback is restored when you press 3.
≥ When slow-motion pictures are played back in
reverse, they will be shown continuously at
approximately 2/5 the speed of normal
playback. (MP4)
≥ When slow-motion pictures are played back in
reverse, they will be shown continuously at
approximately 2/3rd
the speed of normal
playback. (iFrame)
Frame-by-
frame
playback
The motion
picture is
advanced
one frame
at a time.
With the playback paused, press 1 of the
cursor button.
(Press 2 to advance the frames one at a time
in the reverse direction.)
≥ Normal playback is restored when you press
3.
≥ When the frames are advanced one at a time
in the reverse direction, they will be shown in
intervals of 0.5 seconds (MP4).
≥ When the frames are advanced one at a time
in the reverse direction, they will be shown in
intervals of 1 second (iFrame).
- 48 -
Motion picture playback using operation icon
For details on the basic playback operations, refer to page 24.
Advanced (Playback)
Playback Operations
Playback
operation
Cursor button/
Playback display
Operating steps
Fast
forward/
rewind
playback
During Playback
Press 1 of the cursor button during
playback to fast forward.
(Press 2 to rewind.)
≥ Press again to speed up fast forward/rewind
(the screen display will change from 5 to
).
≥ Normal playback is restored when you press 3.
Slow-
motion
playback
During Pause
With the playback paused, press and hold 1
of the cursor button.
(Press and hold 2 for slow rewind playback)
Slow-motion playback will continue over the
period that the button is pressed.
≥ Normal playback is restored when you press 3.
≥ When slow-motion pictures are played back in
reverse, they will be shown continuously at
approximately 2/5 the speed of normal
playback. (MP4)
≥ When slow-motion pictures are played back in
reverse, they will be shown continuously at
approximately 2/3rd
the speed of normal
playback. (iFrame)
Frame-by-
frame
playback
The motion
picture is
advanced
one frame
at a time.
With the playback paused, press 1 of the
cursor button.
(Press 2 to advance the frames one at a time
in the reverse direction.)
≥ Normal playback is restored when you press
3.
≥ When the frames are advanced one at a time
in the reverse direction, they will be shown in
intervals of 0.5 seconds (MP4).
≥ When the frames are advanced one at a time
in the reverse direction, they will be shown in
intervals of 1 second (iFrame).
- 48 -
Reprodukcija videozapisa pomoću funkcijske ikone
Detalje o osnovnoj reprodukciji potražite na str. 24.
Reprodukcija
Kursorski gumb/
Prikaz reprodukcije
Postupak
Ubrzana
reprodukcija
unaprijed/
unatrag
Tijekom
reprodukcije
Za ubrzano pretraživanje unaprijed,
tijekom reprodukcije pritisnite ► na
kursorskom gumbu. (pritisnite ◄ za
pretraživanje unatrag).
●
●Ponovno pritisnite da biste ubrzali brzo
pretraživanje unaprijed/unatrag (prikaz na
zaslonu promijenit će se iz ►
► u ►
►
►
).
●
●Normalna reprodukcija ponovno se
uspostavlja kada pritisnete ▲.
Usporena
reprodukcija
Tijekom pauze
Dok je reprodukcija privremeno
zaustavljena, pritisnite i zadržite ► na
kursorskom gumbu.
(Pritisnite i zadržite ◄ za usporenu
reprodukciju unatrag)
Usporena reprodukcija nastavlja se dok
god je taj gumb pritisnut.
●
●Normalna reprodukcija ponovno se
uspostavlja kada pritisnete ▲.
●
●Kada se slike reproduciraju usporeno
unatrag, one će se prikazivati bez
prekida brzinom od približno 2/5 brzine
uobičajene reprodukcije. (MP4)
●
●Kada se slike reproduciraju usporeno
unatrag, one će se prikazivati bez
prekida brzinom od približno 2/3 brzine
uobičajene reprodukcije. [iFrame]
Reprodukcija
kadar po
kadar
Videozapis se
reproducira
kadar po
kadar.
Dok je reprodukcija privremeno
zaustavljena, pritisnite ► na
kursorskom gumbu
(pritisnite ◄ za reprodukciju kadar po
kadar u suprotnom smjeru).
●
●Normalna reprodukcija se vraća kad
pritisnete ▲.
●
●Kada se kadrovi reproduciraju jedan po
jedan u suprotnome smjeru, prikazivat će
se u intervalima od 0,5 sekundi (MP4).
●
●Kada se kadrovi reproduciraju jedan po
jedan u suprotnome smjeru, bit će prikazani
u intervalima od 1 sekunde (iFrame).
Napredne funkcije (Reprodukcija)
Reprodukcija
- 48 -
Motion picture playback using operation icon
For details on the basic playback operations, refer to page 24.
Advanced (Playback)
Playback Operations
Playback
operation
Cursor button/
Playback display
Operating steps
Fast
forward/
rewind
playback
During Playback
Press 1 of the cursor button during
playback to fast forward.
(Press 2 to rewind.)
≥ Press again to speed up fast forward/rewind
(the screen display will change from 5 to
).
≥ Normal playback is restored when you press 3.
Slow-
motion
playback
During Pause
With the playback paused, press and hold 1
of the cursor button.
(Press and hold 2 for slow rewind playback)
Slow-motion playback will continue over the
period that the button is pressed.
≥ Normal playback is restored when you press 3.
≥ When slow-motion pictures are played back in
reverse, they will be shown continuously at
approximately 2/5 the speed of normal
playback. (MP4)
≥ When slow-motion pictures are played back in
reverse, they will be shown continuously at
approximately 2/3rd
the speed of normal
playback. (iFrame)
Frame-by-
frame
playback
The motion
picture is
advanced
one frame
at a time.
With the playback paused, press 1 of the
cursor button.
(Press 2 to advance the frames one at a time
in the reverse direction.)
≥ Normal playback is restored when you press
3.
≥ When the frames are advanced one at a time
in the reverse direction, they will be shown in
intervals of 0.5 seconds (MP4).
≥ When the frames are advanced one at a time
in the reverse direction, they will be shown in
intervals of 1 second (iFrame).
- 48 -
Motion picture playback using operation icon
For details on the basic playback operations, refer to page 24.
Advanced (Playback)
Playback Operations
Playback
operation
Cursor button/
Playback display
Operating steps
Fast
forward/
rewind
playback
During Playback
Press 1 of the cursor button during
playback to fast forward.
(Press 2 to rewind.)
≥ Press again to speed up fast forward/rewind
(the screen display will change from 5 to
).
≥ Normal playback is restored when you press 3.
Slow-
motion
playback
During Pause
With the playback paused, press and hold 1
of the cursor button.
(Press and hold 2 for slow rewind playback)
Slow-motion playback will continue over the
period that the button is pressed.
≥ Normal playback is restored when you press 3.
≥ When slow-motion pictures are played back in
reverse, they will be shown continuously at
approximately 2/5 the speed of normal
playback. (MP4)
≥ When slow-motion pictures are played back in
reverse, they will be shown continuously at
approximately 2/3rd
the speed of normal
playback. (iFrame)
Frame-by-
frame
playback
The motion
picture is
advanced
one frame
at a time.
With the playback paused, press 1 of the
cursor button.
(Press 2 to advance the frames one at a time
in the reverse direction.)
≥ Normal playback is restored when you press
3.
≥ When the frames are advanced one at a time
in the reverse direction, they will be shown in
intervals of 0.5 seconds (MP4).
≥ When the frames are advanced one at a time
in the reverse direction, they will be shown in
intervals of 1 second (iFrame).
Page: 48
- 49 -
Izrada fotografije iz videozapisa
Pojedini kadar snimljenog videozapisa može se spremiti kao fotografija.
Veličina fotografije koju želite kreirati ovisi o načinu snimanja snimljenog videozapisa.
Pritisnite gumb na mjestu na kojemu želite spremiti fotografiju
tijekom reprodukcije.
●
●Preporučuje se korištenje pauze, usporene reprodukcije i reprodukcije kadar po kadar.
●
●Datum kada je videozapis snimljen sprema se kao datum fotografije.
●
●Kvaliteta će se razlikovati u odnosu na uobičajenu fotografiju.
Ponavljanje reprodukcije
Reproduciranje prvog kadra započinje nakon što se završi reprodukcija posljednjeg kadra.
Kod prikaza na cijelom zaslonu prikazuje se pokazatelj .
●
●Sve se scene reproduciraju s ponavljanjem (kod reproduciranja videozapisa prema
datumu, svi kadrovi snimljeni na odabrani datum reproduciraju se s ponavljanjem).
Način snimanja Format slike
Format slike nakon kreiranja
fotografije
[1280x720/50p]
16:9
1280X720
[iFrame] 960x540
[640x480/50p] 4:3 640x480
- 49 -
Creating still picture from motion picture
A single frame from the recorded motion picture can be saved as a still picture.
Picture size of the still picture to be created will differ depending on the recording mode of the
recorded motion picture.
Press the button at the location to be saved as a still picture during
the playback.
≥ It is convenient to use Pause, Slow-motion Playback and Frame-by-frame Playback.
≥ Date the motion picture was recorded will be registered as date of the still picture.
≥ Quality will be different from the normal still picture.
Repeat playback
Playback of the first scene starts after playback of the last scene finishes.
The indication appears on the full screen views.
≥ All the scenes are played back repeatedly. (When playing back motion pictures by date, all
the scenes on the selected date are played back repeatedly.)
Recording mode Aspect ratio Picture size after creating still picture
[1280k720/50p]
16:9
1280k720
[iFrame] 960k540
[640k480/50p] 4:3 640k480
: [VIDEO SETUP] # [REPEAT PLAY] # [ON]
0.9M
0.5M
0.3M
- 49 -
Creating still picture from motion picture
A single frame from the recorded motion picture can be saved as a still picture.
Picture size of the still picture to be created will differ depending on the recording mode of the
recorded motion picture.
Press the button at the location to be saved as a still picture during
the playback.
≥ It is convenient to use Pause, Slow-motion Playback and Frame-by-frame Playback.
≥ Date the motion picture was recorded will be registered as date of the still picture.
≥ Quality will be different from the normal still picture.
Repeat playback
Playback of the first scene starts after playback of the last scene finishes.
The indication appears on the full screen views.
≥ All the scenes are played back repeatedly. (When playing back motion pictures by date, all
the scenes on the selected date are played back repeatedly.)
Recording mode Aspect ratio Picture size after creating still picture
[1280k720/50p]
16:9
1280k720
[iFrame] 960k540
[640k480/50p] 4:3 640k480
: [VIDEO SETUP] # [REPEAT PLAY] # [ON]
0.9M
0.5M
0.3M
- 49 -
Creating still picture from motion picture
A single frame from the recorded motion picture can be saved as a still picture.
Picture size of the still picture to be created will differ depending on the recording mode of the
recorded motion picture.
Press the button at the location to be saved as a still picture during
the playback.
≥ It is convenient to use Pause, Slow-motion Playback and Frame-by-frame Playback.
≥ Date the motion picture was recorded will be registered as date of the still picture.
≥ Quality will be different from the normal still picture.
Repeat playback
Playback of the first scene starts after playback of the last scene finishes.
The indication appears on the full screen views.
≥ All the scenes are played back repeatedly. (When playing back motion pictures by date, all
the scenes on the selected date are played back repeatedly.)
Recording mode Aspect ratio Picture size after creating still picture
[1280k720/50p]
16:9
1280k720
[iFrame] 960k540
[640k480/50p] 4:3 640k480
: [VIDEO SETUP] # [REPEAT PLAY] # [ON]
0.9M
0.5M
0.3M
- 49 -
Creating still picture from motion picture
A single frame from the recorded motion picture can be saved as a still picture.
Picture size of the still picture to be created will differ depending on the recording mode of the
recorded motion picture.
Press the button at the location to be saved as a still picture during
the playback.
≥ It is convenient to use Pause, Slow-motion Playback and Frame-by-frame Playback.
≥ Date the motion picture was recorded will be registered as date of the still picture.
≥ Quality will be different from the normal still picture.
Repeat playback
Playback of the first scene starts after playback of the last scene finishes.
The indication appears on the full screen views.
≥ All the scenes are played back repeatedly. (When playing back motion pictures by date, all
the scenes on the selected date are played back repeatedly.)
Recording mode Aspect ratio Picture size after creating still picture
[1280k720/50p]
16:9
1280k720
[iFrame] 960k540
[640k480/50p] 4:3 640k480
: [VIDEO SETUP] # [REPEAT PLAY] # [ON]
0.9M
0.5M
0.3M
- 49 -
Creating still picture from motion picture
A single frame from the recorded motion picture can be saved as a still picture.
Picture size of the still picture to be created will differ depending on the recording mode of the
recorded motion picture.
Press the button at the location to be saved as a still picture during
the playback.
≥ It is convenient to use Pause, Slow-motion Playback and Frame-by-frame Playback.
≥ Date the motion picture was recorded will be registered as date of the still picture.
≥ Quality will be different from the normal still picture.
Repeat playback
Playback of the first scene starts after playback of the last scene finishes.
The indication appears on the full screen views.
≥ All the scenes are played back repeatedly. (When playing back motion pictures by date, all
the scenes on the selected date are played back repeatedly.)
Recording mode Aspect ratio Picture size after creating still picture
[1280k720/50p]
16:9
1280k720
[iFrame] 960k540
[640k480/50p] 4:3 640k480
: [VIDEO SETUP] # [REPEAT PLAY] # [ON]
0.9M
0.5M
0.3M
- 49 -
Creating still picture from motion picture
A single frame from the recorded motion picture can be saved as a still picture.
Picture size of the still picture to be created will differ depending on the recording mode of the
recorded motion picture.
Press the button at the location to be saved as a still picture during
the playback.
≥ It is convenient to use Pause, Slow-motion Playback and Frame-by-frame Playback.
≥ Date the motion picture was recorded will be registered as date of the still picture.
≥ Quality will be different from the normal still picture.
Repeat playback
Playback of the first scene starts after playback of the last scene finishes.
The indication appears on the full screen views.
≥ All the scenes are played back repeatedly. (When playing back motion pictures by date, all
the scenes on the selected date are played back repeatedly.)
Recording mode Aspect ratio Picture size after creating still picture
[1280k720/50p]
16:9
1280k720
[iFrame] 960k540
[640k480/50p] 4:3 640k480
: [VIDEO SETUP] # [REPEAT PLAY] # [ON]
0.9M
0.5M
0.3M
≥ The items displayed differ depending on the position or settings of the mode switch.
Select the menu.
The screen display can be changed to [ON] (all information displayed) or [OFF] (a portion of
information displayed).
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 17.
It is possible to display and record the time at the travel destination by selecting your home
region and the travel destination.
1 Select [SET WORLD TIME] and press the ENTER button.
≥ If the clock is not set, adjust the clock to the current time. (l 17)
≥ When the [HOME] (your home region) is not set, the message appears. Press the ENTER
button and proceed to Step 3.
2 (Only when setting your home region)
Select [HOME] using 2/1and press the ENTER button.
3 (Only when setting your home region)
Select your home region using
2/1and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press 3 to set daylight saving time.
appears and the summer time
Basic
Using the Setup Menu
: [SETUP] # desired setting
[DISPLAY] [ON]/[OFF]
[EXT. DISPLAY] [SIMPLE]/[DETAIL]/[OFF]
[CLOCK SET]
[SET WORLD TIME]


[VIDEO SETUP] (Postavke videozapisa) → [REPEAT PLAY] (Ponavljanje
reprodukcije) → [ON] (Uklj)
- 49 -
Creating still picture from motio
A single frame from the recorded motion picture can b
Picture size of the still picture to be created will differ de
recorded motion picture.
Press the button at the location to be s
the playback.
≥ It is convenient to use Pause, Slow-motion Playback
≥ Date the motion picture was recorded will be registe
≥ Quality will be different from the normal still picture.
Repeat playback
Playback of the first scene starts after playback of the
The indication appears on the full screen views.
≥ All the scenes are played back repeatedly. (When pla
the scenes on the selected date are played back rep
Recording mode Aspect ratio Pictu
[1280k720/50p]
16:9
[iFrame]
[640k480/50p] 4:3
: [VIDEO SETUP] # [REPEAT PLAY] # [ON]
0.9M
0.5M
0.3M
Page: 49
- 50 -
Resuming the previous playback
If playback of a scene was stopped halfway, the playback can be resumed from where it was
stopped.
If playback of a motion picture is stopped, appears on the thumbnail view of the stopped
scene.
≥ The memorised resume position is cleared if you turn off the unit or change the mode. (The
setting of [RESUME PLAY] does not change.)
Zooming in on a still picture during playback
(Playback zoom)
You can zoom in on still pictures during playback.
1 Move the zoom lever to side.
≥ You can zoom to a maximum of 4a. (k1 # k2 # k4)
2 Shift the position of the zoomed
portion using the cursor button.
≥ The location of the zoom displays for about
1 second when zooming in (zooming out) or
moving the displayed location.
≥ The more picture is enlarged, the more its
quality deteriorates.
Zooming out from the zoomed still picture
Move the zoom lever to side to zoom out. (k4 # k2 # k1)
: [VIDEO SETUP] # [RESUME PLAY] # [ON]
Return
Return
A Displayed location of
the zoom
- 50 -
Resuming the previous playback
If playback of a scene was stopped halfway, the playback can be resumed from where it was
stopped.
If playback of a motion picture is stopped, appears on the thumbnail view of the stopped
scene.
≥ The memorised resume position is cleared if you turn off the unit or change the mode. (The
setting of [RESUME PLAY] does not change.)
Zooming in on a still picture during playback
(Playback zoom)
You can zoom in on still pictures during playback.
1 Move the zoom lever to side.
≥ You can zoom to a maximum of 4a. (k1 # k2 # k4)
2 Shift the position of the zoomed
portion using the cursor button.
≥ The location of the zoom displays for about
1 second when zooming in (zooming out) or
moving the displayed location.
≥ The more picture is enlarged, the more its
quality deteriorates.
Zooming out from the zoomed still picture
Move the zoom lever to side to zoom out. (k4 # k2 # k1)
: [VIDEO SETUP] # [RESUME PLAY] # [ON]
Return
Return
A Displayed location of
the zoom
- 50 -
Resuming the previous playback
If playback of a scene was stopped halfway, the playback can be resumed from where it was
stopped.
If playback of a motion picture is stopped, appears on the thumbnail view of the stopped
scene.
≥ The memorised resume position is cleared if you turn off the unit or change the mode. (The
setting of [RESUME PLAY] does not change.)
Zooming in on a still picture during playback
(Playback zoom)
You can zoom in on still pictures during playback.
1 Move the zoom lever to side.
≥ You can zoom to a maximum of 4a. (k1 # k2 # k4)
2 Shift the position of the zoomed
portion using the cursor button.
≥ The location of the zoom displays for about
1 second when zooming in (zooming out) or
moving the displayed location.
≥ The more picture is enlarged, the more its
quality deteriorates.
Zooming out from the zoomed still picture
Move the zoom lever to side to zoom out. (k4 # k2 # k1)
: [VIDEO SETUP] # [RESUME PLAY] # [ON]
Return
Return
A Displayed location of
the zoom
- 50 -
Resuming the previous playback
If playback of a scene was stopped halfway, the playback can be resumed from where it was
stopped.
If playback of a motion picture is stopped, appears on the thumbnail view of the stopped
scene.
≥ The memorised resume position is cleared if you turn off the unit or change the mode. (The
setting of [RESUME PLAY] does not change.)
Zooming in on a still picture during playback
(Playback zoom)
You can zoom in on still pictures during playback.
1 Move the zoom lever to side.
≥ You can zoom to a maximum of 4a. (k1 # k2 # k4)
2 Shift the position of the zoomed
portion using the cursor button.
≥ The location of the zoom displays for about
1 second when zooming in (zooming out) or
moving the displayed location.
≥ The more picture is enlarged, the more its
quality deteriorates.
Zooming out from the zoomed still picture
Move the zoom lever to side to zoom out. (k4 # k2 # k1)
: [VIDEO SETUP] # [RESUME PLAY] # [ON]
Return
Return
A Displayed location of
the zoom
- 50 -
Nastavak reprodukcije u slučaju prekida
Ako je scena zaustavljena tijekom reprodukcije, ona se može nastaviti od mjesta gdje
je zaustavljena.
Ako je reproduciranje videozapisa zaustavljeno, na prikazu minijature zaustavljene
scene pojavljuje se .
●
●Ako isključite uređaj ili promijenite način rada, pohranjeni se položaj za nastavak
reprodukcije briše (postavka [RESUME PLAY] (Nastavak reprodukcije) ne mijenja se).
Povećavanje fotografije za vrijeme reprodukcije
(zumiranje reprodukcije)
Tijekom reprodukcije možete povećati fotografiju.
1 Pomaknite ručicu zuma u stranu .
●
●Sliku možete uvećati do 4x. (X1 → X2 → X4)
2 Kursorskim gumbom promijenite
položaj uvećanog dijela.
●
●Položaj zuma prikazuje se otprilike 1
sekundu prilikom približavanja (udaljavanja)
ili pomicanja prikazanog položaja.
●
●Uvećanjem fotografije smanjuje se njezina
kvaliteta.
Smanjivanje uvećane fotografije
Pomaknite ručicu zuma prema strani za umanjenje. (X4 → X2 → X1)
- 49 -
Creating still picture from motion picture
A single frame from the recorded motion picture can be saved as a still picture.
Picture size of the still picture to be created will differ depending on the recording mode of the
recorded motion picture.
Press the button at the location to be saved as a still picture during
the playback.
≥ It is convenient to use Pause, Slow-motion Playback and Frame-by-frame Playback.
≥ Date the motion picture was recorded will be registered as date of the still picture.
≥ Quality will be different from the normal still picture.
Repeat playback
Playback of the first scene starts after playback of the last scene finishes.
The indication appears on the full screen views.
≥ All the scenes are played back repeatedly. (When playing back motion pictures by date, all
the scenes on the selected date are played back repeatedly.)
Recording mode Aspect ratio Picture size after creating still picture
[1280k720/50p]
16:9
1280k720
[iFrame] 960k540
[640k480/50p] 4:3 640k480
: [VIDEO SETUP] # [REPEAT PLAY] # [ON]
0.9M
0.5M
0.3M
- 28 -
≥ The items displayed differ depending on the position or settings of the mode switch.
Select the menu.
The screen display can be changed to [ON] (all information displayed) or [OFF] (a portion of
information displayed).
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 17.
It is possible to display and record the time at the travel destination by selecting your home
region and the travel destination.
1 Select [SET WORLD TIME] and press the ENTER button.
≥ If the clock is not set, adjust the clock to the current time. (l 17)
≥ When the [HOME] (your home region) is not set, the message appears. Press the ENTER
button and proceed to Step 3.
2 (Only when setting your home region)
Select [HOME] using 2/1and press the ENTER button.
3 (Only when setting your home region)
Select your home region using
2/1and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press 3 to set daylight saving time.
appears and the summer time
setting is turned on; the time
difference from GMT is set forward by
one hour. Press 3 again to return to
the normal time setting.
4 (Only when setting the region of your
travel destination)
Select [DESTINATION] using 2/1 and press the ENTER button.
≥ When the home region is set for the first time, the screen for selecting home/travel
destination appears after setting the home region successively. If the home region has
already been set once, execute the menu operation for Step 1.
Basic
Using the Setup Menu
: [SETUP] # desired setting
[DISPLAY] [ON]/[OFF]
[EXT. DISPLAY] [SIMPLE]/[DETAIL]/[OFF]
[CLOCK SET]
[SET WORLD TIME]


A The current time
B The time difference from GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time)
[VIDEO SETUP] → [RESUME PLAY] → [ON]
- 50 -
esuming the previous playback
ayback of a scene was stopped halfway, the playback can be resumed from where it was
pped.
ayback of a motion picture is stopped, appears on the thumbnail view of the stopped
ne.
he memorised resume position is cleared if you turn off the unit or change the mode. (The
etting of [RESUME PLAY] does not change.)
ooming in on a still picture during playback
layback zoom)
can zoom in on still pictures during playback.
Move the zoom lever to side.
ou can zoom to a maximum of 4a. (k1 # k2 # k4)
Shift the position of the zoomed
portion using the cursor button.
he location of the zoom displays for about
second when zooming in (zooming out) or
oving the displayed location.
he more picture is enlarged, the more its
uality deteriorates.
oming out from the zoomed still picture
ve the zoom lever to side to zoom out. (k4 # k2 # k1)
: [VIDEO SETUP] # [RESUME PLAY] # [ON]
Return
Return
A Displayed location of
the zoom
- 50 -
Resuming the previous playback
If playback of a scene was stopped halfway, the playback can be resumed from where it was
stopped.
If playback of a motion picture is stopped, appears on the thumbnail view of the stopped
scene.
≥ The memorised resume position is cleared if you turn off the unit or change the mode. (The
setting of [RESUME PLAY] does not change.)
Zooming in on a still picture during playback
(Playback zoom)
You can zoom in on still pictures during playback.
1 Move the zoom lever to side.
≥ You can zoom to a maximum of 4a. (k1 # k2 # k4)
2 Shift the position of the zoomed
portion using the cursor button.
≥ The location of the zoom displays for about
1 second when zooming in (zooming out) or
moving the displayed location.
≥ The more picture is enlarged, the more its
quality deteriorates.
Zooming out from the zoomed still picture
Move the zoom lever to side to zoom out. (k4 # k2 # k1)
: [VIDEO SETUP] # [RESUME PLAY] # [ON]
Return
Return
A Displayed location of
the zoom
Prikazani položaj
zuma
- 50 -
Resuming the previous playback
If playback of a scene was stopped halfway, the playback can be resumed from where it was
stopped.
If playback of a motion picture is stopped, appears on the thumbnail view of the stopped
scene.
≥ The memorised resume position is cleared if you turn off the unit or change the mode. (The
setting of [RESUME PLAY] does not change.)
Zooming in on a still picture during playback
(Playback zoom)
You can zoom in on still pictures during playback.
1 Move the zoom lever to side.
≥ You can zoom to a maximum of 4a. (k1 # k2 # k4)
2 Shift the position of the zoomed
portion using the cursor button.
≥ The location of the zoom displays for about
1 second when zooming in (zooming out) or
moving the displayed location.
≥ The more picture is enlarged, the more its
quality deteriorates.
Zooming out from the zoomed still picture
Move the zoom lever to side to zoom out. (k4 # k2 # k1)
: [VIDEO SETUP] # [RESUME PLAY] # [ON]
Return
Return
A Displayed location of
the zoom
Page: 50
- 51 -
Playing back motion pictures/still pictures by date
The scenes or the still pictures recorded on the same day can be played back in succession.
1 Select the date select icon
using the cursor button, then
press the ENTER button.
2 Select the playback date, then press the ENTER button.
The scenes or the still pictures recorded on the date selected are displayed as thumbnails.
3 Select the scene or the still picture to be played back, then press the
ENTER button.
≥ Playing back of all the scenes or the still pictures returns if the unit is turned off or the mode
is changed.
≥ Even if the scenes have been recorded on the same day, they will be displayed separately
in the following cases. -1, -2 ... are added after the date displayed on the list by date.
jWhen the number of scenes exceeds 99
jWhen the number of recorded still pictures exceeds 999
≥ Scenes recorded on the same day are displayed separately if the recording mode has
been changed between recording them. The icon that appears behind the date on the list
by date changes as follows.
j : Scenes recorded using the [1280k720/50p] recording mode.
j : Scenes recorded using the [iFrame] recording mode.
j : Scenes recorded using the [640k480/50p] recording mode.
≥ is displayed after the date in the list by date for the still pictures created from the motion
picture. (l 49)
Advanced (Playback)
Various playback functions
A Date select icon
- 51 -
Playing back motion pictures/still pictures by date
The scenes or the still pictures recorded on the same day can be played back in succession.
1 Select the date select icon
using the cursor button, then
press the ENTER button.
2 Select the playback date, then press the ENTER button.
The scenes or the still pictures recorded on the date selected are displayed as thumbnails.
3 Select the scene or the still picture to be played back, then press the
ENTER button.
≥ Playing back of all the scenes or the still pictures returns if the unit is turned off or the mode
is changed.
≥ Even if the scenes have been recorded on the same day, they will be displayed separately
in the following cases. -1, -2 ... are added after the date displayed on the list by date.
jWhen the number of scenes exceeds 99
jWhen the number of recorded still pictures exceeds 999
≥ Scenes recorded on the same day are displayed separately if the recording mode has
been changed between recording them. The icon that appears behind the date on the list
by date changes as follows.
j : Scenes recorded using the [1280k720/50p] recording mode.
j : Scenes recorded using the [iFrame] recording mode.
j : Scenes recorded using the [640k480/50p] recording mode.
≥ is displayed after the date in the list by date for the still pictures created from the motion
picture. (l 49)
Advanced (Playback)
Various playback functions
A Date select icon
- 51 -
Playing back motion pictures/still pictures by date
The scenes or the still pictures recorded on the same day can be played back in succession.
1 Select the date select icon
using the cursor button, then
press the ENTER button.
2 Select the playback date, then press the ENTER button.
The scenes or the still pictures recorded on the date selected are displayed as thumbnails.
3 Select the scene or the still picture to be played back, then press the
ENTER button.
≥ Playing back of all the scenes or the still pictures returns if the unit is turned off or the mode
is changed.
≥ Even if the scenes have been recorded on the same day, they will be displayed separately
in the following cases. -1, -2 ... are added after the date displayed on the list by date.
jWhen the number of scenes exceeds 99
jWhen the number of recorded still pictures exceeds 999
≥ Scenes recorded on the same day are displayed separately if the recording mode has
been changed between recording them. The icon that appears behind the date on the list
by date changes as follows.
j : Scenes recorded using the [1280k720/50p] recording mode.
j : Scenes recorded using the [iFrame] recording mode.
j : Scenes recorded using the [640k480/50p] recording mode.
≥ is displayed after the date in the list by date for the still pictures created from the motion
picture. (l 49)
Advanced (Playback)
Various playback functions
A Date select icon
- 51 -
Playing back motion pictures/still pictures by date
The scenes or the still pictures recorded on the same day can be played back in succession.
1 Select the date select icon
using the cursor button, then
press the ENTER button.
2 Select the playback date, then press the ENTER button.
The scenes or the still pictures recorded on the date selected are displayed as thumbnails.
3 Select the scene or the still picture to be played back, then press the
ENTER button.
≥ Playing back of all the scenes or the still pictures returns if the unit is turned off or the mode
is changed.
≥ Even if the scenes have been recorded on the same day, they will be displayed separately
in the following cases. -1, -2 ... are added after the date displayed on the list by date.
jWhen the number of scenes exceeds 99
jWhen the number of recorded still pictures exceeds 999
≥ Scenes recorded on the same day are displayed separately if the recording mode has
been changed between recording them. The icon that appears behind the date on the list
by date changes as follows.
j : Scenes recorded using the [1280k720/50p] recording mode.
j : Scenes recorded using the [iFrame] recording mode.
j : Scenes recorded using the [640k480/50p] recording mode.
≥ is displayed after the date in the list by date for the still pictures created from the motion
picture. (l 49)
Advanced (Playback)
Various playback functions
A Date select icon
- 51 -
Reprodukcija videozapisa/fotografija prema datumu
Fotografije snimljene istoga dana mogu se reproducirati u nizu.
1 Kursorskim gumbom odaberite
ikonu za odabir datuma i
pritisnite gumb ENTER.
2 Odaberite datum reprodukcije, a zatim pritisnite gumb ENTER.
Fotografije snimljene na odabrani dan prikazuju se kao minijature.
3 Odaberite scenu ili fotografiju koju želite reproducirati i pritisnite
gumb ENTER.
●
●Ako se uređaj isključi ili se promijeni način rada, uređaj se vraća na reproduciranje
svih fotografija ili scena.
●
●Čak i ako su scene snimljene istoga dana, bit će prikazane odvojeno u sljedećim
slučajevima. Nakon datuma prikazanog na kalendarskom popisu dodano je -1, -2 ...
-
- Kada broj scena prelazi 99
-
- Kada broj snimljenih fotografija prijeđe 999
●
●Scene snimljene na isti dan odvojeno se prikazuju ako je način snimanja promijenjen
između snimanja. Ikona koja se pojavljuje nakon datuma na popisu prema datumima
mijenja se na sljedeći način:
Scene snimljene u načinu snimanja [1280x720/50p].
Scene snimljene u načinu snimanja [iFrame].
Scene snimljene u načinu snimanja [640x480/50p].
●
● je prikazano nakon datuma u kalendarskom prikazu fotografija napravljenih od
videozapisa. (→ 49)
Napredne funkcije (Reprodukcija)
Razne funkcije reprodukcije
Ikona za odabir datuma
- 51 -
Playing back motion pictures/still pictures by date
The scenes or the still pictures recorded on the same day can be played back in succession.
1 Select the date select icon
using the cursor button, then
press the ENTER button.
2 Select the playback date, then press the ENTER button.
The scenes or the still pictures recorded on the date selected are displayed as thumbnails.
3 Select the scene or the still picture to be played back, then press the
ENTER button.
≥ Playing back of all the scenes or the still pictures returns if the unit is turned off or the mode
is changed.
≥ Even if the scenes have been recorded on the same day, they will be displayed separately
in the following cases. -1, -2 ... are added after the date displayed on the list by date.
jWhen the number of scenes exceeds 99
jWhen the number of recorded still pictures exceeds 999
≥ Scenes recorded on the same day are displayed separately if the recording mode has
been changed between recording them. The icon that appears behind the date on the list
by date changes as follows.
j : Scenes recorded using the [1280k720/50p] recording mode.
j : Scenes recorded using the [iFrame] recording mode.
j : Scenes recorded using the [640k480/50p] recording mode.
≥ is displayed after the date in the list by date for the still pictures created from the motion
picture. (l 49)
Advanced (Playback)
Various playback functions
A Date select icon
Page: 51
- 52 -
Changing the playback settings and playing back the
slide show
1 Select using the cursor button,
then press the ENTER button.
2 (Only when you would like to change the settings)
Select the desired item and press the ENTER button.
3 (When [DATE SETUP] is selected)
Select the playback date, then
press the ENTER button.
(When [SLIDES INTERVAL] is selected)
Select the desired item and press the ENTER button.
(When [MUSIC SELECT] is selected)
Select the desired sound and
press the ENTER button.
4 Select [START] and press the
ENTER button.
5 Select the playback operation. (l 24)
≥ When the playback is finished or stopped, the screen to select [REPLAY],
[SELECT AGAIN] or [EXIT] is displayed. Select the desired item and press the ENTER
button.
≥ To adjust the volume of music during playback of the slide show, operate the volume lever.
(l 25)
[DATE SETUP]: Select the date to be played back.
[SLIDES INTERVAL]: Selects the interval between still pictures at playback.
[MUSIC SELECT]: Select the music to be played on playback.
[SHORT]: Approx. 1 second
[NORMAL]: Approx. 5 seconds
[LONG]: Approx. 15 seconds
- 52 -
Changing the playback settings and playing back the
slide show
1 Select using the cursor button,
then press the ENTER button.
2 (Only when you would like to change the settings)
Select the desired item and press the ENTER button.
3 (When [DATE SETUP] is selected)
Select the playback date, then
press the ENTER button.
(When [SLIDES INTERVAL] is selected)
Select the desired item and press the ENTER button.
(When [MUSIC SELECT] is selected)
Select the desired sound and
press the ENTER button.
4 Select [START] and press the
ENTER button.
5 Select the playback operation. (l 24)
≥ When the playback is finished or stopped, the screen to select [REPLAY],
[SELECT AGAIN] or [EXIT] is displayed. Select the desired item and press the ENTER
button.
≥ To adjust the volume of music during playback of the slide show, operate the volume lever.
(l 25)
[DATE SETUP]: Select the date to be played back.
[SLIDES INTERVAL]: Selects the interval between still pictures at playback.
[MUSIC SELECT]: Select the music to be played on playback.
[SHORT]: Approx. 1 second
[NORMAL]: Approx. 5 seconds
[LONG]: Approx. 15 seconds
- 52 -
Changing the playback settings and playing back the
slide show
1 Select using the cursor button,
then press the ENTER button.
2 (Only when you would like to change the settings)
Select the desired item and press the ENTER button.
3 (When [DATE SETUP] is selected)
Select the playback date, then
press the ENTER button.
(When [SLIDES INTERVAL] is selected)
Select the desired item and press the ENTER button.
(When [MUSIC SELECT] is selected)
Select the desired sound and
press the ENTER button.
4 Select [START] and press the
ENTER button.
5 Select the playback operation. (l 24)
≥ When the playback is finished or stopped, the screen to select [REPLAY],
[SELECT AGAIN] or [EXIT] is displayed. Select the desired item and press the ENTER
button.
≥ To adjust the volume of music during playback of the slide show, operate the volume lever.
(l 25)
[DATE SETUP]: Select the date to be played back.
[SLIDES INTERVAL]: Selects the interval between still pictures at playback.
[MUSIC SELECT]: Select the music to be played on playback.
[SHORT]: Approx. 1 second
[NORMAL]: Approx. 5 seconds
[LONG]: Approx. 15 seconds
- 52 -
Promjena postavki reprodukcije i reprodukcija snimki
u nizu (slide show)
1 Kursorskim gumbom odaberite ,
a zatim pritisnite gumb ENTER.
2 (Samo kada želite promijeniti postavke)
Odaberite željenu stavku i pritisnite gumb ENTER.
3 (Ako ste odabrali [DATE SETUP])
Odaberite datum reprodukcije i
pritisnite ENTER.
(Ako ste odabrali [MUSIC SELECT])
Odaberite željeni zvuk i pritisnite ENTER.
(Ako ste odabrali [MUSIC SELECT])
Odaberite željeni zvuk i pritisnite
ENTER.
4 Odaberite [START] (Početak) i
pritisnite gumb ENTER.
5 Odaberite radnju reproduciranja. (→ 24)
●
●Kada je reprodukcija dovršena ili zaustavljena, prikazuje se zaslon za odabir
između [REPLAY] (Ponovi), [SELECT AGAIN] (Ponovno odaberi), ili [EXIT] (Izađi).
Odaberite željenu stavku i pritisnite gumb ENTER.
●
●Za prilagodbu glasnoće glazbe tijekom reprodukcije slika u nizu pomičite ručicu za
podešavanje glasnoće. (→ 25)
[DATE SETUP]
(Postavljanje datuma):
Odaberite datum koji želite reproducirati.
[SLIDES INTERVAL]
(Interval između snimaka):
Odabire interval između fotografija koje se
reproduciraju.
[MUSIC SELECT]
(Odabir glazbe):
Odaberite glazbu koja će svirati tijekom
reprodukcije.
[SHORT]: Otprilike 1 sekunda
[NORMAL]: Otprilike 5 sekundi
[LONG]: Otprilike 15 sekundi
- 52 -
Changing the playback settings and playing b
slide show
1 Select using the cursor button,
then press the ENTER button.
2 (Only when you would like to change the settings)
Select the desired item and press the ENTER button.
3 (When [DATE SETUP] is selected)
Select the playback date, then
press the ENTER button.
(When [SLIDES INTERVAL] is selected)
Select the desired item and press the ENTER button.
(When [MUSIC SELECT] is selected)
Select the desired sound and
press the ENTER button.
4 Select [START] and press the
ENTER button.
5 Select the playback operation. (l 24)
≥ When the playback is finished or stopped, the screen to select [REPLAY],
[SELECT AGAIN] or [EXIT] is displayed. Select the desired item and press
button.
≥ To adjust the volume of music during playback of the slide show, operate the
(l 25)
[DATE SETUP]: Select the date to be played back.
[SLIDES INTERVAL]: Selects the interval between still pictures at playba
[MUSIC SELECT]: Select the music to be played on playback.
[SHORT]: Approx. 1 second
[NORMAL]: Approx. 5 seconds
[LONG]: Approx. 15 seconds
Page: 52
- 53 -
¬ Change the mode to .
∫ To delete scenes or still pictures from the thumbnail display
1 Press the button while the thumbnail view screen is displayed.
2 Select [ALL SCENES] or [SELECT]
using the cursor button, then
press the ENTER button.
≥ All the scenes or still pictures displayed as
thumbnails will be deleted by selecting
[ALL SCENES].
(In case of playing back scenes or still pictures by date, all the scenes or still pictures on
the selected date will be deleted.)
≥ Protected scenes/still pictures cannot be deleted.
3 (When [SELECT] is selected in Step 2)
Select the scene/still picture to be deleted, then press the ENTER
button.
≥ The scene/still picture is selected and the indication appears on the thumbnail. Press
the ENTER button again to cancel the operation.
≥ Up to 99 scenes can be selected to be deleted.
4 (When [SELECT] is selected in Step 2)
Select [Delete], and press the ENTER button, or the button.
≥ To continuously delete other scenes/still pictures, repeat Steps 3-4.
When you stop deleting halfway
Press the MENU button while deleting.
≥ The scenes or still pictures that have already been deleted when the deletion is cancelled
cannot be restored.
Advanced (Playback)
Deleting scenes/still pictures
Deleted scenes/still pictures cannot be restored, so perform appropriate
confirmation of the contents before proceeding with deletion.
To delete the scene or still picture
being played back
Press the button while scenes or still
pictures to be deleted are being played back.
- 53 -
¬ Change the mode to .
∫ To delete scenes or still pictures from the thumbnail display
1 Press the button while the thumbnail view screen is displayed.
2 Select [ALL SCENES] or [SELECT]
using the cursor button, then
press the ENTER button.
≥ All the scenes or still pictures displayed as
thumbnails will be deleted by selecting
[ALL SCENES].
(In case of playing back scenes or still pictures by date, all the scenes or still pictures on
the selected date will be deleted.)
≥ Protected scenes/still pictures cannot be deleted.
3 (When [SELECT] is selected in Step 2)
Select the scene/still picture to be deleted, then press the ENTER
button.
≥ The scene/still picture is selected and the indication appears on the thumbnail. Press
the ENTER button again to cancel the operation.
≥ Up to 99 scenes can be selected to be deleted.
4 (When [SELECT] is selected in Step 2)
Select [Delete], and press the ENTER button, or the button.
≥ To continuously delete other scenes/still pictures, repeat Steps 3-4.
When you stop deleting halfway
Press the MENU button while deleting.
≥ The scenes or still pictures that have already been deleted when the deletion is cancelled
cannot be restored.
Advanced (Playback)
Deleting scenes/still pictures
Deleted scenes/still pictures cannot be restored, so perform appropriate
confirmation of the contents before proceeding with deletion.
To delete the scene or still picture
being played back
Press the button while scenes or still
pictures to be deleted are being played back.
- 53 -
¬ Change the mode to .
∫ To delete scenes or still pictures from the thumbnail display
1 Press the button while the thumbnail view screen is displayed.
2 Select [ALL SCENES] or [SELECT]
using the cursor button, then
press the ENTER button.
≥ All the scenes or still pictures displayed as
thumbnails will be deleted by selecting
[ALL SCENES].
(In case of playing back scenes or still pictures by date, all the scenes or still pictures on
the selected date will be deleted.)
≥ Protected scenes/still pictures cannot be deleted.
3 (When [SELECT] is selected in Step 2)
Select the scene/still picture to be deleted, then press the ENTER
button.
≥ The scene/still picture is selected and the indication appears on the thumbnail. Press
the ENTER button again to cancel the operation.
≥ Up to 99 scenes can be selected to be deleted.
4 (When [SELECT] is selected in Step 2)
Select [Delete], and press the ENTER button, or the button.
≥ To continuously delete other scenes/still pictures, repeat Steps 3-4.
When you stop deleting halfway
Press the MENU button while deleting.
≥ The scenes or still pictures that have already been deleted when the deletion is cancelled
cannot be restored.
Advanced (Playback)
Deleting scenes/still pictures
Deleted scenes/still pictures cannot be restored, so perform appropriate
confirmation of the contents before proceeding with deletion.
To delete the scene or still picture
being played back
Press the button while scenes or still
pictures to be deleted are being played back.
- 53 -
Izbrisane scene/fotografije više se ne mogu vratiti, stoga na odgovarajući
način potvrdite sadržaj prije nego što nastavite s brisanjem.
Napredne funkcije (Reprodukcija)
Brisanje scena/fotografija
■
■ Da biste izbrisali scene ili fotografije iz prikaza minijatura
1 Pritisnite gumb dok je prikazan zaslon s minijaturama.
2 Kursorskim gumbom odaberite
[ALL SCENES] (Sve scene) ili
[SELECT] (Odabir) i pritisnite gumb
ENTER.
●
●Sve scene ili fotografije prikazane kao
minijature bit će izbrisane ako odaberete opciju [ALL SCENES]
(u slučaju reprodukcije scena ili fotografija prema datumu, sve scene ili fotografije
snimljene na odabrani datum će biti izbrisane).
●
●Zaštićene scene/fotografije ne mogu se izbrisati.
3 (Samo kada je u 2. koraku odabrano [SELECT])
Odaberite scenu/fotografiju koju želite izbrisati i pritisnite ENTER.
●
●Scena/fotografija je odabrana, a na minijaturi se prikazuje pokazatelj . Ponovno
pritisnite gumb ENTER za odustajanje.
●
●Za brisanje je moguće odabrati do 99 scena.
4 (Samo kada je u 2. koraku odabrano [SELECT])
Odaberite [Delete] i pritisnite gumb ENTER ili .
●
●Da biste u slijedu izbrisali ostale scene/fotografije, ponovite korake 3.-4.
Kada prekinete brisanje usred procesa
Pritisnite gumb izbornika MENU za vrijeme brisanja.
●
●Scene ili fotografije koje su već izbrisane do trenutka kada je brisanje poništeno nije
moguće vratiti.
Brisanje scene ili fotografije koja
se trenutačno reproducira
Pritisnite gumb dok se scene ili fotografije
koje ćete brisati reproduciraju.
◊ Promijenite način rada u .
- 53 -
¬ Change the mode to .
∫ To delete scenes or still pictures from the thumbnail display
1 Press the button while the thumbnail view screen is displayed.
2 Select [ALL SCENES] or [SELECT]
using the cursor button, then
press the ENTER button.
≥ All the scenes or still pictures displayed as
thumbnails will be deleted by selecting
[ALL SCENES].
(In case of playing back scenes or still pictures by date, all the scenes or still pictures on
the selected date will be deleted.)
≥ Protected scenes/still pictures cannot be deleted.
3 (When [SELECT] is selected in Step 2)
Select the scene/still picture to be deleted, then press the ENTER
button.
≥ The scene/still picture is selected and the indication appears on the thumbnail. Press
the ENTER button again to cancel the operation.
≥ Up to 99 scenes can be selected to be deleted.
4 (When [SELECT] is selected in Step 2)
Select [Delete], and press the ENTER button, or the button.
≥ To continuously delete other scenes/still pictures, repeat Steps 3-4.
When you stop deleting halfway
Press the MENU button while deleting.
≥ The scenes or still pictures that have already been deleted when the deletion is cancelled
cannot be restored.
Advanced (Playback)
Deleting scenes/still pictures
Deleted scenes/still pictures cannot be restored, so perform appropriate
confirmation of the contents before proceeding with deletion.
To delete the scene or still picture
being played back
Press the button while scenes or still
pictures to be deleted are being played back.
- 53 -
¬ Change the mode to .
∫ To delete scenes or still pictures from the thumbnail display
1 Press the button while the thumbnail view screen is displayed.
2 Select [ALL SCENES] or [SELECT]
using the cursor button, then
press the ENTER button.
≥ All the scenes or still pictures displayed as
thumbnails will be deleted by selecting
[ALL SCENES].
(In case of playing back scenes or still pictures by date, all the scenes or still pictures on
the selected date will be deleted.)
≥ Protected scenes/still pictures cannot be deleted.
3 (When [SELECT] is selected in Step 2)
Select the scene/still picture to be deleted, then press the ENTER
button.
≥ The scene/still picture is selected and the indication appears on the thumbnail. Press
the ENTER button again to cancel the operation.
≥ Up to 99 scenes can be selected to be deleted.
4 (When [SELECT] is selected in Step 2)
Select [Delete], and press the ENTER button, or the button.
≥ To continuously delete other scenes/still pictures, repeat Steps 3-4.
When you stop deleting halfway
Press the MENU button while deleting.
≥ The scenes or still pictures that have already been deleted when the deletion is cancelled
cannot be restored.
Advanced (Playback)
Deleting scenes/still pictures
Deleted scenes/still pictures cannot be restored, so perform appropriate
confirmation of the contents before proceeding with deletion.
To delete the scene or still picture
being played back
Press the button while scenes or still
pictures to be deleted are being played back.
¬ Change the mode to .
∫ To delete scenes or still pictures from the thu
1 Press the button while the thumbnail view
2 Select [ALL SCENES] or [SELECT]
using the cursor button, then
press the ENTER button.
≥ All the scenes or still pictures displayed as
thumbnails will be deleted by selecting
[ALL SCENES].
(In case of playing back scenes or still pictures by date, all th
the selected date will be deleted.)
≥ Protected scenes/still pictures cannot be deleted.
3 (When [SELECT] is selected in Step 2)
Select the scene/still picture to be deleted, th
button.
≥ The scene/still picture is selected and the indication appe
Advanced (Playback)
Deleting scenes/still pictur
Deleted scenes/still pictures cannot be restored, so perfo
confirmation of the contents before proceeding with dele
To delete the s
being played b
Press the butto
pictures to be delet
¬ Change the mode to .
∫ To delete scenes or still pictures from
1 Press the button while the thumb
2 Select [ALL SCENES] or [SELECT]
using the cursor button, then
press the ENTER button.
≥ All the scenes or still pictures displayed as
thumbnails will be deleted by selecting
[ALL SCENES].
(In case of playing back scenes or still pictures by
the selected date will be deleted.)
≥ Protected scenes/still pictures cannot be deleted.
3 (When [SELECT] is selected in Step 2)
Select the scene/still picture to be de
button.
≥ The scene/still picture is selected and the indic
the ENTER button again to cancel the operation.
≥ Up to 99 scenes can be selected to be deleted.
4 (When [SELECT] is selected in Step 2)
Advanced (Playback)
Deleting scenes/still p
Deleted scenes/still pictures cannot be restore
confirmation of the contents before proceeding
To del
being
Press th
pictures
- 53 -
¬ Change the mode to .
∫ To delete scenes or still pictures from the thumbnail display
1 Press the button while the thumbnail view screen is displayed.
2 Select [ALL SCENES] or [SELECT]
using the cursor button, then
press the ENTER button.
≥ All the scenes or still pictures displayed as
thumbnails will be deleted by selecting
[ALL SCENES].
(In case of playing back scenes or still pictures by date, all the scenes or still pictures on
the selected date will be deleted.)
≥ Protected scenes/still pictures cannot be deleted.
3 (When [SELECT] is selected in Step 2)
Select the scene/still picture to be deleted, then press the ENTER
button.
≥ The scene/still picture is selected and the indication appears on the thumbnail. Press
the ENTER button again to cancel the operation.
≥ Up to 99 scenes can be selected to be deleted.
4 (When [SELECT] is selected in Step 2)
Select [Delete], and press the ENTER button, or the button.
≥ To continuously delete other scenes/still pictures, repeat Steps 3-4.
When you stop deleting halfway
Press the MENU button while deleting.
≥ The scenes or still pictures that have already been deleted when the deletion is cancelled
cannot be restored.
Advanced (Playback)
Deleting scenes/still pictures
Deleted scenes/still pictures cannot be restored, so perform appropriate
confirmation of the contents before proceeding with deletion.
To delete the scene or still picture
being played back
Press the button while scenes or still
pictures to be deleted are being played back.
Page: 54
- 55 -
Dividing a scene to partially delete
This divides the recorded scenes in two and deletes the front half or back half.
The scenes that were deleted after division cannot be recovered.
≥ Change the mode to .
1 Select the menu.
2 Select the scene you wish to divide using the cursor button and
press the ENTER button.
3 Select to set the dividing point.
≥ It is convenient to use Slow-motion Playback and
Frame-by-frame Playback. (l 48)
≥ Set to at least 2 seconds for the portions to be
deleted and at least 3 seconds for the portion that
is to remain.
4 Select the part for deletion, then press the ENTER button.
5 Select [YES] and press the ENTER button to confirm (play back) the
part for deletion.
≥ A confirmation message appears when [NO] is selected.
Proceed to Step 7.
6 Stop the playback.
≥ A confirmation message appears.
7 Select [YES] and press the ENTER button.
≥ To continue dividing and deleting other scenes, repeat Steps 2-7.
To complete dividing
≥ Press the MENU button.
≥ It may not be possible to divide scenes with a short recording time.
≥ The actual division may slightly slip off the previously designated dividing point.
: [EDIT SCENE] # [SPLIT&DELETE]
0h00m15s
0h00m15s
- 55 -
Dividing a scene to partially delete
This divides the recorded scenes in two and deletes the front half or back half.
The scenes that were deleted after division cannot be recovered.
≥ Change the mode to .
1 Select the menu.
2 Select the scene you wish to divide using the cursor button and
press the ENTER button.
3 Select to set the dividing point.
≥ It is convenient to use Slow-motion Playback and
Frame-by-frame Playback. (l 48)
≥ Set to at least 2 seconds for the portions to be
deleted and at least 3 seconds for the portion that
is to remain.
4 Select the part for deletion, then press the ENTER button.
5 Select [YES] and press the ENTER button to confirm (play back) the
part for deletion.
≥ A confirmation message appears when [NO] is selected.
Proceed to Step 7.
6 Stop the playback.
≥ A confirmation message appears.
7 Select [YES] and press the ENTER button.
≥ To continue dividing and deleting other scenes, repeat Steps 2-7.
To complete dividing
≥ Press the MENU button.
≥ It may not be possible to divide scenes with a short recording time.
≥ The actual division may slightly slip off the previously designated dividing point.
: [EDIT SCENE] # [SPLIT&DELETE]
0h00m15s
0h00m15s
- 55 -
Podjela scene radi brisanja
Ova opcija dijeli snimljene scene na dva dijela i briše jednu ili drugu polovicu.
Scene koje su izbrisane nakon podjele više se ne mogu vratiti.
●
●Promijenite način rada na .
1 Odaberite izbornik.
2 Kursorskim gumbom odaberite scenu koju želite podijeliti i
pritisnite gumb ENTER.
3 Odaberite za određivanje mjesta
podjele.
●
●Preporučuje se korištenje usporene reprodukcije
te reprodukcije kadar po kadar. (→ 48)
●
●Podesite na najmanje 2 sekunde za dijelove koje
želite izbrisati i najmanje 3 sekunde za dijelove koje ćete zadržati.
4 Odaberite dio koji želite izbrisati i pritisnite gumb ENTER.
5 Odaberite [YES] i pritisnite gumb ENTER za potvrđivanje
(reprodukciju) dijela odabranog za brisanje.
●
●Ako ste odabrali [NO], prikazuje se poruka za potvrdu.
Prijeđite na 7. korak.
6 Zaustavite reprodukciju.
●
●Pojavljuje se poruka potvrde.
7 Odaberite [Yes] (da) i pritisnite gumb ENTER.
●
●Za nastavak podjele i brisanja ostalih scena ponovite korake 2.-7.
Dovršetak postupka podjele
●
●Pritisnite gumb MENU.
●
●Možda neće biti moguće podijeliti scene kratkog vremena snimanja.
●
●Može se dogoditi da se stvarna podjela malo odmakne od unaprijed određene točke
podjele.
- 53 -
¬ Change the mode to .
∫ To delete scenes or still pictures from the thumbnail display
1 Press the button while the thumbnail view screen is displayed.
2 Select [ALL SCENES] or [SELECT]
using the cursor button, then
press the ENTER button.
≥ All the scenes or still pictures displayed as
thumbnails will be deleted by selecting
[ALL SCENES].
(In case of playing back scenes or still pictures by date, all the scenes or still pictures on
the selected date will be deleted.)
≥ Protected scenes/still pictures cannot be deleted.
3 (When [SELECT] is selected in Step 2)
Select the scene/still picture to be deleted, then press the ENTER
button.
≥ The scene/still picture is selected and the indication appears on the thumbnail. Press
the ENTER button again to cancel the operation.
≥ Up to 99 scenes can be selected to be deleted.
4 (When [SELECT] is selected in Step 2)
Select [Delete], and press the ENTER button, or the button.
≥ To continuously delete other scenes/still pictures, repeat Steps 3-4.
When you stop deleting halfway
Press the MENU button while deleting.
≥ The scenes or still pictures that have already been deleted when the deletion is cancelled
cannot be restored.
Advanced (Playback)
Deleting scenes/still pictures
Deleted scenes/still pictures cannot be restored, so perform appropriate
confirmation of the contents before proceeding with deletion.
To delete the scene or still picture
being played back
Press the button while scenes or still
pictures to be deleted are being played back.
- 28 -
≥ The items displayed differ depending on the position or settings of the mode switch.
Select the menu.
The screen display can be changed to [ON] (all information displayed) or [OFF] (a portion of
information displayed).
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 17.
It is possible to display and record the time at the travel destination by selecting your home
region and the travel destination.
1 Select [SET WORLD TIME] and press the ENTER button.
≥ If the clock is not set, adjust the clock to the current time. (l 17)
≥ When the [HOME] (your home region) is not set, the message appears. Press the ENTER
button and proceed to Step 3.
2 (Only when setting your home region)
Select [HOME] using 2/1and press the ENTER button.
3 (Only when setting your home region)
Select your home region using
2/1and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press 3 to set daylight saving time.
appears and the summer time
setting is turned on; the time
difference from GMT is set forward by
one hour. Press 3 again to return to
the normal time setting.
4 (Only when setting the region of your
travel destination)
Select [DESTINATION] using 2/1 and press the ENTER button.
≥ When the home region is set for the first time, the screen for selecting home/travel
destination appears after setting the home region successively. If the home region has
already been set once, execute the menu operation for Step 1.
Basic
Using the Setup Menu
: [SETUP] # desired setting
[DISPLAY] [ON]/[OFF]
[EXT. DISPLAY] [SIMPLE]/[DETAIL]/[OFF]
[CLOCK SET]
[SET WORLD TIME]


A The current time
B The time difference from GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time)
[EDIT SCENE] (Uređivanje scene) → [SPLIT&DELETE] (Podijeli i izbriši)
- 55 -
Dividing a scene to partially delete
This divides the recorded scenes in two and deletes the front half or back half.
The scenes that were deleted after division cannot be recovered.
≥ Change the mode to .
1 Select the menu.
2 Select the scene you wish to divide using the cursor button and
press the ENTER button.
3 Select to set the dividing point.
≥ It is convenient to use Slow-motion Playback and
Frame-by-frame Playback. (l 48)
≥ Set to at least 2 seconds for the portions to be
deleted and at least 3 seconds for the portion that
is to remain.
4 Select the part for deletion, then press the ENTER button.
5 Select [YES] and press the ENTER button to confirm (play back) the
part for deletion.
≥ A confirmation message appears when [NO] is selected.
Proceed to Step 7.
6 Stop the playback.
≥ A confirmation message appears.
7 Select [YES] and press the ENTER button.
≥ To continue dividing and deleting other scenes, repeat Steps 2-7.
To complete dividing
≥ Press the MENU button.
≥ It may not be possible to divide scenes with a short recording time.
≥ The actual division may slightly slip off the previously designated dividing point.
: [EDIT SCENE] # [SPLIT&DELETE]
0h00m15s
0h00m15s
Page: 55
- 56 -
Protecting scenes/still pictures
Scenes/still pictures can be protected so that they are not deleted by mistake.
(Even if you protect some scenes/still pictures, formatting the media will delete them.)
≥ Change the mode to .
1 Select the menu.
2 Select the scene/still picture to be protected using the cursor button,
then press the ENTER button.
≥ The scene/still picture is selected and the indication appears on the thumbnail. Press
the ENTER button again to cancel the operation.
≥ Press the MENU button to complete the settings.
: [VIDEO SETUP] or [PHOTO SETUP] # [SCENE PROTECT]
- 56 -
Zaštita scena/fotografija
Scene/fotografije mogu se zaštititi da se ne bi zabunom izbrisale
(čak i ako zaštitite neke scene/fotografije, formatiranje medija će ih izbrisati).
●
●Promijenite način rada na .
1 Odaberite izbornik.
2 Kursorskim gumbom odaberite scenu/fotografiju koju želite
zaštititi i pritisnite gumb ENTER.
●
●Scena/fotografija je odabrana, a na minijaturi se prikazuje pokazatelj . Ponovno
pritisnite gumb ENTER za odustajanje.
●
●Pritisnite gumb MENU za dovršetak postavljanja.
- 53 -
¬ Change the mode to .
∫ To delete scenes or still pictures from the thumbnail display
1 Press the button while the thumbnail view screen is displayed.
2 Select [ALL SCENES] or [SELECT]
using the cursor button, then
press the ENTER button.
≥ All the scenes or still pictures displayed as
thumbnails will be deleted by selecting
[ALL SCENES].
(In case of playing back scenes or still pictures by date, all the scenes or still pictures on
the selected date will be deleted.)
≥ Protected scenes/still pictures cannot be deleted.
3 (When [SELECT] is selected in Step 2)
Select the scene/still picture to be deleted, then press the ENTER
button.
≥ The scene/still picture is selected and the indication appears on the thumbnail. Press
the ENTER button again to cancel the operation.
≥ Up to 99 scenes can be selected to be deleted.
4 (When [SELECT] is selected in Step 2)
Select [Delete], and press the ENTER button, or the button.
≥ To continuously delete other scenes/still pictures, repeat Steps 3-4.
When you stop deleting halfway
Press the MENU button while deleting.
≥ The scenes or still pictures that have already been deleted when the deletion is cancelled
cannot be restored.
Advanced (Playback)
Deleting scenes/still pictures
Deleted scenes/still pictures cannot be restored, so perform appropriate
confirmation of the contents before proceeding with deletion.
To delete the scene or still picture
being played back
Press the button while scenes or still
pictures to be deleted are being played back.
- 28 -
≥ The items displayed differ depending on the position or settings of the mode switch.
Select the menu.
The screen display can be changed to [ON] (all information displayed) or [OFF] (a portion of
information displayed).
Please refer to page 59.
Please refer to page 17.
It is possible to display and record the time at the travel destination by selecting your home
region and the travel destination.
1 Select [SET WORLD TIME] and press the ENTER button.
≥ If the clock is not set, adjust the clock to the current time. (l 17)
≥ When the [HOME] (your home region) is not set, the message appears. Press the ENTER
button and proceed to Step 3.
2 (Only when setting your home region)
Select [HOME] using 2/1and press the ENTER button.
3 (Only when setting your home region)
Select your home region using
2/1and press the ENTER button.
≥ Press 3 to set daylight saving time.
appears and the summer time
setting is turned on; the time
difference from GMT is set forward by
one hour. Press 3 again to return to
the normal time setting.
4 (Only when setting the region of your
travel destination)
Select [DESTINATION] using 2/1 and press the ENTER button.
≥ When the home region is set for the first time, the screen for selecting home/travel
destination appears after setting the home region successively. If the home region has
already been set once, execute the menu operation for Step 1.
Basic
Using the Setup Menu
: [SETUP] # desired setting
[DISPLAY] [ON]/[OFF]
[EXT. DISPLAY] [SIMPLE]/[DETAIL]/[OFF]
[CLOCK SET]
[SET WORLD TIME]


A The current time
B The time difference from GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time)
[VIDEO SETUP] (Postavke videa) ili [PHOTO SETUP] (Postavke
fotografije) → [SCENE PROTECT] (Zaštita scene)
- 56 -
Protecting scenes/still pictures
Scenes/still pictures can be protected so that they are not deleted by mistake.
(Even if you protect some scenes/still pictures, formatting the media wil
≥ Change the mode to .
1 Select the menu.
2 Select the scene/still picture to be protected using the cur
then press the ENTER button.
≥ The scene/still picture is selected and the indication appears on the thu
the ENTER button again to cancel the operation.
≥ Press the MENU button to complete the settings.
: [VIDEO SETUP] or [PHOTO SETUP] # [SCENE PROTECT]
Page: 56
- 57 -
≥ HDMI is the interface for digital devices. If you connect this unit to an HDMI compatible
high definition TV and then play back the recorded high definition images, you can enjoy
them in high resolution with high quality sound.
1 Connect this unit to a TV.
≥ Check that the plugs are inserted as far as they go.
≥ Always use a genuine Panasonic HDMI mini cable (RP-CDHM15, RP-CDHM30: optional).
≥ Do not use any other AV cables except the supplied one.
Advanced (Playback)
Watching Video/Pictures on your TV
Confirm the terminals on your TV and use a cable compatible with the terminals.
Image quality may vary with the connected terminals.
A High quality
1 HDMI terminal
2 Video terminal
A HDMI mini cable
(optional)
≥ Be sure to connect to the
HDMI terminal.
B AV cable (supplied)
Picture quality
1 High definition images
when connecting to HDMI
terminal
2 Standard images when
connecting to video
terminal
- 57 -
≥ HDMI is the interface for digital devices. If you connect this unit to an HDMI compatible
high definition TV and then play back the recorded high definition images, you can enjoy
them in high resolution with high quality sound.
1 Connect this unit to a TV.
≥ Check that the plugs are inserted as far as they go.
≥ Always use a genuine Panasonic HDMI mini cable (RP-CDHM15, RP-CDHM30: optional).
≥ Do not use any other AV cables except the supplied one.
Advanced (Playback)
Watching Video/Pictures on your TV
Confirm the terminals on your TV and use a cable compatible with the terminals.
Image quality may vary with the connected terminals.
A High quality
1 HDMI terminal
2 Video terminal
A HDMI mini cable
(optional)
≥ Be sure to connect to the
HDMI terminal.
B AV cable (supplied)
Picture quality
1 High definition images
when connecting to HDMI
terminal
2 Standard images when
connecting to video
terminal
- 57 -
●
●Provjerite jesu li utikači umetnuti do kraja.
●
●Uvijek koristite originalni Panasonicov HDMI minikabel (RP-CDHM15, RP-CDHM30:
neobavezan).
●
●Koristite isključivo isporučeni AV kabel.
Provjerite priključke na vašem TV prijamniku i koristite kompatibilan kabel.
Kvaliteta slike može se razlikovati ovisno o priključcima.
Visoka kvaliteta
HDMI priključak
Videopriključak
HDMI minikabel
(neobavezan)
●
● Obavezno spojite na
HDMI priključak.
AV kabel (isporučen)
Kvaliteta slike
Slike visoke razlučivosti
kod spajanja na HDMI
priključak
Standardne slike
kod spajanja na
videopriključak
- 57 -
≥ HDMI is the interface for digital devices. If you connect this unit to an HDMI compatible
high definition TV and then play back the recorded high definition images, you can enjoy
them in high resolution with high quality sound.
1 Connect this unit to a TV.
≥ Check that the plugs are inserted as far as they go.
≥ Always use a genuine Panasonic HDMI mini cable (RP-CDHM15, RP-CDHM30: optional).
≥ Do not use any other AV cables except the supplied one.
Advanced (Playback)
Watching Video/Pictures on your TV
Confirm the terminals on your TV and use a cable compatible with the terminals.
Image quality may vary with the connected terminals.
A High quality
1 HDMI terminal
2 Video terminal
A HDMI mini cable
(optional)
≥ Be sure to connect to the
HDMI terminal.
B AV cable (supplied)
Picture quality
1 High definition images
when connecting to HDMI
terminal
2 Standard images when
connecting to video
terminal
- 57 -
≥ HDMI is the interface for digital devices. If you connect this unit to an HDMI compatible
high definition TV and then play back the recorded high definition images, you can enjoy
them in high resolution with high quality sound.
1 Connect this unit to a TV.
≥ Check that the plugs are inserted as far as they go.
≥ Always use a genuine Panasonic HDMI mini cable (RP-CDHM15, RP-CDHM30: optional).
≥ Do not use any other AV cables except the supplied one.
Advanced (Playback)
Watching Video/Pictures on your TV
Confirm the terminals on your TV and use a cable compatible with the terminals.
Image quality may vary with the connected terminals.
A High quality
1 HDMI terminal
2 Video terminal
A HDMI mini cable
(optional)
≥ Be sure to connect to the
HDMI terminal.
B AV cable (supplied)
Picture quality
1 High definition images
when connecting to HDMI
terminal
2 Standard images when
connecting to video
terminal
- 57 -
≥ HDMI is the interface for digital devices. If you connect this unit to an HDMI compatible
high definition TV and then play back the recorded high definition images, you can enjoy
them in high resolution with high quality sound.
1 Connect this unit to a TV.
≥ Check that the plugs are inserted as far as they go.
≥ Always use a genuine Panasonic HDMI mini cable (RP-CDHM15, RP-CDHM30: optional).
≥ Do not use any other AV cables except the supplied one.
Advanced (Playback)
Watching Video/Pictures on your TV
Confirm the terminals on your TV and use a cable compatible with the terminals.
Image quality may vary with the connected terminals.
A High quality
1 HDMI terminal
2 Video terminal
A HDMI mini cable
(optional)
≥ Be sure to connect to the
HDMI terminal.
B AV cable (supplied)
Picture quality
1 High definition images
when connecting to HDMI
terminal
2 Standard images when
connecting to video
terminal
●
●HDMI je sučelje za digitalne uređaje. Ako spojite kameru na TV prijamnik visoke
razlučivosti koji podržava HDMI i zatim reproducirate snimljene snimke visoke
razlučivosti, one će biti prikazane u visokoj razlučivosti sa zvukom visoke kvalitete.
1 Spojite uređaj na TV prijamnik.
Napredne funkcije (Reprodukcija)
Gledanje videozapisa/fotografija na TV prijamniku
Page: 57
- 58 -
2 Odaberite videoulaz na TV prijamniku.
●
●Primjer:
Odaberite [HDMI] kanal kada koristite HDMI minikabel.
Odaberite kanal [Video 2] kada koristite AV kabel
(nazivi kanala mogu se razlikovati ovisno o spojenom TV prijamniku).
●
●Provjerite ulaznu postavku (ulazni prekidač) i postavku ulaza zvuka na TV prijamniku
(za više informacija pročitajte upute za uporabu TV prijamnika).
3 Promijenite način rada na za reprodukciju.
●
●Kada je spojen na televizor, uređaj u načinu reprodukcije ne reproducira zvuk.
Glasnoća se također ne može podešavati na uređaju, stoga podesite glasnoću na
televizoru.
●
●Funkcijska ikona nestat će prilikom spajanja pomoću HDMI minikabela. Pritisnite
gumb ENTER da biste prikazali funkcijsku ikonu.
Kabeli Referentne stavke
HDMI minikabel
(neobavezan)
●
●Povezivanje putem HDMI minikabela (→59)
●
●Reprodukcija korištenjem opcije VIERA Link (→ 60)
●
●Ako su istovremeno spojeni HDMI minikabel i AV kabel, prioritet kod izlaznog signala
imat će HDMI kabel, a zatim AV kabel.
●
●Tijekom snimanja na TV prijamniku neće biti dostupna reprodukcija zvuka.
- 53 -
¬ Change the mode to .
∫ To delete scenes or still pictures from the thumbnail display
1 Press the button while the thumbnail view screen is displayed.
2 Select [ALL SCENES] or [SELECT]
using the cursor button, then
press the ENTER button.
≥ All the scenes or still pictures displayed as
thumbnails will be deleted by selecting
[ALL SCENES].
(In case of playing back scenes or still pictures by date, all the scenes or still pictures on
the selected date will be deleted.)
≥ Protected scenes/still pictures cannot be deleted.
3 (When [SELECT] is selected in Step 2)
Select the scene/still picture to be deleted, then press the ENTER
button.
≥ The scene/still picture is selected and the indication appears on the thumbnail. Press
the ENTER button again to cancel the operation.
≥ Up to 99 scenes can be selected to be deleted.
4 (When [SELECT] is selected in Step 2)
Select [Delete], and press the ENTER button, or the button.
≥ To continuously delete other scenes/still pictures, repeat Steps 3-4.
When you stop deleting halfway
Press the MENU button while deleting.
≥ The scenes or still pictures that have already been deleted when the deletion is cancelled
cannot be restored.
Advanced (Playback)
Deleting scenes/still pictures
Deleted scenes/still pictures cannot be restored, so perform appropriate
confirmation of the contents before proceeding with deletion.
To delete the scene or still picture
being played back
Press the button while scenes or still
pictures to be deleted are being played back.
- 58 -
2 Select the video input on the TV.
≥ Example:
Select the [HDMI] channel with a HDMI mini cable.
Select the [Video 2] channel with an AV cable.
(The name of the channel may differ depending on the connected TV.)
≥ Check the input setting (input switch) and the audio input setting on the TV. (For more
information, please read the operating instructions for the TV.)
3 Change the mode to to play back.
≥ When connected to a television, the unit does not output sound in playback mode. Also,
the volume cannot be adjusted on the unit, so please make volume adjustments on your
television.
≥ Operation icon will disappear when connected with an HDMI mini cable. Press the ENTER
button to display operation icon.
≥ If the HDMI mini cable and AV cable are connected at the same time, output will be
prioritised in order of the HDMI mini cable, AV cable.
≥ No audio will be played on the TV during recording mode.
Cables Reference items
A HDMI mini cable (optional) ≥ Connecting with a HDMI mini cable (l 59)
≥ Playback using VIERA Link (l 60)

Question & answers

There are no questions about the Panasonic HC-V10EG yet.

Ask a question about the Panasonic HC-V10EG

Have a question about the Panasonic HC-V10EG but cannot find the answer in the user manual? Perhaps the users of ManualsCat.com can help you answer your question. By filling in the form below, your question will appear below the manual of the Panasonic HC-V10EG. Please make sure that you describe your difficulty with the Panasonic HC-V10EG as precisely as you can. The more precies your question is, the higher the chances of quickly receiving an answer from another user. You will automatically be sent an e-mail to inform you when someone has reacted to your question.